DOCUNENT RESUME

ED 112 452 CS 501 129

AUTHOR Draper, Benjamin, Ed. TITLE Pacific Nations III and Bibliography; Symposium held at the Annual Broadcast Industry Conference (24th, , April 21-25, 1974). INSTITUTION San Francisco State Univ., Calif. PUB DATE Apr 74 NOTE 152p.

EDRS PRICE MF-$O.76 HC-$8.24 Plus Postage DESCRIPTORS *Broadcast Industry; *Communication (Thought Transfer); *Communications; Conference Reports; Cultural Interrelationships; Foreign Relations; Futures (of Society) ;Higher Education; *; Radio; * IDENTIFIERS *Broadcast Industry Conference

ABSTRACT Contained in this document are the papers presented at the twenty-fourth annual Broadcast Industry Conference held at State University in San Francisco in 1974. Following welcoming remarks, the contents include papers on a mass communication plan for , plans for an institute for international communication located at San Francisco State University, a description of broadcasting in the People's Republic of , an examination of the electronic media in teaching self-awareness and in preparing people for changing futures, a review of the basic principles cf four-channel FM broadcasting using the Dorren Quadraplex system, the importance of television in presenting information about public affairs, and a review of the role and responsibilities of the broadcaster. An annotated selective bibliography on the broadcast industry is also included. (RB)

*********************************************************************** Documents acquired by ERIC include many informal unpublished * materials not available from other sources. ERIC makes every effort * * to obtain the best copy available. Nevertheless, items of marginal * * reproducibility are often encountered and this affects the quality * * of the microfiche and hardcopy reproductions ERIC makes available * * via the ERIC Document Reproduction Service (EDRS). ERRS is not * responsible for the quality of the original document. Reproductions * * supplied by EDRS are the best that can be made from the original. *********************************************************************** U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH. EDUCATION & WELFARE NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF EDUCATION THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN REPRO DUCED EXACTLY AS RECEIVED FROM THE PERSON DR ORGANIZATION ORIGIN ATING IT POINTS OF VIEW OR OPINIONS STATED DO NDT NECESSARILY REPRE SENT OFFICIAL NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF EDUCATION POSITION OR POLICY t2Tat IMM212 o AZ VINIA8 221 AD 12 o 8M..

Benjamin Draper Editor

A Symposium held at the Twenty-Fourth Annual Broadcast Industry Conference, San Francisco State University, San Francisco, April 21-25, 1974.

Broadcast Industry Conference San Francisco State University

1 974 TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 1

Dr. Benjamin Draper, Ph.D., Cochairman 3 Twenty-fourth Annual Broadcast Industry Conference 3

PART I THE TWENTY-FOURTH CONFERENCE 7 Welcoming Remarks 9 Paul F. Romberg, Ph.D., President, SFSU

Welcoming Address 11 J. Fenton McKenna, Ph.B. L L.B, JD., Dean, School of Creative Arts

PART II INTERNATIONAL BROADCASTING PROBLEMS 13 A Mass Communication Plan For India 15 Richard J. Knecht, University of Toledo

Malaysian Broadcasting: Guided Media In Operation 19 John A. Lent, Ph.D., Associate Professor of Communications

An Institute For International Communication At SFSU 25 Herbert Zettl, Ph.D., Professor of Broadcast Communication Arts, SFSU

Telecommunication In 31 Valmar C. Figueiredo, SFSU

Broadcasting in the People's Republic of China 37 Peter Graumann, SFSU

The Multinational Concept 45 Noreene Khanna,

An Appraisal Of Harrison Salisbury 49 Reverend Richard N. Isaacs, SFSU

Inside China 51 Dr. Eugene Bertermann, Far East Broadcasting Company

PART III AMERICAN BROADCASTING PROBLEMS 63 Electronic Media As An Instructional Strategy For Self-Awareness And Future Change 65 William Murry, SFSU

3 A Comparative Analysis Of Matrix And Discrete Four Channel Discs 73 Tye J. ldonas, SFSU

Basic Principles Of Four Channel FM Broadcasting Using The Dorren Quadraplex System 91 Tye J. ldonas, SFSU

Telecommunications And Social Impact 95 Joan McKenna, President, Quantum Communications

Communication And Human Survival 99 Geraldine B. Lange, SFSU

Television Network News: Caught In The Middle 103 William C. Wente, Ph.D., Professor of Broadcast Communications Art

BCTV: A Good Neighbor Approach To Education 109 Dr. Rene Cardena, Executive Director

Public Affairs Symposium 113 Raymond N. Doyle, Moderator, Assoc. Dean, School of Creative Arts

Public Affairs: Bilingual Television 115 Len Schlosser, Public Affairs Director KPIX-TV

Thoughts On Public Affairs 117 Herb Levy, Public Affairs Director, KRON

PART IV CHALLENGE STATEMENTS 121 Experience Necessary: Myth Or Reality 123 James Strickling, SFSU

Broadeasting's Ignored Minority 125 J.F. Brown, SFSU

My Challenge 127 Michele Acosta, SFSU

Challenge To Broadcasters 129 Lincoln Pain and Jon Holden, SFSU

About The News 131 Juno C.H. Lin, SFSU

The Responsible Broadcaster 133 Chaz Austin, SFSU

PART V SELECTED, ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY 137 Selected, Annotated Bibliography 139

ii PART VI CDNFERENCE STAFF AND PARTICIPANTS 165 Lee Rich, President, Lorimar Productions 167

The Banquet Speech 169 Mr. Lee Rich, Speaker

Conference Participants 173

Supplemental Participants 179

The Conference Staff 181

iii INTRODUCTION

Benjamin P. Draper, Ph.D., Cochuirmun Twenty-fourth Annual Broadcast Industry Conference San Francisco State University

The Pacific holds three-fourths of the area of the There is one TV set for every five persons. A third world, andthree-fourthsofthe people.Further- of the sets are in color. more, in this vast area, there are surges of economic and social upheavals unmatched in all history. No- Both radio and TV have come rapidly to the fore as where in the technological advance has there occur- faras . Japan has 55 TV red more significant changes than in the medium of stations in the country, loosely called networks, in communications. The revolution is worldwide, but addition to NKH. Like the British, as soon as there inthePacificthere are more startling advances were two systems competing for viewers, there were because of distance, multiplicity of nations and lan- better programs.Inthe schools,there are highly guages, andmultihundredmillionpeoples with developed programs in both radio and TV. There highly nationalistic feelings. are 22 hours of radio and 36 hours of TV available in every school. Radio and television have changed all mankind in scarcely two generations. They brought literacy to many, and more important, a kind of two-way com- INDIA munication to the masses. Great distances in the Broadcasting, in reach and significance, constitutes Pacific were brought into instant communication via the most powerful medium of mass communication radio. Now, in two decades, there is television. More inIndia. Air India Radio was organized in1936. recently, a refinement of electronics has brought the When India gained independence in 1947, the goal into reality. was to provide countrywide service in radio. The government controls both radio and TV in India. So San Francisco State University has a new edition of far it has only provided broadcasting for about 61% Pacific Nations BroadcastingIIIdetailing essential of the available market. The striking difficulty is in facts of 55 countries in radio, television, and satel- reaching the people when 80% live in rural and scat- lites. Astounding strides were taken in every nation. teredareas. A whole new world opened up when Thirty-nine countries had television, in 1973, out of radio was begunforIndia,asithad only 24% 55 inthe Pacific and in 1974 there were 41.In literacy. 1972 there were 39 countries with TV while every country had radio. Televisionis new in India. In New Delhi, there are 100,000 sets. The major activityisin schools.In 1959 there was a project in television dS d part of I APAN UNESCO. There is planned a satellite for allIndia. Ofallthe nations inthe Pacific, Japanis most The communications orh, in She air now, is experi- advanced in the broadcasting field. With 115 million mental. It will eventually cover the entire country population,the Japanesehavehighlydeveloped 1,2b9,000 square miles and 550,000,000 people. public and commercialradio and TV. While the UnitedStateshas comparable privateenterprise, PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA broadcasting in Japanisfar ahead in the area of public services. Japan Broadcasting Company (NKH) In 1949, with the formation of the People's Repub. is government-owned. Every set in the country has lic of China, broadcasting in the large cities came an annual tax placed on it both radio and tele- under the governments control. Radio was instituted vision. With the densest populationinthe world in rural areas over the entire country. All of China ( is second), 94% of the people have radios. was swiftly covered by a government controlled

-3- . The center of China's domestic ser- the Dlympic Games, Expo '70 in Japan, and Little vice was the Chinese General Broadcasting Station League Baseball. in Peking.

Education has top priority in all radio and television (begun in 1958). There are Radio Universities in all With a population today of 13 million, Australia has areas with supplemental written materials. News has added 25% more people since World War II, about an important part to play in programming of Radio half from immigration from Britain. Radio began in Peking. Normally, some 15 hours are given to the 1923 in Australia. From the start, there were both news. Another program is "The Pages of History"; "A" (nonadvertising) and "B" (advertising) stations. another "Popular Sciences". For the most part, tele- Radio instantly became indispensable to Australia visionreceivers are installedin public places. The because of the vast distances and remote, scattered Peking TV University has 23,000 full-time students. population.(Australiaisabout the areaofthe Therehave beenestablished TV Universitiesin .) , Canton, Tientsin, and Harbin. All high school students are required to learn English. Television began in 1950 when started regu- lar transmissions. In 1972 there were 88 TV stations The visit of President Nixon signaled the beginning 37 national and 51 commercial outlets. About of two-way communications between the United 95% of the population can receive TV. In fact, in States and China. There is a long way to go, but big 1972 there were 3,360,000 sets, or about 340 sets strides have already been taken. China purchased in a thousand people. Now color has come to Aus- from the United States the satellite set-up for the tralia.Inboth commercial and national TV, the President's visit. China had an orbiting satellite in programming is allocated by categories. 1970, but there is not yet regular broadcasting via satellite. RADIO Entertainment 30%; Classical Music 20%; News 9%; Spoken Word 8%; Sports 6%; Parliament 4%; Drama and Features 4%; Edu- NATIONALIST CHINA cation3%; Religious 3%; Light Music 2%; With only 15 million people, Taiwan is the most Rural 2%; and Children 3%. productive nation of all . Density is 417 people per square kilometer, the world's highest. With a TELEVISION(itis somewhat different) strong and steady growth of gross national product Drama29%; Education 23%; Sports10%; of $2 billion, they had an 11% gain in 1972. Also, Weather 7%; News 6%; and the others make like Japan, Taiwan is the most developed in broad- up the remaining spectrum. casting of all Asia. Radio receivers totalled 3 mil- lion, or more than one for every five persons. There Australia transmits to most of the world high fre- are 36 broadcasting companies in the country. The quencybroadcasting,withspecialemphasison largest Broadcasting Corporation of China,ispri- Southeast Asia. Radio Australia beams 60 broad- vately owned although operated under government casts in a 24-hour period daily. contract. Radio services include domestic and over- seas beams. The Voice of Free China (world-wide) is on the air 550 hours daily in 17 languages and dia- NEW ZEALAND lects. New Zealand has a brand new commonwealth law which embraces both radio and television (public TelevisioncametoTaiwan in1962 and grew and private) communications. Licenses are set by rapidly. (Both export and domestic electronic equip- law $3.00 for a radio receiver and $13.00 for a ment bulk large in the country.) Approximately one television. With atotalpopulation of 3 million, million TV sets are in use today. Sixty-six percent there are 700,000radiosetsinthe country.In of programs are imported, principally by the United additionto domestic service of 24-hour programs, States and Japan. Live broadcasts transmitted via New Zealand broadcasts to Antarctica daily, to the satellite have been a reality since 1969. Nationalist Pacificislands15-hoursdaily,and12-htiursto China has been a leading nation in such events as Australia.

- 4 - 7 Because of the high cost of television, the growth of guage.Under theMinistryofInformation, radio the industry was delayed until 1959. Then it grew became one of a number of nation-building tools. A rapidly and now there are 650,000 sets, or TV in notable accomplishment has been an adult educa- 80% of the homes. Comparable figures for other tion series. has a total of 60 radio stations countries are: United States 94%, Canada 92%, and about 6 million sets in the country. Intele- Britain 83%, and Australia 65%. vision,thereare7stationswith approximately 150,000 TV sets in use. The entire communications complex is government controlled. USSR The vast territory of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics contains one-sixth of the earth's land sur- face and, in area is the largest country of the world. The honor belongs to Thailand for the firsttele- The population is 245 million only outstripping visioninmainland Asia, in 1955. Radio began in China and India. All communications are controlled 1939, and now has a network of governmental seg- by the state. The Soviets stress education in the ments postal,telegraph,army,navy,police, media, both in the schools and home viewing. There universities,Royalhousehold, andtheministry. are one in three radio sets of the total population. There are 80 radio sets per 1000 people inthe As fortelevision,the ;ountry has a capacity of country, and half of the population is within range reaching 140 million people, but is only reaching of television with nine transmitters throughout the about 40 million people at present. The tallest and land. is rapidly coming to the largest television tower in the world is in the heart fore as Asia goes. Seven in 1000 have TV sets. Thai of Moscow. television is geared toward informing and educating.

The USSR is a member of Intervision, a Soviet bloc mutual program exchange relay network similar to PHILIPPINES Eurovision. Dn occasion, Intervision has combined With martial law in the country, there are changes its facilities with Eurovision. Soviet communications in the structure of both radio and television. With a are far advanced in telegraph, telephone, radio, and population of 38 million, there are 30 sets per 1000 television. Hotline communication between the USA people in radio and 10 television sets per 1000. The and USSR was established in 1971 with a secondary government owns one televisionstation andthe system RCA Globe. other is in private hands.

The 10 nations mentioned arethe bulkofthe INDONESIA countries found in the Pacific basin. Thera are, in Although Indonesiaisfifthinpopulationinthe addition, nations around the rim of North Pacific nations (123 million) the countryis only and South America with some ties with Asia. There beginning to have a network communications for a are, further, many small island nations. With these vast country spread upon the largest archipelago in 10 maim countries,three-fourths ofthe world is theworld. Indonesiacomprisesabout13,000 accounted for. islands,the largest Java.Ithas one of the most densely populated areasinthe world, with 1,500 The Pacific generally is making great strides in com- persons to the square mile. Indonesiaisthe most munication.Alreadytherearelongrangeradio critical emerging nation in the Pacific. netvi.;,-0!.; in every country of the Pacific, and TV is swiftly moving to the fore. With the advent of satel- During the 1950's the government faced the task of lites,thePacific world has grown much smaller. creating a nation out of the largest island complex Thereishope inthe future offree exchange in in the world, containing 200 different languages. In radio and television among the 3 billion people of the schoolsEnglishisa compulsory second Ian- the bro countries of the Pacific.

Benjamin P. Draper, Ph.D. San I raneisco State University Professor, Broadcast Communication Arts Reprinted Apr's 14, 1974 by the School of Creative Arts, San F r an ci sco State University San Francisco Sundayxaro.ner & Chtorr,ie

-5- 8 PART I

THE TWENTY-FOURTH CONFERENCE WELCOMING REMARKS

Paul F. Romberg, Ph.D. President, San Francisco State University

I am pleasedto welcome you to San Francisco This year's theme is"Positive Influences in World State University to participate in this year's Broad- Communication". Much has been said in the recent cast Industry Cui.i.tunce. We have with us a num- past about negative influences. The media surrounds ber of foreign visitors including representatives from us with bad news. But human experience is not con- the Philippines, Taiwan, and Brazil. In addition, we fined to bad news. have many national broadcasters and also a signifi- cant number of students. To all of our guests and Does broadcasting need improvement? Many feel it

participants, I extend a most coridal welcome on does.In speaking of television, the late Edward R. behalfof SanFranciscoStateUniversity.This Murrow said: annual eventis one of the major activities on our This instrument can teach,,it can illuminate; campus, and we are proud to serve as host each , and it can even inspire. But it can do so year, so that broadcasters, and those interested in only tothe extent that humans are deter- becoming broadcasters, can examine major issues of mined to use it to those ends. Otherwise, it is concern to those in the electronic media. merely wires and lights in a box.

This is our twenty-fourth annual Broadcast Industry Itisthis concern with the need to improve the Conference. When we offered our first one in 1949, quality of broadcasting which brings us here for this television was still in its infancy. Many did not real- Conference. ize the full potential of the electronic media. Since thattime theroleofthe electronic mediahas Since many of you here today will enter careers in expandeddramatically.Andtheimpact oothe electronic media in the not too distant future, you world communityisincalculable. Consider where willhave an opportunity to consider the positive the electronic media has taken us on the beaches potential of radio and television. Most of you are in in Dunkirk, to Times Square in 1945 on V-E Day, a position to make positive changes. While some will intothe McCarthy/Army Hearings,toDallas on seektraditionalcareersinbroadcasting stations, November 1953, and oven tothe: moon with Neil such careers do not represent the limits of what is Armstrong. Who amongst us twenty-four years ago possible. You have an unparalleled opportunity to would have believed that millions of people in the create your own jobs. world wouldsharethe experiencesofthefirst human being to land on the moon. Radio and tele- Every day we read of innovative uses of electronic vision have expanded the experiences of all of us, media. Several days ago we read of a surgeon who Civilization can never be the same again. Informa- has developeda technique for using atelevision tionsurroundsandinnundates usthroughthe camera and a microscope to conduct delicate surgi- electronic media, The materialthatisbroadcast cal procedures. With the expansion of technology in daily changes and shapes our society in many ways. our society, there are no limits.

As students and professional broadcasters, you have Even in the area of traditional broadcasting, there an awesome responsibility. You have at your finger areopportunitiesto make positive contributions. tipsthe means tomanipulate the attitudes and You can do anything you want to do. If you doubt values of those who receive your programming. As this, take a look at the number and quality of those broadcasters, you must be prepared to be account- who received this year's Preceptor awards. Remem- able for content. As consumers, we also must be ber, they too were once students. actively concerned with the content of your pro- grams. Content is a shared responsibility. Since the establishment of our Broadcast Communi-

9 - 13 cation Arts program, we have graduated over 1000 work, we have been able to obtain funding so that broadcasters at both the baccalaureate and master's. our broadcasting program will have color facilities level. An amazingly high percentage of our grad- available to us. uates have become established successfully in broad- castingorrelatedfields.Ourgraduatesareall This important breakthrough will provide our stu- around the world in 25 countries. Some of them are dents with further opportunities to develop skills back with us for this Conference. needed to become competent professionals in broad- casting. We have beenfortunateinhaving had Once 'againI am pleased to extend a cordial wel- facilities more extensive than many commercial tele- come to you and wish you success in your personal, vision stations, and the addition of color represents professional, and academic exchanges in the Broad- a significantadditiontoan already outstanding cast IndustryConference. I hope youwillbe physical plant. challenged as you consider "Positive Influences in

World Communication". I also invite you to visit our newly opened stereo facilities which are the most advanced in the west. Before I conclude my remarks I would like to make one last announcement which should be of special Once again, my best wishes for a stimulating and interest to members of the BCA faculty, staff, and productive Conference our broadcasting students. After several years of

10 WELCOMING ADDRESS

J. Fenton McKenna, Ph.B, LL.B, J.D. Dean, School of Creative Arts San Francisco State University

I am pleased to have the privilege of welcoming you Frequently one attends conferences that are cen- tothe Twenty-fourth Annual Broadcast Industry tered in the media and the post conversation has to Conference in the name of the students and the do in most instances with the fantastic new hard- faculty of the School of Creative Arts. The depart- ware with the new technological developments ment which has sponsored these sessions is one of withwhatispossibleinthescientificuseof the dynamic units of the school and one of which equipment. And itis truly astounding! Frequently we are very proud. A moment's reflection on one unbelievable!Recallthe major developments we fact gives a major reason for that feeling this is have seeninthatbrief space of time since the the twenty-fourth annual conference virtually a medium began with AM radio; FM radio; FM Multi- quarter of a century. The first such meeting was plex; VHR-TV; UHF-TV; Color Television;and held in 1949 under the guidance of the department 3atelites and refinements in the technological use chairman at the time, Raymond Doyle, currently an of all these.It is an astounding story. It raises for associate dean in the school. me, and I'm sure for those who have come to this conference, the question...Has the quality of our 1949 Consider the state of the industry at that use of the hardware kept pace with the technologi- time, and even more significantly, the setting for cal developments? education in broadcasting. With these things in mind we can realize how filled with vision were the early A few days ago I read the prognosis of a scientist members ofthe embryo department and, at the who was commenting on the fact that the weather same time, we can realize how those visions have waF. changing, growing colder, and that we might be become remarkable reality, step by step, over the headed for another ice age. This prediction triggered years. in my mind the image of some cataclysmic event which might bury our civilization. Eons from now The interest in quality was the thrust of the idea in anthropologists carrying out a dig would rediscover' establishing the conference and the awards. That our civilization. At that moment what would we he same interest still dominates the work of the depart- most proud of, and what might we prefer to have ment. The success of these developments in a great hidden?Ifthey should decide to reconstruct our measure isas attributable, however, to those key civilizationfrom what theyfound,theysurely figures in the industry whose concern was, and is, would be impressed with the quality of our tech- to maintain excellence in the field as practiced as it nology. Would they he equally impressed with the is to the educational units which are the sources of use we had made of that technology? the creative and productive minds in the industry. We owe them much for their helpful response and I am sure many of you saw and heard on the Today for their support. Over the years more and more of Show the tribute to Frank McGee, tc my mind a these leaders are graduates of the Department of great practitioner in his field. After speaking of his Broadcast Communication Arts so that we have a intellectual capability, his integrity, his love of man- doublepleasureintheirparticipationinthe kind, Gene Shallet finally said he wished to pay him conference. the highest accolade and one that Frank would like he was a teacher in the very best sense of the

I do not want to intrude on the time of your major word. This,it seems to me, isthe ultimate best program but I would like to make one or two fur- international use of the medium as a teaching ther observations. factor for teaching is not presenting a bias,itis not merely documentary, it is not merely reporting, This is the challenge as I see it. To meet it we need itis not preaching, it is rather exposure in full light morepreceptors,moreteachersandthegreat oftruth,beauty, and goodness for and toward interest in mankind that sets aside political consider- understanding. Itis not to the end that all shall be ations. We need persons of integrity, persons whose alike but rather that we shall understand and devotion and commitment are centeredinother appreciate each other for our differences because we persons, persons who are willing to sacrifice for the know each other. William Shelton, in speaking of accomplishment of the higher purposes of education teaching, said: ...the seeking and the exposure of truth the pursuit of the beautiful and the good (not ina Deeper and more fundamental than sexuality, romantic sense but inits substantial meaning) deeper than the cravings for social power, that which exalts the mind or spirit. deeper even than the desire for possession, there is still more generalized and more uni-

versal craving in the human makeup. It is the Today I should like to announce the establishment craving for knowledge of the right direction oftheSchoolofCreativeArts'Distinguished for orientation. Achievement Award inorder torecognize those men and women who represent these attributes of This is the challenge reorientation of nations and the master preceptor. This award will be known in of our civilization. This can be the significant inter- perpetuity as The Benjamin Draper Distinguished national role of the broadcast media. Achievement Award. The veryfirstpersonto receive the award is a man who for years has been The computer is phenomenal technologically. The quick to recognize the qualities of the master pre- programmer makes the difference in its higher uses. ceptor in others: Dr. Benjamin Draper himself. So too, does the programmer determine the broad- cast media's effectiveness.It can be the forerunner to diplomacy by making the world ready so that A permanent scroll to be placed on exhibit in the diplomatic seed does not fall on fallow ground or school will record his name in its title and as its rock without the preparation and understanding, first recorded recipient. His individual citation reads diplomacy is at best power rearrangement. as follows:

TO DR. BENJAMIN DRAPER FOR HIS PROFESSIONAL COMPETENCE AND INTEGRITY, FOR HIS SCHOLARSHIP AND CREATIVE ABILITY AS A TEACHER, FOR HIS PERSONAL CHARM, WIT, AND LOVE OF MANKIND AS REFLECTED IN HIS TEACHING AND FOR HIS LEADERSHIP OF THE BROADCAST INDUSTRY CONFERENCE OVER THE YEARS. COMBINING HIS YEARS OF PROFESSIONAL EXPERIENCE WITHHIS ACADEMIC ACCOMPLISHMENTS HE HAS BEEN AN INSPIRING PRECEPTOR AND LEADER.

A presentation of the scroll will be made on an- other appropriate occasion.

-12- cm 1 PART II

INTERNATIONAL BROADCASTING PROBLEMS A MASS COMMUNICATION PLAN FOR INDIA

Richard I. Knecht University of Toledo Ohio

People in India are limited in what they can do to their country merely to strengthen the solidarity of improve their situation by the society around them, each layer and segment of society or will it try to theirpoverty, andtheirlackof education. This open the flow of ideas across linguistic and social situation may seemirreversiblesince a complete barriers on a path to modernization.2If it is to do change ina value system cannot be accomplished thelatter,India must construct a program which unless education is improved and poverty is greatly would help bring better understanding among the reduced. Before attempting to design a mass com- inhabitants, reduce illiteracy, promote good farming munication program which wouldeliminatethe practices,encouragefamilyplanning,andfoster barriers obstructing progress in the development of education atalllevels. Due to diverse needs, no India,itwill be necessary to briefly examine the single project exists that India can copy as an exact background of the seventh largest country in the model for its own development. However, the fol- world. Inadequate road systems, high rates ofil- lowing recommendations might serve as an outline literacy, and many different languages within the to be used in developing a mass communication country create what seem tobe insurmountable system. problems which keep these people in a state of anxiety with little or no hope for a better life in the future. COMMUNITY INVOLVEMENT Authoritiesintheareaof mass communication The populationofIndia, according to the 1970 agree that the greatest failure of most campaignes is census, is 533 million with a growth rate of 2.5% or due to alackof community involvement. As it 13millionadditionalpeople annually. Although were, the local citizenry in many cases is ignored. English and Hindi are the official languages of the This need not be the case in India, since the Pan- country, 14 other languages are also spoken with chayat (an elected village council which supervises 250 regional dialects interspersed among them. all the development programs in its area) can play a key role in the building of a mass communication Neither the magnitude nor the diversity of India, staggering as they may be, are alone the system.'These officials are already looked upon as source of India's communication problems. opinion leaders and are trusted by local citiiens. One must look at the special character of They could make suggestions in the drafting of a India'ssocialsystem.To use a botanical particular program to help meet community needs. simile, India's social system can be likened to If the leaders consent to move toward modernisa- a fruit with the combined properties of a tan- tion, they must be informed in advance that itis gerine and an onion. Like a tangerine, India is divided into segments linguistic, regional, not unusual for a developmental program to take at religious, and tribal. And like the onion, India least two years of preparation before itis ready to is composed of a succession of layered seg- be tested. Once they have accepted the idea that ments, castes and socioeconomic classes, with successisnotimmediateoreveninevitable, a layers of each segment unconnected with the campaign can be designed. layers of the other segments.'

Certainly the caste system in India must be consid- FUNDING ered as an impediment to any mass communication system.Perhaps thecentralquestioniswhether Funding for a particular program can be obtained Indians will utilize a mass communication system of through one of several granting agencies such as

1.Daniel Lerner and Wilbur Schram, ed. Communication and Change in the Developing Countries, p. 192. 2.ibid., P. 194. 3. Serves Rural Development, p. 7.

-15- Ford, Rockefeller, or the Asia Foundation. Advisers media does exist in the country. Each medium must from UNESCO may alsohelplocalplanners by now be developed to meet the needs of its people. knowing, in advance, whatitisthat a particular Before developing aplan,itwill be necessary to village hopes to accomplish by employing mass com- examine the extent each of the mass media has munications. played in past communication campaigns and where each has worked most effectively. Not one or all Since almost 85% of the population live in small the media in combination will serve as a panacea for villages, from 500 to 1,000 inhabitants, a mass com- India'sintricateproblem, but individuallyorin munication systemwillfirsthave tolinkthese combination they may be able to reduce some of communities together. The use of a pilot project is the obstacles in the path of development to a more more feasible than a full model since errors can be manageable size. more easily corrected on a small scale.If the Pan- chayat could convince the citizens of their area of the value of mass communications in bettering their NEWSPAPERS living conditions, then they could begin by building The newspaper isthe only mass medium which is a road from one small village to a neighboring larger not a government monopoly in India. Of course, in village. a country with a high illiteracy (349 million Indians cannot read) the use of the printed word, of neces- Eventuallythecitizens wouldbuilda common sity will be limited. However, the literate section of community center either between or in the larger the population cannot be ignored either. In actual village. Of course, the situationitself will dictate practice, anything printed on coarse paper and in where and whether rebuilding new accommodations big type willpass asmaterialsuitable for rural will be needed. This community center, as it were, readers.Ithas been proved that a mimeographed canbecome thehubofsocial and educational newsletterdistributedinmodestnumbers does activity.It would allow for personal contact, now produce a significant rise in the amount of villagers on a broader scale, and for the introduction of new information regarding current news.'Since the dis- innovations. Free public transportation would aid in tribution system of newspapers is not linked by a bringing citizens to the center. This method would central agency and publications do not move easily help assure the innovators of having an audience. from one region to another, a small weekly paper Large, colorful posters on the sides of the free buses printedat anddistributedfrom the community would attract attention as would a public address center would provide readers with current news. system announcing the events at the center. Refresh- ments would also induce the audience to attend. Young children, attending the community center day school, could be taught to read the papers and for an Engineers from UNESCO may help in the installation assignment toldto read them to their parents.It of equipment to be used. Of course, citizens should would give the child practice and would also allow be encouragedandpaidfortheirlaborinthe the parent to hear of the news from an additional program. Technicians involved in similar developmen- source. The use of the printed word in our plan is tal programs have suggested that if possible all the onlyabeginning; but until more people can be equipment used to transmit messages in a given area taught to read and the advantages of being literate of mass communications should come from the same are known to them, we must be satisfied with the manufacturer. Training, repairs, and transference of idea of having at least introduced the new channel. knowledge, i.e., from one medium to another is made easier for the new generation of skilled technicians. FILMS India, in attempting to build an effective mass com- Although India ranks second after Japan among the munication system for educating its people, should world's film-making countries: not be discouraged by the failure that has resulted Only in other countries or by her own past efforts. The limited use has been made of this medium toteachdetailed practices:Their country is more fortunate than some of the other principle use so far has peen to build certain "have-not-nations"ofthe world, since the mass images and to convey information regarding

1. Selden and Audrey Meneffee. A Country Weekly Proves Itself in India, p. 116. specific programs and innovations. Most of the It is not difficult to see why radio should be films have an urban bias. Where they seek to particularly useful in rural development pro- entertain as well as educate, the emphasis on grams. It covers great distances and leaps all entertainment is so great that the educational kinds of natural barriers. It is swift in reaching part is wholly or partly missed. Or alternatively, a listener.Itisthe cheapest of the major the instructional element is so heavy and drab media in production, and reception can also that the film bores the village people. Choice of be inexpensive. Now that transistor receivers themes, mode or treatment, and use of language are widely available, radio communication can and symbols leave much to be desired.1 be received even where there is no electricity. It is equally effective with literates and illit- erates. And it lends itself to a great variety of This situation isunfortunate because apotential content and forms.2 instrumentforinstruction isvirtuallyuntapped. Demonstrations performed on film and shown at Villagers, provided with transistors, could listen to the community center could be beneficialif there musical jingles of the type that are so popular in was alive demonstration done in the village as a the film industry in the larger cities and even the follow up. Using localinhabitants, trained to use rural areas. The music should necessarily be of the the equipment and other townspeople as the perfor- variety that is familiar to the audience, but the sub- mers will add credibility to the message. stitutionof the proper lyrics would be allimpor- tant. Words could be repeated and rhymed so that Involvement between advisors from such agencies as they would be more easily remembered. These musi- UNESCO and the opinion leaders from the town cal announcements need not be long but could be willgive direction to implementing messages that followed by a short program dealing with the same should be included in films seen by viewers at the topic and. repeated several times during the day and community center. Although films that are being night so as to touch most of the listening audience. suggested for production are comparable to home movies, thereis probably no better mass medium Dramatizations borrowing from oral tradition in the mare suitedtoselfidentification.Simple films form of serials or the common might be could reveal the progress that has resulted with the especially helpful. The stories would of necessity introduction of road building and of the community depict village life as it presently is and as it should center which was erected. This beginning may be be in the future. A possible underlying theme could considered crude by most standards, but it must be be how education helps to foster a better under- remembered that thisis only a starting point. After standing between family members, the community, some success on an elementary level, more compli- and society as a whole. cated themes and techniques could be used for teaching better farming practices, reducing disease and generally improving living conditions through- TELEVISION AND THE SATELLITE out the country. Only one exists inIndia, and the total number of receiversis estimated at 6,000 or RADIO 7,000 all within the broadcasting range of this one station which broadcasts for only three hours India has 52 broadcasting stations and about 61/2 per day, severely limiting its usefulness in any mass million receiving sets. These figures may seem im- campaign. However, past performance demonstrates pressive until one realires that there are only two that television can be successful in improving the radiosper1,000 personsinthe whole country. educational system. Presently only one-quarter of all rural areas receive radio broadcasts. With increased use of transistor In New Delhi, over 30,000 students are re- sets instead of the expensive community sets,itis ceiving enrichment lessions in language and expected that rural listening will become very com- science by the use of about 500 television sets mon. Since by all accounts, radio has been the most placed inthe schools.Reports are encour- Bothteachers and administrators are successful medium for reaching large audiences, its aging. quoted as saying thatthe television lessons, inclusion is vitally important.

1.D. Lerner and W. Schram. p. 163. 2. Wilbur Schramm. Mass Media and National Development, p. 151

-17- 17 and in particular the lessons in Hindi, provide barriers of illiteracy, misunderstanding, and poverty, as much learningfortheteachers as the through the aidoftelevision,can eventually be students.' removed from society.

This rudimentary beginning may not be enough If we go beyond excathedra teaching and look since Indiaisin no positionto wait while mass at what has already been tried out in some media develops within her borders. countries,i.e.,the simultaneous use of all possible teaching machines for some aspects of a subject we find that learning is both fas- In an effort to expand the present operation, India ter and more thorough.6 andtheUnitedStateshavescheduledforlate 1974-75 a satellite project for direct broadcast of As a result, instructional television holds promise of Indian developed instruction. TV programs to rural permitting rapid improvement of educational quality community receivers, and to feed standard trans- in all quality problem areas previously listed. mitters located in several large cities for rediffusion insurroundingvillages.' Sinceour community center would already be in operation at the time CONCLUSION when the satellite projectis begun, we could be expected to be included. The mass communications plan proposedinthis paperisnot completely unique, but has demon- strated some utilizations of the media which have A primaryobjectiveofthe experiement isto demonstrate the potential value of scientific tech- succeeded in other countries. The difference in the nology in the growth of effective mass communica- author's strategy has been to try to make the adap- tationoftheplanexclusivelythat of tryingto tionin developing countries.3Under the experi- remedy a situation peculiar to India and her people. mental plan,the Indian government will provide Every effortpossible was made to 5,000 villages with $500 receiving sets for com- stress the im- munity viewing then produce programs in family portance of face-to-face oral communication at all levels and with each of the media taking a secon- planning,improvedagriculturalpracticesand dary in national culture.4 role the communicationprocess. Community involvement seems to be the catalyst necessary for success. The strengths and weakness of Language diversity would require programs to be in each of the mass media were analyzed so that they different languages. But this is no real problem. could be placed in a proper perspective when intro- On a time shared basis, a satellite with 3 video ducedintothe community center.Villagers will channels can provide 35 hours of broadcast receive recognition from fellow citizens for jobs well time a week to each of 12 language groups. done, and the accomplishments of the few will he With such a multichannel capability, SRI con- known to the many. There will be a feeling of pride cludes that heterogeneity of language is not an insoluble problem for the use of satellites in in the individual, in the family, the community, and support of education and development.5 eventually in the nation.

Television would allow for graphic demonstrations, A community centeris notthesole answer to moving flow charts, time lapse photography, and India's problem but may be the connectinglink the now famous "instant replay." These are only a which willhelp build the country with a strong few of the limitless techniques which could be in- feeling of nationalism. The success of this pioject corporatedtomake viewing more applicable to depends upon a continuing dedicationofthose everydaylife.Eachofthe previously mentioned involved and the positive effects it has on the com- techniques must be testedin advance in order to munity and its life style. evaluate their worth in a particular situation. The

1. Wilbur Schram. p. 168. 2. Royal D. Co Ile. The Indian Satellite Experiment; What Next', p. 1. 3.Ibid., p. 1. 4.Sig Mickelson. The First Eight Years, p. 23. 5, Eugene V. Rostow. Satellite Communications and Educational Television in Less Developed Countries, p. 71. 6.L. P. Kammans. Satellites for Education, p. 76.

- 18 i8 MALAYSIAN BROADCASTING: GUIDED MEDIA IN OPERATION

John A. Lent, Ph.D. Associate Professor of Communications Temple University

To describe the broadcast media of is to an on air period of .24 hours weekly, 80% of which discuss national development. For Malaysia stands at was imported. The new medium resulted from an the apex of those nations which control large seg- election pledge. A second channel was started Nov- ments of their media for the sake of guiding the ember 17, 1969, designed to restructure the policy nation'sdevelopment. A guidedpressdefinitely on languages of broadcast. operates in Malaysia where the authorities admonish mass media to be uncritical of government policies. The very of Malaysian society requires media The rationale is that Malaysia, being a newly emer- such as radio and television. First of all, gagraphi- gent nation (independent since 1957), needs time to cal constraints dictate against widespread utilization get on its feet. The mass media, therefore, should of print media. West Malaysia itself is divided by a provide the country this time by not touching on mountain range with dense jungle which has not, so sensitive issues, by stressing positive, and conversely, far, allowed for an 'Egt-West highway. Additionally, ignoring negative societal characteristics. East and West Malaysia are separated by a thousand miles of water. Secondly, the 10.6 million popula- The concentrated effort at guiding Malaysian mass tionis multilingual, multiethnic and rnultireligious. media developed after the evolution of the Second Fifty per cent of the people are Malay; 37% Chi- Malaysia Plan of the late 1960's and as an aftermath nese; and 11% Indian;the people speak Bahasa of the bloody raceriotsof May 13,1969. The Malaysia (the national language), Chinese (Mandarin governmental feeling after 1969 was that it was not plus local dialects), English, Tamil, Malayalam, Pun- enough just to provide an economic infrastructure jabi,Telegu, Hindi, Urdu, and a number of abor- for Malaysia; the whole society had to be restruc- iginal and East Malaysian tongues. Religions widely tured. Thus, the Ministry of Information set down in use are Islam, Buddhism, Taoism, Hinduism, and definite directions it wanted the media to explore. Christianity. With such cultural diversity, broadcast- It was all written into the Second Malaysia Plan, ingis usedtodevelopnationalunity.In West Rukunegara (National Ideology) and Sedition Act. Malaysia, broadcast languages are Bahasa Malaysia, These redirections will be discussed under broad- Mandarin; Tamil, andEnglish; the East Malaysian casting functions; now some background on Malay- stateof uses even more languages. The sian broadcasting is in order. broadcasting situation changed drastically recently in the other East Malaysian state, . Chinese, Kadazan and other native dialects were banned from STRUCTURE broadcasting there, even though the Kadazans make ORGANIZATION /FINANCING /FACILITIES up 34% of Sabah's population. The chief minister, Amateurs were responsible for a great deal of the Tun Datu Mushipha, scrapped the other languages, broadcasting in Malaysia before World War II, most hoping to force greater use of Bahasa Malaysia and of it centered in . In 1946 a government thus unite the state. department dealing with broadcasting was initiated butit was two years , with the outbreak of Radio/TelevisionMalaysia (RTM) isowned and communist threats in the nation, that radio had its operated by the government, the chief executive greatest thrust.Crises seemedto have spurred on being the director generalof broadcasting who is electronicsmediadevelopmentin Malaysia;in- responsibletotheMinisterofInformation and creased attention was given to radio and . The minister coordinates all govern- aftertheIndonesian confrontationof1965 and ment mass media film, broadcasting, information, after the 1969 race riots. The first television broad- wireservices,press,and liaison.Thetelecom- cast in Malaysia was on December 28, 1963, with munications departmentlicensesbothradio and

- 19 - television. The government does not permit broad- numberofprograms from 32 to 54 (including casting by private individuals, nor does it allow opp- primary as well as secondary lessons) and by con- ositionpoliticalpartiestousebroadcastingto templating an open university concept of television. channelpoliticalideologies. Thus, because of this ETV facilities will move into new headquarters this typeofgovernance,broadcasting,likeallpublic year. services in Malaysia, is expected to act in concert with the policies and aspirations of the party in Since 1969, Television Malaysia has been housed at power in this case, the Alliance Party. Angkasapuri, a 33-acre site in and Radio Malaysiais next door in the Mal.$13.9 mil- RTM obtains its revenue from annual license fees on lion Wisma Radio [House] opened in March 1973. receivers ($5.00 for a radio set, $10.00 for a joint The very modernfacilitiesatAngkasapuri and radio-television license and from advertising. In both Wisma Radio cost the government atotal of Mal. instances, the revenue goes directly into the govern- $36.9 million. ment treasury.License fees are paid through the postal system, and asis the case elsewhere, collec- Althoughgovernmentbroadcasting isdominant, tionisdifficult(forexample,in1971,13,000 threesmall,foreignowned systems functionin people were caught operating radio receivers with- Malaysia. Rediffusion (wired transmission) originates out licenses).In 1972, the ministry collected Mal. over a Gold Network and a Silver Network in Kuala $11.0millionfromradio-televisionlicensesand Lumpur, Renang, 1poh, and Butterworth. Transmis- another Mal.$15.8million from advertising. That sion is from 6:00 a.m. to 12 midnight daily, cater- yearthere were 322,757 licensedradiosets and ingprimarilytotheChinese,althoughBahasa 238,357 licensed television sets. Malaysia,English, and Tamil programs are aired. Nearly 30,000 subscribers pay $1.80 per month for Radio Malaysia consists of four domestic networks, this service and Rediffusion does accept advertising. broken down by language, and one external service. The Royal Australian Air Force base at Butterworth Transmissionisviashortwave, mediumwave, FM, has an internal station, the programs of which spill and VHF.Transmitting andproductioncenters over into Penang where they are popular because of operate in 10 cities in East and West Malaysia; the the western pop music content. There isa British aggregatepowerofshortwave and mediumwave Broadcasting Corporation relay station at Johore in transmitters is 940 kilowatts. The external network, the south. Saura Malaysia (Voice of Malaysia), uses 3 short- wave transmitters and broadcasts 56 hours weekly FUNCTION inIndonesian,171/2 hours inEnglish, 14 hours in RUKUNEGARA/SECOND MALAYSIA PLAN Mandarin, and 31/2 hours in Thai. A 1hour daily TagalogservicedirectedtothePhilippines was As indicated earlier, all aspects of Radio/Television initiated in 1973; broadcasts in Vietnamese, Khmer, Malaysia are designedtomeetthe government's and Burmese were expected to commence this year. national developmentplans.Officialsremindthe Besides these radio networks, a new one was devel- people regularly about broadcasting's relationships oped in November 1973, Radio Ibu Kota designed withnationalunity,harmony,nationbuilding, for Kuala Lumpur residents and providing weather, Malaysian identity and the national ideology. When traffic and other information city folk need in their the Prime Minister, Tun Abdul Rezak, opened ETV daily life styles. in 1972, he emphasized ETV must be developed in line with the science and technology to achieve the Television uses two channels which cover all of West objectives of the Second Malaysia Plan. He said Malaysia and Sabah. Channel1, the national - IThel main national target in education and work broadcasting in Bahasa Malaysia, is on the air training was the unification of the educational 84 hours weekly; Channel 2, using English, Chinese system to achieve national unity as well as to and Tamil, telecastshalf aslong. Since June 19, fill manpower requirements. 1972, Malaysia has had an ETV service which makes use of Channel 2, monday through thursday, tele- When Wisma Radio was officially opened in March casting eight 20-minute lessons daily. After consider- 1973 the Prime Minister set down what he expected able criticism ETV is being expanded and improved radio's goals should be, they are: by adding more school receivers, by increasing the

- 20 0 Radio must be an instrument to help Malaysia)aboutthegovernment'sguidanceof up the process of restructuring society to broadcasting. When InformationMinisterGhazali create a united nation. Shafie made it forcibly clear in 1973 that the tele- vision set was not to be an entertainment box but Radio must help oppose antinational ele- in the future a forum for imparting knowledge and ments ... by having programs containing multiplying the flow of information on the develop- themes to lead the people to place full trust in the government and give it full sup- ment and building of the nation. One newspaper port to maintain the stability of the nation. pointed out what an additional burden this would put on local studios. Commenting on the increasing Radio must step up its efforts through the trend to plant government messages in TV drama, external service by explaining clearly the another newspaper critic wrote in March 1973: nation's foreign policy with regard to the neutralization concept. Blatant propaganda, awkwardly served out in the guise of drama, will only succeed to bore Radio must act as a salesman to attract us ... the treatment given to [dramal is little more investments to Malaysia. different from well rehearsed forums.

Thereisno doubt that many television plays are When, in early 1973, a 50% surcharge per television built around the theme of social awakening ... showing was levied on foreign produced advertise- ments, the government explained this was meant to where the hero is changed from an egoistic projecta nationalidentity and unity as well as individual to a socially conscious one. Words, provide more jobs locally, and encourage Malaysians and more especially,long speecheshave todevelopadvertisingagenciesandproduction becomethefavorite device of many play- houses. Announcing inearly 1973 that Television wrights to engineer the shock of recognition in their protagonists. Straits Times Malaysiaplanned toreduce andeventually stop January 28, 1973 screening of "long and valueless" feature films, the The parliamentary secretary of the Ministry of In- Information Minister said: formationinlate1972,forinstance,said plays ... throughdramas, music, dances, etc., TV should project harmonious race relations, crime does must reflect and enlarge the awareness of the not pay, loyalty to country, rule of law, and belief aspiration and development of the nation in ofGod. Syndicated productions are screened ac- terms of unity, democracy, just society, etc., cording to these criteria. In 1973, after the United as envisioned in the Rukunegara. Even canned syndicated films will be shown only if they States TV show "All in the Family" dealt with the are in line with the national objectives. Jewish Defense League, Television Malaysia screpped the series because it might offend Muslims in the In 1973, great emphasis was placed on making ad- society. "Garrison's Gorillas" was dropped because vertising meet anational identity. As one official the Germans were always shown on the losing side, toldme,it was necessary to change broadcasting thistotheministry,projectedrace supremacy. advertisements because commercials had played up Other syndicated shows are dropped because RTM certaineliteprofessions (notthe blue collar, jobs is attempting to reach 60% local content on both necessaryfordevelopment);hadshown western TV channels. Alltelevision shows in Malaysia are products when local goods should have been adver- precensored by the Film Censorship Board and the tisedin a nation striving for industrialization; and Ministry of Information and Broadcasting. had dangerously portrayed a disparityofethnic communities. For example, he said Chinese shown To make surelocalplaywrights know what the incommercials usually residedin modern homes government expects both the Minister of Information while Malays livedin kampong plant houses. The and his deputy have written television plays to em- effortstochange advertising content must have phasize that progovernment viewpoints CO n be pre- been successful, for by September 1973, the Deputy sented subtly. Additionally, annual television awards Information Minister could report that 70-80% of are presented riot on the inherent merits of shows, Television Malaysia commericals portrayed a Malay- but on whether they conform to the needs and aspira- sian way of life. tionsofthe government. A top ministry official, explaining why a number of television dramas were There had been criticism( as much as is allowed in eliminated from the 1972 competition, said:

21 1 We want more writers to contribute their crea- teners/viewers do not get much regional or inter- tive works, but they must first of all understand national news. The deputy broadcasting head ex- what we want. plainedthat news selection guidelines are closely relatedtogovernment policies,prioritygiven to In recent years, the ministry has been increasingly government objectives relating to development. He concerned with developing television for the rural addedthat foreign news must have alinkage to population, the official explanation being that these Malaysia before itis used. Thus, Watergate merited peoplelackrecreationalactivitiesandtherefore one or two mentions on television news during the depend more heavily on television for entertainment. course of a year, but the October 1973 Middle East Actually, this is a contradiction of the minister's ad- War led off most television news shows for a few monitionthat television should not be an enter- weeks, the content of which was very pro-Arab. The tainment box. The real reason probably relates to the contradiction appears, however, when the Informa- unofficial view of government that rural people are tion Minister reiterates endlessly that news coverage less educated and sophisticated and therefore more by RTM isbased solely on news value. When in susceptible to governmental viewpoints. To accom- April 1973 Kuala Lumpur was tense because of a modate rural audiences feature films are shown on Malaysian Chinese Associationcrisis,no mention television early in the evening because these people was made by any media, including broadcasting. retire at about 9:00 or 9:30 p.m. The films attempt Yet, this situation certainly had news value since a to take into account all lingual groups on Wednes- self-imposed curfew was in effect on Kuala Lumpur day a Tamil movie is shown; on Thursday Chinese; residents. People stocked up on staples fearing riot- Friday Malay; Saturday and Sunday English. The ousconditions andrumorscirculatedwidely rest of the television schedule has been worked out to throughout the nation. Televisign Malaysia covertly compromise various groups. From sign on at about attempted to calm the population without mention- 5:00 p.m. until 6:30 p.m. children's programs are inganimpendingcrisesby showing the Malay telecast. From 6:30 to 9:30 p.m. programs for rural Information Minister atanight market in a pre- folk (Koran readings, Ghazal, Dondang Sayang, and dominantly Chinese district. The official rationale other local music and dance), and from 9:30 p.m. for news blackouts during such timesisthat the to sign off, at about 12 midnight, syndicated fare government does' not want to spread rumors or lend for urban dwellers. credence to them. Yet at another time in1973, when there was a talk of a rice crisis, RTM contra- Despite these efforts, some critics feel the authori- dicted thispolicybytelecastingpublicservice ties are forcing upon the multiethnic population, announcements informing the public not to believe not a Malaysian culture, but one steeped in Malay rumors of a rice shortage. Possibly because of this tradition. One top broadcastingofficialsaidthe tight governmental rein of news dissemination, the rapidityofthistrend meant the productionof people havetraditionally depended onthe wide shoddy shows which related toless than half the ranging and quite reliable rumor circuit. total population. With the emphasis on government oriented news, Increasedlocaltelevision programming ispointed there is definitely a. loss of plurality of views. We out by thefactthatin 1971only 5 Malaysian have already mentioned that opposition viewpoints dramas were telecast, the following year there were are not expressed on electronic media. In addition 80. The program controller at Television Malaysia broadcasting, like all mass m9clia, is further limited admitted program quality suffers when local produc- by the prohihition of discussion of ...hefour sen- tionis sped up inthis fashion, but felt by doing sitive issues laid down in the Sedition Act: local drama, even bad local drama, television was The Bahasa Malaysia language policy creating a habit. Special rights of Malays Government ambitions also determine news policies ofMalaysianbroadcasting.Since1970Radio/ Special roles of the sultans and royalty Television Malaysia has used a joint news division. Everithoughthedivisionsubscribestothe major The citizenship policy of non-Malays world news and feature agencies, and airs as many as 56 news bulletins daily (that was in 1971), lis- Tun Rank justifies thisruling on the basis that

-22- G2 these sensitive issues are therefore placed beyond read Bahasa Malaysia news bulletins, claiming non- the reach of race demagogues. No doubt this is so, Malays used poor pronunciation. Other aspects of but the limitation also intimidates all those involved broadcasting are dictated by Malay custom. Because in news presentation. The result is that news people, Malays, who are Islamic, have an intense desire to whenindoubt,waitfortheofficialstatement visit Mecca atleast once in their , news of rather than investigate on their own. For example any air crashes is not presented in telecasts for fear when the Deputy Prime Minister diedin August of discouraging the making of the pilgramage by air. 1973, the news was not announced that evening on Partly because of Islamic traditions, women are not television and had to wait about four hours to make used as television newscasters; the government ex- the radio news. The deputy head of broadcasting plainstheirpresence would bedistractingto told me the delay was to allow next of kin to be viewers. Male hair styles and lengths are prescribed notified. The broadcasting director, however, said it not only for television newscasters but for contes- took that long to reschedule programming suitable tants and performers in music and drama shows as for such a mournful event. The reason suspected by well. Again, the explanation is that beards and long some was that because the Prime Minister was out hair are distracting. Actually it relates more to the of the country, the stall was meant to give him time government's policy against promotion of a western to start his return. oriented hippie culture.

News and current events programs (such as the daily Since 1972 Television Malaysia has stopped showing Peristiwa on both television channels) seem to play ministers at cocktail parties and dinners except for up government personalities more than the news very special functions. The reasoning is that such eventsthemselves.For example when Malaysia's portrayals make ministers elitist oriented, engrossed most famous actor,P. Ram lee, died in May 1973 inglamorous affairs,rather than individuals con- television news led off with a picture of the Prime cerned with the problems of the masses. Minister and his comments on Ram lee, rather than a picture of the actor and mention of his accomplish- Probably the most unusual news policyisthat of ments. Thus, evenindeath, a famous man was Radio Malaysia, which prohibits the use of "bad" upstaged by a priority news system which makes a news in the early morning newscasts. The Informa- point of featuring the King, Prime Minister and his tionMinister explained that the people should be deputy prominently, nomatter how insignificant allowed to go to work in a good frame of mind, their activities.Often television news and current unburdened of crisis information. Television Malay- events shows are extremely dullbecauseof the sia hesitates to use film of demonstrations and riots, priority system, concentrating on the ribbon cut- whether they be inMalaysia or abroad, but this ting,groundbreakingand speechmakingofthe policy stems from the government's fear of sparking officials. Other examples can be related concerning off domestic outbursts. the favorable portrayal of government leaders in the news. Kuala Lumpur broadcasters tell about the In- Ifallof this suggests a lack of freedom of expres- formation Minister directing television crews on how sion in Malaysia, the government's reply most likely to photograph him for news shows, or about the would be "so be it". Officials constantly point out Prime Minister insisting that only two still photo- a developing nation such as Malaysia cannot have graphs of him be shown on television news shows. the same degree of freedom enjoyed by older, more If a photograph other than his favorite two is used developedcountries.Theirfavoritereplyisthat Angkasapuri receives an angry phone call. Makiysiii has press freedom, but such freedom can- not he tolerated to the extent of it causing lawless- Although television news shows used all 4 languages, ness and anarchy. They also emphasize that Malay- Bahasa Malaysiaisused at 6:00 p.m., 9:00 p.m., sia has more freedom of expression than most Asian and sign off. The 9:00 p.m. newscast is considered nations, which is probably true but not much of an the most important because government personnel accolade.Speakingbefore the Second Malaysian watchitregularly.Even withthisemphasis on Law Conference on July 10, 1973, Tun Rank gave Malay language newscasts,therehave been com- an unusual twist to the meaning of press freedom. plaints.Inearly1973, one branch of UMNO, a At that time he said: Malay political group, asked the Ministry of Infor- Iventure to suggest, that freedom is not al- mation and Broadcasting to engage only Malays to ways the mere absence of constraints. Rather,

-23- it is often the acceptance of these constraints. The nation'sfirstearthsatellite communications But the constraints must be kept under con- station, opened near Kuantan in West Malaysia in stant scrutiny with a view to their modifica- 1970, links the nation with the Indian Ocean satel- tion or removal if circumstances so warrant. lite.Color televisionisbeing introducedmainly becauseneighboring Singaporehasthe medium, At other times, when officials are prodded to admit accordingto some broadcasting officials.Others a lack of freedom of expression in Malaysia, they deny this, saying Malaysiaispushing rapidly for blame this state of affairs on one or all of these color television to meet changes in science and tech- factors the myriad languages of the media, cultur- nology. Local color television will take two or three aldifferences,theinsidiousthreatofmilitant years to implement; it will take even longer to make communism, theimmaturityofthemedia and color television practicable to the people. A color public, and the suspicion that underlines the veneer televisionreceiverinMalaysiacosts Mal.$1500.- of a united nationalist front. $2000. at a time when a factory hand still receives only Mal.$2.50 daily and in a place where a sturdy So as not to leave this discussion on a sour note, it plank house requires only $800.-$1000. to build. must be pointed out Malaysiais extremely well Finally, another bright spot concerns the broadcast advanced in broadcasting technology, coverage, and traininginMalaysia.Although Malaysiahas de- training.Future plans callfor color televisionin pended on outside training aid in the past, this has 1975, black and white television on a statewide been lessened in recent years with the development basis in Sarwak the same year, and live telecasts ofthe impressive NationalBroadcasting Training between East and West Malaysia as soon as a new Center. satellite earth station is completed in East Malaysia.

Dr. John A. Lent is associate professor of communication at Temple University, Philadelphia.He developedthefirst academic program in mass communica tionin Malaysia while coordinator and lecturer in mass communications at the UniversitiSainsMalaysiafrom 1972 -1974.

-24- AN INSTITUTE FOR INTERNATIONAL COMMUNICATION AT SAN FRANCISCO STATE UNIVERSITY

Herbert Zettl, Ph.D. Professor of Broadcast Communication Arts San Francisco State University

I believe that we need to establish an Institute for think we know what itis, how we can use it, but International Communication at San Francisco State we know almost nothing about how it might use us. University. We have many institutions that are concerned with The principalpurpose oftheInstituteforInter- counting how many people watch a particular national Communication, orIIC,is the systematic program. Apparently they do a good job when and intensive study of the television medium, and their count is low the program is usually dropped and theroleofthe medium inthe communication when their count is high the program stays. Regard- p; ocess. lessof the program's relative aesthetic or ethical worth regardless of the program's potential harm. The specific objectives of the ICC are: Sometimes, we are even concerned with trying to To study the requirements and potentials find out the nature of the audience: how old, male of the television medium or female, income, profession. And, under extreme pressure from a government agency, or an irate citi- To study the role of the medium in the ren's group, or left-over money for research at the communication process end of the fiscal year, we might occasionally worry To study how the medium can he used about the effect of programming on the viewer. But with optimal effectiveness in a variety of we do this ex post facto, after the fact. Instead of international communication tasks trying to prevent war by studying human nature, the basic needs and desires of man, his basic social We all know by now that television has become a structures, we waituntilthebattleisover and worldwide powerthatshapesoursocieties and count the dead just so that we can decide who is individual lives to a great extent. We use television the winner and who is the loser. almost every day, and enjoy being influenced and shaped by the medium. In the United States alone, Itis not enough to study simply the effect of the viewers in almost 63 million households watch tele- television message on the audience, once the mes- vision for an average of 6 hoursand 20 minutes every sage has been sent. What we need is a certain set of day. India is about to program for an even vaster rural criteria that helps us understand the effect of the and urban audience with educational telecasts via medium on the message, and the synergistic effect satellite. The populations of some of the remotest of the medium manipulated message on the viewer. areas of Africa are given demonstrations in health Unfortunately, the medium is still considered to he care via closed circuit television. In Iran and Taiwan a simple, though effective.distribution device for thousands of families enjoy reruns of "" ready-made messages. And, worse, we produce a and "Gunsmoke" besides their excellent local pro- great amount of programming with a vague idea of gramming. The whole world was ableto witness audiencerequirements,andnoideaof medium instantaneously man's supreme inhumanity to man requirements. But the medium is not neutral itis inthehorrorsofthe 1972 Olympics, or man's a powerful structuring elements in the communica- supreme achievement in the walk on the Moon. tions process and a formative force. The computer principle of "garbage in garbage out" does not But we still don't know very much about what the apply to television; most likely, it does not apply to medium really is, what it could and should do. We computers either. We can no longer afford being

-25- concerned solely with the effect of the message as some prisoners to become once again aware of their portrayed on television. We must concern ourselves feelings, and more importantly, to express their feel- first of all with the structuring, formative effect of ings creatively. The medium had given their lives the medium on the message. once again purpose. The medium had penetrated the walls of their external and internal prisons. McLuhan's overstatementof the "mediumisthe message, or even the massage," has successfully in- How was itdone? What were the steps that led filtratedthe cocktailcircuitofthe advertiseror some of the inmates to rediscover their potential politician. But it seems to have eluded the attention worth as human beings, and awakened social responsi- of most of us who either produce television pro- bility in them? What role did the medium play in this grams or measure their effects. process? How could we apply similar processes to similarly difficult social situations and events? The The proposed Institute for International Communi- problem is no longer a local one. As an essentially cation would haveasitsprincipalobjective the human problem, a very acute human problem, it has investigation and careful study of the medium itself! truly international significance. It concerns all of us.

What exactly would the ICC do? How would we go Obsiously, we are concerned with these problems at about the different tasks? the Broadcast Communication Arts Department. Dr. Hyde has created a new course in which the use of First, what would we do, or rather, what should we the media in institutions, such as prisons, hospitals, do? Let me give you some examples. old-people's homes, are carefully investigated.I am sure that other such activities occur in several other Dr. Hyde, Chairman of our Broadcast Communica- places throughout the world. But this is not enough. tion Arts Department, is just in the final pr' What is desperately needed is a systematic exchange stages of a documentary on San Quentin Prison. But oftheseideas; apooling of experiences, an ex- itisn'ta documentary in the traditional sense.It change of ideas that will ultimately lead to precise does not open up with the customary zoom shot mediakinetologicaltheories and applications. The from the prison compound to the medium close up ICC could provide such an environment. ofthe well known network correspondent, with overcoat, handmike, and stern look on his face, pro- Or take news, for example. We all know that news jecting authority,emotionalcoolness,objectivity. is important for any society to function properly at Hyde's approach to communicating that San Quen- the threshold of the twenty-first century, and essen- tinis Good Sleeping as the television event is tialforatruly democratic society. Television,if called,is not a detached look from the outside in, properly used, might well become the single most but a passionate look from the inside out.It is the important factor for the democratizing of a society, desperate cry of the inmate who needs to communi- aridfortheguardingofthisfreedom.But,if cate in an effortto remain human.Itis not an irresponsibilityused,television can make us into objectivestatement,but athoroughly subjective slaves with equal efficiency. one.Prisons are not buildings, activities, security. Prisonsarepeople,peopleinagony, peoplein Whatistherole of the television medium in the trouble, people crying forhelp, people who have process of news? As the medium is used presently, been deprived of probably one of the most essential itis an effective distribution device ofa refined of human needs: communication and love the versionofthe town crier,the "Moritatensinger". continualprocess ofassertingandreconfirming Today's news informs us of the most obvious hap- one's dignity. Hyde's approach isin my opinion, a penings of the day, in a more or less entertaining real breakthrough in media use. Like an expression- manner.Sometimes,television news is outright istic painting, Hyde's screen event does not so much good, sometimesitisoutright had. Always, itis communicate what San Quentin looks like, but how incomplete.But we needstillmore information, it feels.Itis no longer a one dimensional report or more complete information, more readily available even a two dimensional view of a particular situa- information if we are to function effectively in the tion.iiis a three dimensional insight.It no longer ever increasing complexities of daily life. As respon- tells,itinvolves.In years of painstaking work Dr. siblecitizens, we areconstantly askedto make Hyde helped, through the use of electronic media, responsible decisions. But are we always presented 7 with the available choices? Are we given the oppor- How about television drama? We always complain tunity to feed in vital information that would help that we don't have enough good television drar on to increase alternatives, or present additional points the air.But whatisgood television drama ?. Isit of view? simply a play that is scaled down sd that it lits"the confines of the small television screen? Or does the Ifnews were considered to be less show business increasing complexity of our lives and the increasing and more of an essential element for social develop- insight into our psychological make up demand a ment and individual growth, then perhaps we might more complex, a more multileveled representation have to use the medium in a slightly different way. of life on the screen? It it enough to merely reflect If news is supposed to supply us with the data for an event on television, or should we try to use the responsible choices, the element of time might be medium to lok inside an event? We are proud now the more important medium factor than presenta- to to be able to talk openly about hemorrhoids and tionformat. We then would need instantaneous, racial bigotry on television. And in the, context of continual, information to react swiftly and surely in such venerable and honorable institutions asthe an up-to-date context of available alternatives. But medical center or the police department we even then we also need to shift time, to look behind and dare to mention abortion and homosexuality. But in front of the present. News is not necessarily what what about the real emotional stresses that occur in is happening right now, but the communication of our daily lives? What about the emotional stresses datathat helps me bestin my decision making. that hit us when we are exposed to, or involved in, Therefore an event that happened 135 years ago, or new life styles, or new social and political concepts? an event that might happen a week from tomorrow Where are the models that should help us develop might qualify as news much as as an event that the degree of emotional literacy that enables us to happened conveniently between the six o'clock and deal with such stresses in a creative way? "Cannon" eleven o'clock air times. -"" "Henry VIII"?...perhaps? But

I suspectthat we needmorerealisticmodels, Such concepts demand allof a sudden new com- models that demonstrate the multifacted dimensions munication processes and tools.For example, we of human emotions, and the struggle and energies are always so proud that we are the melting pot for necessary to keep thesepotentiallydestructive people fromdifferentracialandnationalback- energies incheck. Models that show how to use grounds. But we are equally arrogant in assuming themconstructivelywithintheprevailingsocial that everybody must, therefore, speak English. How value system. simple it would be to equip television receivers with stereo audio, and to broadcast news at least in two Perhaps we need to think of an entirely new dram- languages. This would eliminatethe cumbersome aturgy. Perhaps itis no longer necessary to rely on simulcasting on FM. Or, could we riot have a three plot, on the linear building of a story. Perhaps we screen receiver that would allow us to view an event shouldratherconcentrate inlokingbehind the simultaneously from at least 3 points of view? How obvious events, into the sub- or unconscious make about dial access to computer stored background up of even a simple human encounter. information to major news stories? While one chan- nel would provide us with headline type informa- I am presently experimenting with a new dramatic tion, the other channel, or channels, might serve us form that requires several screens and several audio with essential background material. tracks.In one experiment, I use three screens to portray an event inthe context of the past and I can't say now whether or not such communication futureevents.The middle screenrepresentsthe procedures would really be more effective than the present. The left screen shows the past, and the way news is presently done. But thereisa slight right screenthe future. Since no moment in our possibility that we could do better. Considering the conscious lifeis unaffected by past and future, why impact of news on the world, don't you think that should we not use the medium to show the same thereshould beanopportunityforinterested phenomenon in a clarified and intensified way? people to get together and to think about it... talk about it.... try it out. Or take the complexity of a simple moment. While

I am speaking to you, there are many other things

The I IC could provide such an opportunity. that flash through your mind. Thank God, I don't

-27- perceive them all. But there are times where we trigger an immediate viewer reaction that is far from shoulddemonstratesuchcomplexityofthe violent, but may rather prove refreshingly cathartic. moment. Where we should make each other aware of such a complexity, rather than pretend that we But the innocent, persistent, insidious display of un- can reduce the other person's, or our own, feelings attainable wealth asthe common living standard toa one dimensional event, solely for the conve- might well lead the poor to a level of frustration nience of the other person's expectations. What we that may be released in a truly violent act. Someone see on television lets us believe that this one dimen- who doesn't have enough money to buy a sufficient sionality is the norm. But is it really? How about if amount of even the simplest kind of food for his we were to express such a complexity by playing hungry family might get quite angry at the attrac- different thoughts and feelings simultaneously on 4-, tivescreendisplayof gourmet food and drink. 8-, or 16- audio tracks? Someone who is trapped in a slum area might get quite angry,itnot violent,ifheis continuously How about getting people together from all over the refused the goodlife which he has learned from world whose businessitisto probe into human television to be the norm. beings and to communicate such findings in a clari- fiedandintensifiedway, viatelevision,for As faras the message is concerned, an objective example. How about if writers, directors, psycholo- content analysis wuuld ptubably assign the fight gists,psychiatrists, musicians, actors, philosophers, scene ahigher aggression score than the scene in and a few more turned on people from all over the which elegant people wine and dine elegantly in world could get together in an environment free elegant surroundings. Yet,if we shift our point of from pressures of time and the necessity to come view and analyze the problem within a wider con- upwithsaleableproductstodiscusssuchap- text, we might findthat the subtle accumulative

proaches to television drama? Are you interested? I effect of reinforcing unattainable or false models of am. The IIC could provide such an environment. the god lifeis the more violence prone program fare than the fight scene. The concentratiun on medium research by the IIC would include the television artist, who might dis- We are no longer concerned with the effect of the coverintelevisiontheperfectmediumfor message asportrayedontelevision,but witha conceptual art, or the teacher, who might want to medium structured, medium transcended message. A use the medium to help people learn a variety of research project by the IIC into television violence tasks with great efficiency and joy. couldpossiblehelptheresearcherto view the problem from a fresh perspective. Worth a try How about the search for new methods and tech- wouldn't you say? niquesthat wouldhelptoassessthe overt and covert needs ofa community needs thatgo Well, we have some idea now about the general beyond the limited response, predetermined by a problem areas with which the IIC might be con- "yes-no"questionnaire.Perhaps then, we would cerned. How would we go about it? find that there are more pressing needs than rapid transit, bay fill, and the actions of the police depart- Let me listfirstthe specificIICactivities which ment. Perhaps we would then be able to look behind come to mind, and then give you a tentative cur- the obvious, and thus be able to satisfy the hidden ricularplan. When fully operational, the Institute needs and desires of several groups of people. for International Communication will:

Take the popular subject of television violence, for 1. Engage in systematic research of the tele- example. What exactly do we mean by television vision medium requirements and potentials, violence? Violent acts as "portrayed" on television and the role of the medium in the com- and distributed via television? Or might it be the munication process. relationship between viewer attitude and believability 2. Engagedinexperimentaltelevisionpro- of screen image that now turn into a violent attitude, ductionactivitiesandinfundedmedia or even induce the viewer to violent acts? Watching problem solving. the good guy slugitout with the bad guy might

-28-'48 3. Translate educational and behavioral objec- sion represents the stipulated minimum. The maxi- tives(cognitive,affective,andpsycho- mum participation can be extended to a 35-week motor)intooptimallyeffectivemedia academic year (including one of the two summer ses- experiences. sions).Participants who would liketo apply for longer programs are encouraged to negotiate for a 4. Engage in systems design for general and research contract, or to apply for admission to the specific television production operations. regular BCA graduate program. A 14-week session is considered the normal length of participation. 5. Provide a free environment of inquiry and experimentation for refugees from commer- The IIC sessions will run in close proximity to the cial and non-commercial television. University calendar. 6. Hire domestic and foreign professionals on seven, or fourteen week, or one year con- CHART OF CURRICULUM MODULES tracts for specific research projects. FALL SESSIONS 7. Conduct research projects designed to find September informationrelativetouniversal symbols 7 Weeks October (visual and nonvisual), signs, themes, and 14 Weeks temporaralstructuresinpublic com- munication. 7 Weeks December

8. Sponsor and host seminars, conferences, and 28 Weeks training sessions on television and related SPRING SESSIONS media. 7 Weeks 9. Act as a clearing house, duplicator, and dis- March 14 Weeks seminator of video taped experiments. April 1 7 Weeks 10. Act as a clearinghouse for the translation of May relevantresearchinEnglishintoother languages. SLIMMER SESSIONS

June 11. Act as a reception center for traveling VIP's 7 Weeks in mass media. July Sessions Overlap 7 Weeks August _ 12. Edit and publish a journal, Stimulus, which would disseminate ona regular basis the research results and ideas generated by the istoprovide con- IIC sessions. Obviously, what we are after cerned people from all over the world the oppor- 13. Engage equipment designersto work on tunity to think about, talk about, feel into, prove specific equipment problems posed by the into,andexperimentwith themostpowerful creative uses of television production and communications device created by man thus far. As transmission facilities. a true extension of our nervous system, television needs our constant care and cultivation. 14. Offer special telescoped media courses, spe- cifically designed for the I IC participants. The study of television specifically the study of the television medium and its rnle in the inter- 15. Undertake the planning and training of per- nationalcommunicationprocess isnolonger a sonnel for television systems in developing luxury, an idly academic exercise, but an essential countries. task in our strive for the improvement of communi- The curriculum of the IIC is based upon a 7-week cation, positive growth, if not survival, of everyone module. One 7-week Instructional or Workshop Ses- of us who inhabits this global village ... Earth.

29 IN BRAZIL

Valmar C. Figueiredo San Francisco State University

Brazil is the largest nation in South America in area When Brazil became independent from the Portu- and population. Larger in area than the 48 states of guese empire on September 7, 1822, the world was the continental Unites States, itis smaller than the already taking itsfirst steps along the way to the 50 states.It has a coastline on the Atlantic Ocean "industrial revolution". Having taken her own time of 4,603 miles, and extends approximately 2,689 ...admittedly time wasted, in catching up with the miles from north to south and 2,684 miles from rest of the industrialized countries,Brazilis now east to west. In 1822, when Brazil was transformed trying to make up for that time, and as often hap- from a colony into an empire, with total political pens, is doing so with a vengence. autonomy, the country was little more than a few vague markings on such maps of South America as The way of communication with the publicin then existed. Brazil's population at that time was 10 Brazilis almost the same as the U.S. In Brazil the million. Today it is well over 100 million. quality stillis poor but with a greater tendency to be improved. The variety of the Brazilian climate is due to the immense north-south extent of the country and to In the printed media we have newspapers, maga- irregularitiesof ground. The greaterpart of the zines,andbillboards. After World War II,news- country has an average annual temperature of more papers enjoyed tremendous growth as mass com- than 70°F. The climate of may be municators. The lornal do Brasil can be compared compared with that of Florida. with . Itis distributed all over the country. This is a national newspaper. We also The seasons are like this: havea newspaper-chainheadedby the Didsrios Associados with the main office in Rio de Janeiro. summer December, January,February is be- Most of the newspapers cover local and rural areas. tween 80-90°F.

Autumn March,April,May thetemperature To compete with the newspapers came the national ranges in the 70's. news magazines. The oldest is'0 Cruzeiro and the better edited is Manchete. Winter June, July, August averages 40-50°F. The billboardis a great influence as an advertising September, October, November averages Spring agent in the big cities, such as Sao Paulo, Rio de 60-70°F. Janeiro, , , Receife, and Salvador. In most of us thereis a misconception about the major language in South America. When we talk broadcasting began in Brazil in 1919, when about South America we automatically think about alittle station,the Pernamijuco Radio Club, was the Spanishlanguage. There are 10 countries in opened. In 1922 the Federal Government acquired South America and 3 European possessions. Nine of two transmitters which it gave (1924) to the Radio the 10 countries speak Spanish and the 3 posses- Club and to the Brazilian Educational Radio. The sions speak English, Dutch, and French respectively. firstlawregulating broadcasting dated fromthis isthe only country that speaks Portuguese. Brazil year (1924). The populationoftheentirecontinent is 190,038,000. Of this number 90,038,000 are Spanish Broadcastingprincipally developed after1932.in speaking (10% are dialects). The 100 million left 1961there were 569 companies engagedinthe speak pure Portuguese. Research shows us that Portu- broadcasting business with 803 stations scattered all guese is the major language in South America, not over the country. Spanish. In 1965 the figure lumped from 803 stations to 924 23radiostations whichbelongtothis transmitters, Of the 924 718 stations are medi- network. umwave transmitters with a total power of 1,684.7 Kw; and159shortwavetransmitterstotaling The Bandeirante with its main office in Sao 1,150.75 Kw; and 54 FM stations with a combined Paulo, the number of stations belonging to power of 34.35 Kw. itisnot presently available butitisthe oldest radio network. In 1973 the number of stations went up 15%. Radio conqueredthe mass population when the The Federal Government grants broadcast licenses, little transistor radios, operated by battery, came on allocates frequencies, and regulates advertising. Each the market.Until then only a few of the people day at 10 p.m. all stations throughout the country, who livedinthe interior could affordto buy a by law, have to broadcast a half hour government 12-volt battery to supply current to their expensive program which originates from the studio of Radio radio. Electricity was something for the future. Now Nacional (National Radio). Itis located in Brasilia, with the transistor raoio the radio stations are able the capital of Brazil. This stationis controlled by to reach the farthest audience. The price of these the Ministry of Justice and the Ministry of the In- little radios are right for most people. A radio, until terior. These programs consist exclusively of official 1965, was a big deal. government announcements. I can recall one Sunday in December ol 1962, there wasa bigsoccergame championship. We, my Nearly allof Brazil's stations are privately owned. family, had a shortwave RCA radio tuned to Radio Advertisingisthe only source of revenue for the Bandeirante in San Paulo, the ,house was crowded stations. They do not receive any money allocations with friends at least thirty'people were seated on from the Federal Government. An average 21% of a terrace listening to the game.It was a big time. their air time is devoted to advertisements; 54% to For this occasion we always had a spare battery in music; 4% to news and information; 4% to sports; case the one supplying current to the radio became 2% to educational programs, and the remainder to weak and had to be replaced. programs for women, children,religiousservices, and discussions. If one was a businessman and had a radio his busi- ness went up almost 100%. Programs are almost entirelyinPortuguese,but there are numerous transmissions in Japanese, for a The radio stations are increasing. More radio sta- large Japanese colony establishedinthe southern tions are licensed than ever before. With the open- states. A number of shows are also given in English, ing of the Trans Amazon Highway, new cities have Spanish, French, and German. been situatedin the interior and radios cannot be ignored. The people need to know what is going on Radio has a great audience during the soccer season in the big cities. Now more than ever before, people when all three major networks broadcast live (play- can listen to political propaganda and make a better by-play). Radio has a great influence on the trans- decision in their positions. mission of international games. When any team of the major league plays outside the country, one of There are two major educational radio chains: The the networks would send a crew and an announcer Radio Glob() with its office in Rio de Janeiro it's (reporter) to broadcast to millions of fans. programs tau taped and sent to its aifiliates around the country. The other one is the Radio Nacional, The three networks are: with its main office inBrasilia. At 10 p.m. all the Associacao Brasilcira de Emissoras de Radio educational andcommercialstationsgetinter- e Tclevisao, with the main office in Rin connected with Radio Nationalto broadcast the de Janeiro. This network has 66 radio sta- Voice of Braid, which consists exclusively ol gov- tions spread over the country. ernment announcements for that day.

Diariosc Emissoras Associados, alsb having A year ago,the Globo Estereo (broadcastingin its main office in Rio de Janeiro, there are stereo) went into operation.It was the first radio

-32- 5 station to operate in quadrophonic (transmission in Associacion Internamcricana dcs four channels). The Instituto National de Opiniao Radio Difusao Publica made a survey and 52% of the owners of Rua Mayrink Volga No. 96 FM radio listen to Globo Stereo. It's tranmitters are Rio de Janeiro, GB, Brazil located in Rio de Janeiro as are its main office and studio. The music played on itis the same kind Diarios c Emissoras Associados Which is played on FM stereo here in the United Rua San Cabral No. 103 Rio de Janeiro, GB, Brazil States easy listening. There are eight news items for the stereo listeners and itis totally automatic the tapes and tape cartridges being pretaped in the There are 400 television stations in the country and stations studio. 11more areinthe process of development. The StateofSao Paulo has 6 main stations and the There is another radio station which is still in the StateofGuanabara (Rio de Janeiro) has 3 main stations; in the State of Minas Gerais there are 4 experimental stageofoperation.Itisjovem El- dorado.Transmittingonthe frequency of98.1 stations. These stations are: Mghz.Itsprograms are the totallydedicated to Sao Paulo younger generation. Channel Station 2 TV Educativa In1951, televisionpictures scanned the Brazilian 4 TV Tupi sky when the first transmitter was inaugurated in 5 TV Gloho Rio de Janeiro. This was followed by others in Sao 5 TV Record Paulo. By 1961 there were 20 companies in the 11 TV Ga/eta businessoftelevisionbroadcasting.Inthatyear 13 TV Bandcirantc there was a total of 1,430,000 sets. Rio de Janeiro All stations are privately owned except TV Globo Channel Station which is educational and Televisao Nacional which 4 TV Globo is owned by the government. 9 TV Educativa 13 TV Rio The revenues forprivate television stations comes from the advertising boom, which has helped the Minas Gerais country to grow at a tremendous gallop. Channel Station 2 TV Altcrosa In the 50's television was known only to the states 4 TV Itacolomi of Sao Paulo, Rio de Janeiro, and Rio Grande do 7 TV Vila Rica 12 TV Gloho Sul.Their facilities were of poor quality and this was an experimentalperiod.Only a few people could afford a television set. In the country there are 6,580,000 television sets, including 80,000 colorsots. The colt)rtelevisions, such as the FM stereo, are new inBrazil.Itfirst There are four networks responsibleforthedis- penetrated the Brazilian sky in January of 1973 tribution of programs: adopting the P.A.L. system. Departamento National de Telecommunicacoes (DENTAL) The television programs are divided into three cate- "National Council of Telecommunication" gories Children, Women, anMen. In the after Rua Miguel Couto No. 105 noon the programs belong to the children, then the Rio de Janeiro, GB, Brazil women's programs are shown (mostly soap operas), and in the late evening the programs are dedicated Associacao Brasileira de Emissoras to men and consist of news, movies, and sports. de Radio c Telcvisao Rua Mayrink Veiga No, 6, 12/13 When television was first established in Brazil it did Rio de Janeiro, GB, Brazil riot receive a complete orientation at the technical,

r) 33 - 0.3 artistic and managementlevels.Todayitstillis The telephone company uses many different sys- operatingontheselimitedinstructionswhich tems for their operations: produce programs of poor quality as compared with the British, French, Italian, or American programs. Interurban System Equipment utilized for connection between Transmitting eighteen hours a day, thetelevision two urban agglomerations either automatic operations aremaking mistakes which cannot be or combined. corrected due to a lack of knowledge. There isa long road to go and much to be learned in this field Microwave System of telecommunication that is so vulnerable. A highfrequencytransmission(UHF) through parabolic antenna, dispensing with For the general audience there are shows on Satur- cable, and occupying agiven number of day and Sunday. These shows are live and come from circuits or channels. the main studios of the top networks. There is an organization of censorship (a government agency) to Coxial Cable controlprograms which are availableforbroad- Transmission through a special cable which casting. sends and receiveda number of simulta- neous calls in different frequencies. In educational television there are good programs. Most of them are foreign oriented, such as "Sesame Wave Carrier System Street" and many others. Each state has its own edu- Transmission through an aerial network of cationaltelevisionstation which receivesFederal copper wire and VHF equipment at both Government support.Itoffers many different high school, college, and university courses. The student ends. can write to the station and ask for their course cata- Cable Carrier System logue. This kind of teaching by television has helped Transmission through an aereal network of millions of Brazilians learning to read and write. upper wire in ehich each circuit may he Like radio, which costs a great deal to own, tele- occupied for a single cell at a time. vision went one step beyond itis a luxury and only people with good jobs can afford a television Phanton (magnetic) System set. Today the country is interconnected via micro- Transmissionsthrough anaerialnetwork waves and satellite. EMBRATEL, similar to AT&T technically prepared and utilizing two hare in the U.S., monopolizes the microwave and satellite coppercircuitstoobtain a thirdcircuit systems. The networks rent channels from EMBRA (phaeton);this systemthrough magnetic TEL for the transmission of their programs. There induction. are two charge tables: Satellite The charge is $160,000. for 10 Transmission usingorbitalstationsand minutes between the states of Sao Paulo satellites. and Guanabara (Rio de Janeiro).

From1 a.m.to2 p.m.thenetwork is EMBRATEL, the company responsible for the in- charged 30% of the prime time rate they stallationofthe microwave system inBrazil, uses formerly were paying 70% of prime time. two tyi.qs ul systems a microwave system by visi- bility and a microwave system by troposcatter. The The communicationviatelephone,untilrecent latter being the most usable. The visibility system is years, has been extremely difficult.In 1960 there installed all over the country except in the northern were 1,788,859 telephones. Today, with the installa- regions where the troposcatter system is MOIL tion of numerous microwave and satellite terminals, the number of telephones per household hasin- On August 20, 1964 Brazil and 70 other countries creased tremendously, eventhough one has to wait for weeks or months to have a telephone installed. participatedinsetting up theInternational Tele-

-34- 33 communication Satellites Consortium, whose goals missionof messages (132 channels for voice) and are to plan, execute, and control the international the third channel for the transmission of television system of communication via satellite. Brazil owns sound and channelsof associated programs. The 1.5% of the shares which gives them a seat on the group was equipped with receptor channels and Board of Directors. now itis being increased to twelve, which is permis- sable in such an antenna. The Brazilian earth stationof communication by satellitewasinauguratedinFebruary 1969in We were initially interconnected with nine earth sta- Tangua, Itabarai county,inthe State of Riode tions in both North and South America and Europe. Janeiro. Itis to operate on the international circuit Ourcorrespondentsare:Argentina,Chile,Peru, transmitting and receiving, via satellite, all the tele- Mexico, the United States, Germany, Italy, Spain, communicationtraffic. The giant disc antenna of and France. Through these countries we are inter- the earth station can be seen from far away and is connected by coaxialcable withallofEurope, almost a tourist attraction catching the attention Japan, Canada, and other American countries. from all those who are driving by. This antenna captures the signals relayed by satellite. The signals Since the first time the earth stations went into are then conducted by underground cables to the operation we have seen the world's great events as master control. well as transmitting the great happenings in our own country and the rest of South America. EMBRATEL is the company in charge of operation of the satellite system. It's earth station was equip- A satellite has been ordered with delivery expected ped initially with one antenna with the capacity for inthe middle of 1975 and to be used soley for the addition of two more antennas. This system has Brazil's domestic use. three channels of radio frequency. One isfor the transmissionoftelevision, another for the trans-

35 - 'BROADCASTING IN THE PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Peter Graumann San Francisco State University

BACKGROUND 1937, this number had grown to 92 including a 71/2 UNDERDEVELOPMENT AND BROADCASTING kw transmitterbuiltinNanking by the German Noted for the high order of its ancient civilization, Telefunken Company for the publicity department the history of modern China is a story of colonial of the Kuomintant (KMT) and a 5 kw station con- oppression and underdevelopment. While this paper trolled by the Hankow Municipal government. certainly cannot be a thorough outline of Chinese history,itisimportant to recognize certain char- Of the 92 transmitters inoperation, 43 were in acteristicsofChinesesociety whichstilltoday Shanghai, most located within the Foreign Settle- affects every area of its social development in- ment andunderforeigncontrol.Pekinghad 5 cluding broadcasting. stations, 4 privately owned. An estimated 100,000 radioreceivers were inthe country at that time; With an area of over 9.6 million square kilometers none domestically produced.2 and a population over 700 million, size itself pre- sents tremendous obstaclestobuilding aunified Three types of stations existed: a few government cultureandsociety.- BesidesthemajorityHan owned and operated, many foreign owned commer- nationality, which constitutes 94% of the popula- cial stations and some stations run by the KMT, a tion,there are over 50 minority nationalities dis- nationalist politicalparty led by Chang Kai-Shek, tributed over 60% of the area of China.'All of used to transmit political messages. The exclusively these minority peoples have their own language and urban location of these stations serves to demon- cultural traditions. For centuries, and as recently as stratetheisolationofthe countryside from the the "War Lord Period" of 1911-1926, China was in cities. In addition, the lack of effective government effect a series of locally ruled provinces having their control is shown by the fact that the most powerful own monarchs, armies, and economies. station in all China was built in Changchun by the Japanese government in 1934. Its 10 kw of power China is a predominantly rural and agrarian country was used to blot out Chinese government broadcasts with the vast majority of its population engaged in to Manchuria.3 agriculture. No developed communications system or transportation network existed prior to 1949 and consequently that rural majority was cut off from COMMUNIST RADIO the central cities. What little industry existed was The use of radio by the Chinese communist move- owned by foreign companies. The level of poverty ment began in the second half of the 1930's. The was enormous and education reserved for the elite firsttransmitters and receivers were employed by few. the New China News Agency for monitoring foreign broadcasts and transmitting stories, at first to news services outside the country and beginning in 1943, BROADCASTING BEFORE 1949 within China itself.'With the emergence of the Since the beginning of broadcasting here, radio has civil war between the communist and nationalist led beenthedominantbroadcastmedium.Radio forces,theChinese Communist Party(CCP)in- development reflected the situation of the country creased their use of radio; constructing transmitters in general. In 1931, China had 18 radio stations. By in the communist held "liberated zones". Beginning

'1 Geography of China, [1972i , pp. 1-5. 2. Chu Chia -Hue. China's Postal and Other Communications Services, pp. 192-193 (all rig. cited). 3.Ibid., p. 194. 4. Fu-wu'Hou(Franklin W. Houn). To Change A Nation, p. 97.

-37- 35 in Yencn in 1945 with a 300 watt station on the air afactor.It was certainly more economical to ex- 2 hours daily, then expanding program time to 3 ploit existing transmitters than to build new ones. hours including some English language programs by the end of 1948 there were 16 stations operating Upon coming to power, 49 of the 83 existing sta- from theliberatedarea,mostdirectedtoward tions were brought under government control. The nationalist held zones.1 remaining 33 private stations, mainly in Shanghai, were placed under tight restrictions and eventually nationalized when the administration feltable to THE GROWTH OF BROADCASTING provide necessary personnel. By 1957, the number AFTER THE 1949 REVOLUTION of "People's" stations had reached 58 with an addi- With the victory of the socialist revolution in 1949, tional 39 frequencies added to those transmitters aqualitative transformation of China began. The potential. Thisriseintotal output strength grew peasantry had played amajor role in the revolu- from 107.9 kw in 1949 to 475.2 kw in 1952 to tionary struggle and this role was reflected in the over 4,275 kw by 1954 with projections to increase attention paid by the new government to the rural that figure by 460% by 1957.2 population.

Two major campaigns launched early in the 1950's THE METHODS OF DIFFUSION foreshadowed the emergence of radio. The first was Several innovations were applied inthe 1950's to an effortto reform the through supplement and extend the limited broadcast power the simplification of written symbols and elimina- availabletothe government. The earliest put in ting little used characters. These changes made writ- effect was the "Monitor System". In Aprii 1950, ten language available to the masses of people for the Information Administration issued its "Decisions the firsttime. This efforttiedinto the massive on the Establishment of Radio Broadcasting Moni- literacy campaigns launchedin 1951 to overcome toring Teams" which calledfor organizing people the lack of education available to the majority of intosquadsthatcouldbringthe radiotothe people. people. Later that year, monitor teams were estab- lishedin the armed forces and in September 1951, Virtually all observers agreed that a vast increase in the trade unions began torecruit volunteers for the use of the broadcast media was implemented by teams in work places.' thesocialist government after1949. This growth was effected mainly by developing already existing These teamslistenedtobroadcasts from Peking, transmitters through: printedthe important information and news onto flyers and distributed them in their areas. An alter- Increases in transmitter strength native method used wastoput the information ontolargepostersor"Public News Boards"in Adding frequencies for broadcast use prominent locations.In additionto bringing new Effortstobring effective communication audiences to the stilllimited radio facilities,these between the central government and rural teams served as a vehicle to discuss the news with areas through the national coordination of people and feed back the public reaction to Peking. radio. The April 29, 1950 "Regulations for the Work of the Monitors" called for the teams to be selective in Rather than an immediate increase in the number of the material used for distribution, focusing on im- transmitters, these methods were probably favored portant political and educational matters that would due tolackof materials and trained technicians raisethe culturallevelofthe people. The teams needed to construct and operate new stations. The were toregularly report to the local broadcasting goal of unifying the country and overcoming region- station which materials had been chosen and how alism through a national broadcast hook up was also people received the information. The station could

1. Fuwu Hou (Franklin W. Houn). ToChange A Nation,p. 155. 2.Ibid., p.156 (for all fig. cited in para.). 3.Ibid., p. 160 (as cited by Houn from New China Monthly and People's Daily).

-38. then adjustits programming inlightof audience the rebroadcasting stations need be inelectrified response.' locations.

As of January 1956, there were 11,000 such teams The large jumps in the penetration of wired radio operating fromvariouslevelgovernment offices. took place in conjunction with large scale economic Another 17,000 were in industrial units or in agri- and agricultural campaigns. During the "Agricultural culturalcooperatives.Stillanother 22,000 teams Cooperative" and "People's Commune" effortsin functionedinthe armed forces.These involved 1955-56 and 1957-59 respectively, the number of around 150,000 individual monitors. By 1961, there rediffusion outlets grew dramatically. This is shown were estimated to be 60,000 teams comprised of by statistics showing 8 wired stations with 500 out- almost 200,000 persons.2 lets in 1949, 835 stations with 90,500 outlets in the beginningof the cooperative movement in1955, Another way of broadening radio listenership was L490 stations having 515,700 outlets at the culmin- the organization of collective listening campaigns or ation of the campaign in 1956, 6,772 stations with. listening assemblies. For important broadcasts, the 2,987,500 speakersinthe midst of the People's government encouraged the population to come in Commune movements in 1958 and 11,124 stations groups to locations having radio receivers usually with over 4.5 million outlets by 1960.4 inworkers clubs,government offices and other public places. Group listening was featured during Alan Ping-liu writing in 1960 observed that: the Korean war as a means to mobilize support for the Korean national liberation struggle.It remains The wired radio broadcasting network facili- tates the modernization process among the occasionally used today, when particularly impor- Chinese peasants especially by imparting skills tant issues in domestic or world politics arise. and disseminatingfacts. Every provincial People's Broadcasting Station has regular agri- Beginning in 1955, the use of "wired broadcasting" cultural programs which are rebroadcast by (rediffusion) became the major development goal the county wired stations.5 for radio in the People's Republic of China. Wired broadcasting was firstutilizedextensively inthe The penetration of radio into rural provinces was Soviet Union and it was probably through their in- evidencedfurther whenitwas reportedthatin fluence that it was adopted in China.' 1959, 84% of rural cooperatives in the Kwantung and Keilunkaing provinces were connected to the The major advantage of this type of system in an wired system and 54% of the communes in Inner underdeveloped countryisthat the need for rela- Mongolia had rediffusion stations or were connected tively expensive individual radio receivers is avoided to the wired system.6 by using loudspeakers instead whose cost is much less. A programissent out from the national or The creation of the rediffusion system did not elim- regional station to local receiving stations. These in inateproductionofradioreceivers.Duringthe turn transmit the program through wires to local "" of 1958, more than one mil- speakers much as a telephone cable system works. lion sets were produced, a relatively large number These loudspeakers are placed in prominent public when compared to the estimated one million total locations,schools,andlisteningrooms in work radios in all China less than 10 years earlier.'The places. Besides being economical, wired systems are 1965 United Nations statistics on radioin China not limited to places which have electricity, only listed 233 radio stations with 6,991,200 individual

1. Fu-wu Hou (Franklin W. Houn). To Change A Notion, p. 161. 2.Ibid. 3. Alan Ping -fin Liu. The Growth and Moderniiing Function of Rural Radio in Communist China, pp.573-577.

4.ibid. 5.Ibid. 6.Ibid. 7, Hugh Howse. The Use of Radio in China, p. 60.

4481 -39- (.) radio receivers and 8,800 wired systems. This calcu- The major source of national and regional program- lates to one set per 100 people.'In comparison, in ming is the Central People's Broadcasting Station in

1937 approximately I set per 4,000 people and no Peking. The central station has the ability to trans- wired systems existed. The overall average for Asia mit 4 separate simultaneous programs. Three of in1965, including Japan, was 2 radios per 100 thesearerelayednationallyforrebroadcast by people,2 regional and local stations while the fourthisfor local Peking reception.6 Today, the production ofradio transmission and receiving equipment is an important industry in the Below the national level are the 21 provincial sta- People's Republic of China. Since 1953, all of the tions. These replay a substantial amount of national equipment used in the country has been domestical- programs, especially news and political commentary. ly manufactured. By 196U, over 130 different radio Regional stations usually follow up these national models were reported to be in production, some of programs withthe shows oftheir own creation. them quite sophisticated and having built in tape Provincial stations are under the authority of region- recorders. The equipmentisproducedinseveral al government bodies. cities, Shanghai ranking first in output. With rising domestic production, a sharp drop inradio prices The third tier of the system is the local transmitters has been recorded, While certainly not being cheap, who initiate part of their own material also. In rural they are available to the vast majority of working areas, a typical program might be on "How to Make people.' Production PlansforAgriculturalCooperatives". The popular method of follow up for such a show would be to invite an experienced peasant to speak THE GOVERNMENT AND BROADCASTING about his methods of farming.' The Chinese broadcasting systemisorganized on three levels: Local news and weather reports constitute a major portion of locally originated air time. In the early National postrevolutionary days, in order to involve the local population inradio, thousands of citizens were in- Regional or Provincial vited to express themselves over the air on radio. Local or Country In addition to these public stations,the People's The national government body responsible for regu- Liberation Army broadcasts over 24 frequencies. This lating this mediumisthe Bureau of Broadcasting researcher found no material on the exact content of AffairsoftheState ,Council. The bureau makes these programs which are intended for use in the edu- overall plans for the growth and content of national cation and training of military personnel.' radio and has organized several national conferences like the one in 1955 which made the initial plans for the wired systems and projected them to cover HOW THE GOVERNMENT VIEWS THE MEDIA the national by 1962:1While this goal was not The government of China is extremely frank in its achieved on schedule, by 1964 there were over 6 views toward the function of broadcast media. The millionlocal wired outlets(speakers) linking over Deputy Director of the Propaganda Department of 95% of the towns and communes tothe central the Communist Party Central Committee stated in system.6 1958:

1. World Radio and Television, UNESCO [19651. 2.Ibid. 3. Hugh Howse. The Ilse of Radio in China, p. 60. 4.Idem., The Role of the Muss Mediu in China, pp. 48-64. 5. Alan Ping-lin Liu. Communications and National Integration in C01711711111iSt China. 6. Hugh Howse. The Use of Radio in China, p. 61. 7. Alan Ping-lin Liu. Communications and National Integration in Communist China, pp.575-576. 8.1. M. Frost, ed. World Radio and TV Handbook.

40 All propaganda media must submit themselves musical,literary and dramatic programs accounted to situational needs, because they are an instru- for 62% and other miscellaneous programs for 10%.3 ment of class struggle and they have to serve politics at all times,' The content of news broadcasts center on achieve- ments in socialist production and government state- Thus, broadcast media is viewed in the same wayas ments.Coverage isalsoheavyoneventsin other public institutions, as instruments shaped to neighboringcountrieslikeKorea,Vietnam, and further the aims of building socialism, Tasks seen as Thailand. the special job for broadcasters are the education of the masses in politics arid history, practical work such as farming and production techniques, the wearing OTHER PROGRAMS away of regional and ethnic differences, propagation of the reformed language and the closer integration of Cultural programming consists of such things as story the rural and urban areas. telling, a traditional Chinese art, iiterary discussions, poetry readings, and comedy monologues. Musical selections range from military marches to opera to CONTENT OF THE MEDIA regional folk music from Wuhan or Chengtu province. The subject matter of Chinese broadcasting is varied and comprehensive. Between 1949 and 1952, it con- Children's programs are less political then most other sisted mainlyoilivebroadcasts ofmassrallies, offerings, Their main aim is to: speeches from party leaders and coverage of trials of . arouse children's scientific interest and crea- accused traitors and collaborators with Japan.' Si ice tive fancy, develop patriotism and love of the that time, while maintaining a heavy political propor- people, convey a certain amount of historic and tion, the use of radio for educational and cultural literary knowledge and provide pleasant and advancement has been introduced substantially. To- sensible recreation.4 day, atypical day's programming includes several news program;; lectures on science and literature; dis- Specialists in education design most of the programs, cussions of tarming; and women's programs utilizing utilizing mainly old folk tales, adventure stories and some western as well as native music, and featuring elementary science books. Selections from children's live broadcasts from the Peking Opera. own writing are frequently included. The common characteristics of these programs is their positive tone ',aid purity of language. NEWS Chinese tirnadcasters apply adifferent concept in rcpoiting the news. Healer than purporting to be EDUCATIONAL USES OF MEDIA "objective" reporters of events, as most newsmen in The use la radio and inlPvision fog urrocationalpar western countries do, Chinese reports are openly par- poses is extensive in the People's Republic of China tisan.During differentpoliticalperiods(Cultural today.Daily15 minute programslike"Popular Revolution, Great Leap Forward, etc.), program con- Science" and "Pages from History" are quite popular. tent may vary. The over riding theme remains the A 1-hour program 'Sunday Radio University" is the achievements the Chinese people since the 1949 longestregulareducationallanadcast and covers revolution in contrast to their prostration to foreign topics from science to philosophy. and domestic rulers before it. The actual percentage of straight news programs has decreased since 1950, in the early 1960's, "Radio and Television Univer- when the constituted 50% of all broadcast time with sities" wore establishedin Shenyang aridHarbin. educational programs taking 25% and recreational These now have 8 8 and 11 thousand students respec- shows another 25%. By 1955, news and political tively.5 The students, mostly illikISIH;11 workers, broadcasts decreased to 30% of air time, scientific, peasants, and soldiers attend 3 to 6 hours of Load-

1.Alan Ping-lin Liu. ConnnunhutionA and National Integiudun in ( onanunist Chino. 2.Ibid., p. 119. 3. Fu-wu Hou (Franklin W. Houn). Change A Nation, p. 168. 4.Ibid., p. 170. 5. Hugh Howse. The Use ol Radio in china, p. 63.

-41 cast lectures a week. The teachers are from the Peking will be greatly interested in sitting around the University and Peking Teachers University. radio.

In addition, a network of "Television Universities" Itappears that following the initialbroadcasting has been set up in Peking (beginning in 1960), Shang- years, two distinct periods passed where heavy em- hai, Canton, Tientsin and Harbin. The attendence phasis was laid on strictly political programs. These figures range from 23,000 inPeking to 5,000 in were during the Great Leap Forward in the years Shanghai. Courses cover mathematics, physics, chem- 1957-59 and during the Great Proletarian Cultural istry and literature and are on the air 8 hours a week. Revolution when Mao's writings and "revolution- About double that time is spent in individual study. ary" music were almost exclusively played. Other Homework and tests are assigned in correspondence than during these times, programs reflecting views form through the mail.' such as those quoted above, in other words, more variedandeducationalas wellas entertainment Both the radio and television universities are designed programs tok a large place in air time. for people who are otherwise engaged in working full time. Their advantages are the utilization of top in- During the Cultural Revolution, a political fight be- structions on a nation wide basis and the ease of tween two opposing factions in the CCP, the Mao access by a large segment of the population not likely wing organized campaigns to take control of govern- to attend school full time. ment radio stations. This was necessary as most of these were under the influence of the Liu Shao-shi In order to serve the various nationalities throughout wing ofthe party leadership. Mao's Red Guards the country, multilingual programs are the norm. physically siezed these "revisionist" transmitters and Usually,differentfrequenciesaresimultaneously utilized them to further their side of the struggle. transmitted with the same program being aired in dif- Frederick Yu, inhis study Persuasive Communica- ferent dialects. In 1955, of the 55 People's stations, tions During the Cultural Revolution, commented 15 aired multilanguage programs with 18 different on the important role of radio during this period dialects being spoken.2 when he wrote: It is certainly true that the Maoists made very extensiveuse of radio during the Cultural CHANGES IN PROGRAM CONTENT Revolution. 3 The content ofradio broadcasting has undergone several changes since 1949. Following the initial establishment of the People's Radio, many articles and discussions appeared in the public press taking Althf):;till radio remains the major broadcast medi- upfailures and criticismsofradix: programming. um in the People's Republic of China, televison has Harsh critiques such as the following appeared in been developedtoacertaindegree.Like radio, the People's Daily on February 6, 1954. there are no privately owned or commercial stations allowed. Most sources put the date that television orforcefullyfeeding Collectivelistening, began with the construction of an experimental sta- people long and dull material obviously does not suit the characteristics of broadcasting. tion in Peking in 1958.4 By 1959, 5,000 sets had The direction of our broadcasting should be been imported. This figure had grown to 20,000 by to make the most ideal propaganda medium lqA5 with 12 main and 8 auxiliary/experimental for every family and individual.If,after a stations in existence.5Today, between 30 and 50 days tension and labor, the mass can turn on stations are in operation in every province except theirradios and enjoylight and pleasant . The latest figures put the number of receivers music,brief news and lectures,and easily comprehensible study lessons, then the masses at about 300,000, about half privately owned, the rest in schols and public places.6

1. World Radio and Television, UNESCO. 2. Alan Ping-lin Liu. C.Ornmunications and National 1ln/oration in Communist China.

3.Frederick T.C. Yu. Persuasive Communications nullity the Cultural Revolution, pp. 73-87 4. World Radio and Television, UNESCO. 5. People's Dag', Peking 6.Julian Schown. How Television In China is Growing tip,p.10.

42 4 A factor slowing down the development of television, ()my, etc. Visits by foreign dignitaries usually receive was the insistance of the government that all equip- coverage. Feature films are part of the television fare ment be itself. Today, 5 or 6 different in China also. Many are foreign films from Vietnam, models of are being produced in several Korea, Romania, or Albania andare dubbed in cities and all broadcast equipment is manufactured Chinese.' domestically. The most common models have 9-inch screens and cost about $150. Fourteen and 16-inch While only 15 years old, Chinese television has al- models are producedinlesserquantities and cost ready establisheditselfas an important means of $200 and $300. AM television sets have long and education and communication for city dwellers. With mediumwave radioreceivers built -in.1A 625-line the further expansion of the electronics industry, we frame is the standard.' can expect a broader penetration of television intc the country as a whole. As a consequence of the re- In Peking, two channels are in operation. The first is a cent thawinrelations between China and other black and white channel on the air three hours daily, countries, itis probable that exchanges of television the norm for stations around the country, The second programs will increase as well. is a new color channel, begun in May 1973, which is on the air 4 nights a week for three hours. Experi- mental development of large screen color transmis- INTERNATIONAL BROADCASTING sion is being conducted and a few areas around the In the mea of international broadcasting, China today capitol are in operation already. This medium consists ranks third in the number of hours transmitted week- of a receiving unit which projects the images onto a ly to foreign countries. While today radio comprises large area screen for group viewing,3 the hulk of these broadcasts, the use of television is a possibility in the future. Further spreadof colortelevision will wait until China can produce her own color receivers. Currently, Overseas hroadcasts beganin 1950 with programs they must still be imported. beamed irregularly at Taiwan. By 1952, program time expanded to 4 hours per day, with material in 5 dia- Daily television broadcasts begin at 7 p.m, with the lects.5Transmission to areas besides Taiwan began in news. International footage comes from the 20 cam- 1956 between 17 and 21 hours weekly to Burma, era teams China has stationed in other countries or is Indonesia, Japan, Thailand, and Vietnam were aired. provided by foreign news services having exchange AI the end of that year, , Laos, the Near agreements with China. ,ind Middle East, and Europe were added bring pro- gi am time to over 45 hours a week. This had further A children's program usually follows the news. Often grown to 380 hours weekly of international trans- animated films are shown, averaging a little under an missions by 1959, ,not including Taiwan. Approxi- hour long. Shadow puppets are also popular with chil- mately NO hnuis ofthis was aimed at South and dren. Sport events are increasingly coming into favor Southwest Asia and the Pacilic area and another BO and television coverage features play-by-play reports hours to Chinese living in lornign countries.' ofboth traditional Chinese sports as well as new games like ice hockey. Today the total international imlio broadcasting from Radio Peking and the People's Liberation Arrays' Documentaries, 30- to 4b-minutes long, appear regu- I ukien laont Broadcasting Station is over 732 hums larly. Most deal with domestic topics like the over- itach week. and reaches virtually every counts on coming of obstacles in the construction of the econ- earthin over 30 languages.'The majorityisstill

1. Julian Schuman. now /e/misim, In China is Growing p.It). 2. TV Factbook, International TV Directory, p. 10668. 3.Julian Schuman. //oh /e/eilsiou In China is Growing tip,. 4.Ibid. 5. Hugh Howse. I ht. Role of Mass Mediu in China, pp. 67-68. 6,Ibid. 7.Ibid.

-43. 41 aimed at the Pacific Asian nations, but an ever in- mining a few educated persons, the intellegentsia, creasing amount goes to Africa, and selling some products. The government of the People's Republic of China has mada their major The People's Republic of China is a member of the efforts inthe broadcasting field the overcoming of InternationalBroadcasting°Neill/anon(01R),a this common malformation. Radio had brought the group founded in The People's Republic of China is goyetnment to the masses of rural people and, to a a member of the International Broadcasting Organi- containdegree, has brought the peasantry tothe sation(01H), a group founded in1946. A split government. Broadcasting has made easier the inte- took pltriA; within the body in 1949 and a section grationofmany widelydifferentcultures and of its membership :formed the European Broadcast- people in one nation. This seems to have been ap- ing Union, the rest irernaming in the OIR. In 1959, proached with a high degree of sensitivity toward the 01H had 20 affiliatedEuropean and Asian minority peoples, languages, and cultures. workers' states and the Bulgaria, Ciechoslovakia, East Germany (GDR), Poland, Albania, Romania, and the While we can conclude that radio and television U.S.S.R. For the year 1956, early in the development have helped overcome regionalism, solve the lan- of international exchanges by China, the People's guage problems and bring education to millions of Republic received 30 hours of programs from these people, we know that the media cannot solve social countries and sent out a total of 120 hours.' problems by themselves. They can only be tools, playing a certain role in this process. One of the most promising developments for interna- tional broadcasting from China is the recent announ- The Deputy Director of the Broadcasting Research cement of their intention to launch a communica- Institutein Peking evaluated the role that broad- tions satellite.' While the major use of this satellite, casting has playedinthis process inthe People's the third to he launched by China, will be for domes- Republic of China in the following way: tic ccommunication purposes, an additional aspect is reported to be its international television potential. The greatest success of the muss media has been the renewal of Chinese notional con- sciousness and a revitalization of the whole Besides her own satellite efforts, since 1971 China has nation,Through the mass media, the whole constructed 2 ground relay stations to make use of population was mobilized in a manner never already orbiting satelites. These stations have already before possible.3 been used for limited "live" coverage of important international diplomatic events in China. This statementreflectsthe importance placedin broadcasting by the Chinese government, and ex- plains the widespread development of radio which A FEW CONCLUSIONS has already taken place,Itis very likely that tele- In most underdeveloped countries, the mass media visionwillfollowthisrapid growth and further is concentrated in a few "westerniied" cities. The increase the effectiveness of the media in China. contentusuallyisaimed atreaching and enter-

1.George A. Codding, Ir. pp. 46.47, 68-60 Ow all inloirnation cited in 'Loa.). 2, Craig Covault. China to Launch NA TCOM in 'Near I tamp', Nov, 27,1'172. 3. Hugh Howse. The Role of Mass Mediu in China,

-44_- 4 2 THE MULTINATIONAL CONCEPT

Noreene Khanna Stanford University Palo Alto

We havethetechnologytoset up a worldwide programming content on other countries we should systemof communications which would connect recognize their need to show their national culture. even the smallest villages in the most remote parts But what is the national culture? Is there only one of the world. But we haven't been able to imple- in each country? Can we relax then, when we know mentthatsystemofinternationalbroadcasting for example, that Canada is broadcasting Canadian because of what appear to be almost insuperable national culture rather than American culture to its politicalproblems.We haven'tyetsettledthe viewers and listeners? problem of how to deal with an international elec- tronic message which happens to operate in a world By limitingour concern tointernational cultural divided by national boundaries. dominatiun we uveiluok the internal structures of domination and conflicting forces within the coun- We recognise at least two ol the dangers which have try. And if we overlook those we are only further resulted from the existence of nations and the fact reinforcing the role of the mass media as cultural thattheyareunequallypowerful and wealthy: homogenizers. There are those who claim that the First,the rich nations, by controlling most of the real problem lies not in the boundaries between the world's resources especially the communication states, but within them' since thatis where the resources grow and accumulate faster while the lines of social class, sex, and race are most clearly poor countries fall further arid further behind. And drawn. That isto say that maybe by stressing We secondly, because of such uneven control over the vertical division of people between nations as we do resources, large masses of humanity are powerless in for legal purposes and for international communica- the struggle to retain their own identity in the face tionpolicypurposes weareobscuringthe of the onrushing culture, which is called "western", problems caused by the horizontal divisions between "industrial", "capitalist", etc.It must he recognized classes, races, and sexes. In any case, the two lorms thatasfaras cultures ve concerned,the mass of stratilicatiun are closely related. media have functioned to reduce the distinctions as cultural hornogeni/ers So whatI am saying is that we now know that not all countries ol the mild wish to evolve towanl the But while these concerns have been discussed with internationally dominant culture of "Peyton Place" iegard In relations between natioiN, Ihey have rawly and "The Streets ol San Francisco". And similarly, been appliedtothe conditions within nations.In many national inirmrities prefer not to he assimila our policy statements we have been limiting nations ledintothe mainstream culture ofthe nalional as it they were homogeneous unitsratherthan political suite. This we see happening all around us loosely united mixtures olclasses, races, religions, Irom Canada to India. And this includes ol course, and languages as are many countries of the world the factthat women areless andless willing to especially in Alrica and Asia. At a recent satellite accept the dominant male culture as tImir own. conference it was stated that:

[There is now/ u strong political feeling that ANALYSIS OF THE PROBLEM we should control the media better so that they reflect more the national culture.1 The analysis olthe problem is very difficult since there are well recognized benefits as well as draw- Rather than pushing our purely american oriented backs to the issue of national integration or nation

1. Lmile G. NIcAnanv, "impact 0/ 41w,s Communitutiom on .5o(ial mud Cultural Scsirtm: Some Reflections on /1w Intonational /low ()I Information," a impel for the Confeience on Fclo,ision and Satellites, p. 16. 2.Kaarle Nordenstreng and Tapio Varis, "The Nonhomogeneity of the National State and the International Flow of Communica- tion," p. 393.

-45- 4 3 building as its often called. Nation building is essen- single system of mass communications pro- tialto modernization becauseitseems to be the viding a common shared experience to the most effective way to mobilize the population for entire population can perform an important rolein making credible the oneness of the change. Without some degree of unification a nation territory .. .1 cannot achieve its broad goals of a rising standard ofliving,a more orderly political process, greater as UNESCO advisers have claimed we are hearing socialjustice,aridlessdependenceintheinter- only part of the story. nationalcontext. And aside from these practical reasons,thedrive towardnationalintegrationis And the same holds true for the fact that there is morally desireable; the unification of humans and everincreasing centralizationofthemedia. The the development of larger and larger collective iden- trend with each additional new means of communi- titiesisa worthwhile goal. Butitis important to cationis toward larger and larger audiences, and it determine whether atruly integrated society can seems thatthat trendisinevitable. The media of only be had by out the differences between radio and television and especially the satellite are us. I would suggest thatitisnot the only road too expensive to be used on a small scale. Their toward integration, but not even the best way. The unit cost drops sharply ifthey are used as they are integration drive in most countries has met with less meant to be as mass media. What this means is than success; the identities of the various cultural that the message is becoming more and more cen- minorities have been seriously damaged. tralizedinorder to make the system work more efficiently. The use of satellites only reinforces all Almost all countries with distinct cultural minority the tendencies we have listed: uneven control over populations have chosen to deal with them in much the world communication resources,a centralized the same way as the United S:ates has traditionally and one way message system, and greater social con- dealt with its minority groups assimilation. And trol over the minority groups. for much the same reasons as we have acted gen- eral fear of diversity, the Cold War mentality which In the field of education, proponents of the new feareddualloyalties,andthedesireforgreater media claim that their use will aid in the upgrading social control of the population and lessriskof of the quality of the educational system since the rebellion. best teachingfacilitiescan be shared over wide- spread populations. These new media and espe- InIndia,for example, the government's driveto cially whenthesatelliteisusedfor educational promotethenationalculturehascaused much purposes require the centralization of content and resentment toward the government and the nation training. So the trendislikely to continue simply as 11 whole. Rints and strikes have rocked the coun- becauseitisinevitable, given the workings of our try periodically since the time of inder:endence. A present economic system and because that the best threat to the cultural identity of individuals is often facilities can be spread further, cheaper, and faster. seen as a realthreat to their self-identity and well being. The culturally deprived person may become Inone UNESCO report, someone even proposed alienated and incapable of normal human develop- that the production of educational material he done ment. And it should be added that the society as a atthe continent-wide level.'While accepting the whole suffers the loss of the individuality and crea- benefits of such centralization, we must imagine the tivity of the minority groups a great loss as we negative effects. We don't have to strain our imagin- are now beginning to realize. ations very hard since that is basically the situltion inthis country continent wide message control. So when we hearthatfor countries divided by In a report on educational television for the Ford tribes, races, languages, and religions a ... Foundation it was mentioned that thought control

1.See Wilbur Schramm, Mass Media and National Development, p. 44. 2. V. Sarabhai, ct.al. Application of Science and Technology to Development, p. 23.

-46- I is a principle danger of a centrally managed system of 2. A deliberate policy of promotion of the education which uses television to carry the main local media is undertaken. load of instruction since a uniform message can be beamed at all children and adults.1It went on to ask There are several examples of local media projects if the recent trend in a number of the'underdeveloped to choose from with varying degrees of government countries to use educational television is not moti- control and real community participation.I'dlike vated by similar considerations of social control. to end by bliefly describing a project in Canada When the media is used whether purposefully or which has been studied in depth by a colleague at unwittingly towipe out culturaldistinctions Stanford.' while at the same time reinforcing the class distinc- tions, we should reexamine our policies. We must In 1972 and 1973, community radio stations were continue to ask: set up to serve the needs of several small Eskimo settlements in the Northwest Territory of Canada, 1. To what ends does the government choose under the direction of the Canadian Broadcasting to follow a policy of integration. Corporation (CBC). The first studies of the proposal showed thatthere were no trained personnel to 2. What do the people at all levels of society operate the stations so no licenses could even be gain or lose from the government's particu- applied for. And since the objective was to set up lar policies of integration. trulyuseful community stations which did more 3. What are thetools used to enact those than play records and make announcements, they policies. would have to provide some rather extensive train- ingin news gathering and public affairs program- ming. When these steps were completed and the WHAT CAN BE DONE? licenses obtained the stations began operating on a We have seen how the mass media can contribute to 4-hour per day schedule. The schedule combines local the process of cultural destruction; now we ask how news,localfeatures,recorded music, and taped they can contribute positively to the healthy growth material from the CBC'.Some of these local features and development of that culture. Or what are the include religious programs in various denominations, positive influences of broadcasting in this issue? programs about social services, and special features about the schools and elections. The amount of pro- In this matter itis difficult to propose real alterna- gramming done in the local languages is impressive. If tives; the movement toward cultural domination is one leaves out the music, more than 80% of the ver- bal communication is in Eskimo dialects. And about verystrongandissupported by very powerful 90% of all the programming was made locally. interests.Most solutions which callforthe relin- quishing of power or resources seem impractical or naive. The only hope is for us to continue working How well does the station serve the community? It is with whatever alternatives are open. still a little early to tell. The results of a survey in one of the towns showed that most of the people listened

Itisimperative thatpolicyplanners continually to the station nearly all the time it broadcasts. And a remind themselves of the dangers of the centralized sizeable number of people in the community have message. And that they recognize the desireability already participated in the making or broadcasting of of the diversity of cultures. Nation-building through program content. The station seems to have increased the mass media should be accepted only under the the Eskimo listeners' awareness of the activities and following two conditions: events going on in the community and in the whole Northern region.It has replaced interpersonal com- 1. On the national media the content must be munication as the chief source of information about alteredtogivestatustotheoutlooks, local activities. The non-Eskimos in the area who have values, and ways of life of all groups within been the newspaper readers still get their news from the society. the papers, whereas now the Eskimo could learn

1.Robert Arnove. Lducutionul Television: A Policy Critique and Guide for the Developing Countries, p. 85. 2.Heather Hudson. Ph.D. Dissertation.

4 5 -47- nearly as much from the radio. The information gap programs. Broadcasting has served as at least a tem- may be closing. porary means for cultural self-preservation.

The main result of these community stationsis that Of course, the Eskimo radio stations were set up people are communicating more With each other and funded by the CBC. And this point is impor- and with neighboring settlements in their own lan- tant becauseitmeans thatthis casemight not guage and about their own problems and interests. furnish a workable solutionforother groups in One may predict thatthey,like the French and other countries. A government canuse funding, other Canadian minority cultures, willin the long licensing,training,legal restrictions,and various run be drawn into the mainstream national culture. other controls to inhibit the growth of community If that happens and certainly there are benefits to broadcasting.It seems then, that only to the extent be gained from the nation maybe they will be that the government accepts the rights of all people more able to determine the conditions under which to information and to the perpetuation of their own they integrate. Asitisnow, these Eskimo com- culturesthatsuchpositiveinfluencesof broad- munities have the choice of whethertoexpose casting may succeed. themselves tonational programming or their own

-48- 4,6 AN APPRAISAL OF HARRISON SALISBURY

TO PEKING...AND BEYOND

Reverend Richard N. Isaacs San Francisco State University

In the two years since President Nixon's visit offi- spreadtheirobjectives,the movement gaineda cially opened to the United States, broader social and political concern. Ultimately, the what have we learned of the mysterious giant? For workers were caught up in the whole affair and in- the mostpartthe media have focused on acu- dustry slowed while heated discussions and confron- puncture, the ancient Chinese art (and science) of tations took place everywhere. healing through the insertion of needles at specific points on the body. This is understandable, for the Salisbury is quick to point out thatit was a real unusualalwaysmakesbettercopythanmore revolution. Fighting broke out in many areas and general information, even when the latter has been people were killed. suppressed or inaccessible for years. What didthe revolution accomplish? Aside from With the publication of To Peking And Beyond, serving Chairman Mao inredistributing power and Pulitzer Prize winner Harrison Salisbury has brought removing opponents fromoffice,the educational to light much of this information so essential to our system was overhauled. The universities were closed understanding of the world's most populous nation. for several years and the students and faculty alike Salisbury,for many years the New York Times' were sent to "May Seventh" schools to work with Moscow correspondent, was one of the first Ameri- their hands in the interim. These schools were set cans tosuspecta SinoSoviet splitinthe mid- upthroughorders from Chairman Mao, whose fifties.His background enables him to effectively intent was to reacquaint intellectuals with the phy- probe and support that which is presented in the sical labor oriented lives of peasants. book. The program was found to be of such value in Ofprime importance totoday's China was the giving all types of workers a sense of unity of pur- "Cultural Revolution".It began with the publica- pose that even now periodic breaks are scheduled in tion of a play in Peking which told of an honest the school year for students and faculty to return public servant's dismissal from office by a tyrannical to the fields. emperor. Written by Peking's Vice Mayor inlate 1965, the play was purportedly an historical tale of Another generalresultof the Cultural Revolution the Ching Oynasty. Its true intent, however, was to has been a preoccupation with the political implica- attack (by comparison) Chairman Mao for his dis- tions of that which is taught in the schools. The missal of a defense minister in 1959. Chineseclassics,for example, have always been dealt with as literary works, but now the moral and Mao, whose base of power had shifted to Shanghai, political messages are emphasized for discussion. attempted to generate a political discussion of the play but was met with opposition in Peking. Stu- Politics and culture in China are often indistinguish- dents began to take sides and the universities were able.Singing, dancing, and other arts are almost plunged into a chaos not unlike that of America's entirely politically oriented in sharp contrast to campuses in the late sixties. most of the world's cultures. Although the idea of entertainment isstillinvolved, the moral, political, From thisconfusion came the "Red Guards", a and educational aspects are ever present. On one student organization whose original aim was a re- visit to a May Seventh school, Salisbury told of a examinationofthe educational process. As large musical revue presented by the students with song numbers of young Chinese took to the road to titleslike "Chairman Mao Has Sent Us Revolu-

- 49 - tionary Seed", and "Happy Is He Who Drives The nourished. Beggars are in short supplyif not non- Night Soil Curt ".' existent. The flies and foul smells once character- isticof a Chinesecityhavebeenvirtually With regard to the morality of the Chinese, one is eliminated, the former through massive use of DDT. tempted to draw comparisons to the Puritans. In one of the book's must revealing chapters, "A Bull China has yet to undergo any significant environ- Session", a group of young students voiced their mental self-examination, although industrialpollu- opinions on sex, drugs, and music. tion in many areas rivals the worst in America and Their deep dedication to the revolution and their Europe. One reason for this is the emphasis placed country left little room for these things. on rapid development of industry.

Late marriages are encouraged, and public display of Back in the 1950's, when the Russians and Chinese affection,regardless ofmarital status,is frowned were on better terms, it was massive Soviet aid that upon. Handholding among the young is considered started China on the road to becoming an industrial an indication of a very serious relationship, one on nation. Money ,and advisors poured in and projects the verge ofmarriage. Drug problems were com- like the iron and steel company outside the city of pletely foreign to the Chinese, and they expressed Wuhan began totake shape. Salisbury learned of bewilderment at the United Stales' situation. When that period from the company's deputy director. discussing rock and rollit was obvious that they were violently opposed to any part of culture un- The Chinese and their Soviet advisors worked to- relatedto education and revolution. Additionally, gether,modifyingall-Russianplanstobetterfit rock music had become associated with the Russians Chinese conditions and economic needs. The U.S. thruugh theSovietradio broadcasts. This meant S.R. was providing nearly all of the machinery and that,whateveritscontent,itcouldonly be materials,and when theirsupport was suddenly despised. withdrawn in1960, the Chinese were left with a great number of half completed projects. Salisbury felt their generation was: After the shock wore off, they applied themselves pathetically naive, often dangerously chau- to the task of completing the construction on their incurious,and un- vinistic,intellectually own. Some of the Russian equipment proved faulty, informed almost tothe point of illiteracy about matters that did not closely relate to so the Chinese hadto rework, redesign, or com- their lives and their country's interests.2 pletely scrap certain items and start from scratch. Productionisonly now reaching optimum output Despite such an indictment, these same tendencies levels, but the recovery is nonetheless remarkable. It are probably responsible fur China's remarkable in- speaks well of the Chinese people's perseverance and ternal progress regarding living conditions. dedication to their country.

The picture painted of prerevolution China is one of To the casual observer, life in China may yet seem dirtystreets and disease ridden masses. Salisbury primitive when compared toRussia and America, reports a completelyopposite view today.City butthe strides takeninthe past 25 years lend streets are spotless and the people, even peasants powerfulcredencetoSalisbury'sbeliefthatthe and poor city dwellers, appear healthy and not mul- future of the world lies with China.

1. Harrison Salisbury, toPeking ... And Beyond,p. 68. 2.Ibid., p. 139. INSIDE CHINA

Dr. Eugene Bertermann Far East Broadcasting Company Whittier, California 90608

Because ofthe limitations oftime,I'm going to able to pull in the KLDA signal, a distance of some compress the presentation so that we can quickly get 1,200 miles, just as clearly as any 50,000 watt station into the slides which take us to Mainland China. right in Tokyo itself. We had it on all the way to Hanada Airport, and were able to tune itin very The Far East Broadcasting Company covers basically beautifully. This powerful radio station, of course, the Pacific Basin, that is the entire area which is the has as its primary target the mainland of China. We're special area of interest of this conference. There have broadcasting daily in Mandarin approximately 41/2 been great developments inthis last year, andI'll hours spread over the day. The total hours of trans- summarize them very briefly before we turn to the mission currently is 101A liuuis daily. Shortly we'll be, pictures. One is in the area of radio station KGEI, if all goes well and we maintain enough electricity, right here in greater San Francisco, Redwood City, broadcasting 24 hours a day, principally into main- and Belmont. The Federal Communication Commis- land China. sion of the United States Government has unfrozen the freeze on international shortwave broadcast after Anothergreatdevelopmentthat isimmediately about eleven years, so that all of a sudden there came before us, is the erection of a new 250,000 watt sta- tumbling out of the hopper the various requests that tion at Ibay in Zambales, North Luzon, in the Philip- we had addressed to them over the years. pines. It may be recalled that we own and operate 16 stations in the Philipinnes, in three different services: We now, as a result, are broadcasting 14 hours daily down to , and have had, in addition, Domestic service for the Philippines as an been granted the reactivation of our Orient beam, so entity that we're broadcating now 10 hours daily over to lmernational service from Bocaue the Orient. Our little staff there has had to scramble so as to fill all of the broadcasting appropriately, and Sevenprovincialstationsinthe various yet we're going forward very nicely. Thri 250 kw provincial capitals transmitter, which has been inreadiness for some time, is now in the final stages of preparation, and if The reason for the provincial stations is that here we everything goes well, we will be broadcasting with have an opportunity, using the provincial languages, 250,000 watts of power beginning May 5th. to carry forward in far greater diversity than would he possible if we were simply to have only the domes- The second great development is that of the inaugura- tic service from Caroatan and Valenzuela. The big tion of our new radio station KLDA in Cheju, Korea. new 250,000 watt station will be broadcasting on At the southern tip of the Korean peninsula is a little 1470 kilocycles in the standard broadcast band and island 30 miles long arid 18 miles wide called Cheju directed principally to mainland China and Southeast Island. We there have inaugurated our station, dedica- Asia. Also with this station we will have a powerful tingit on July 4th appropriately for Americans. new service available for the entire Southeast Asia Our new radio station is 250,000 watts, on the stan- area. dard band, 1570 kilocycles. The antenna array is able to be tuned or turned in three directions: westward Another area of our operations is on the Seychelles into mainland China; northward into Russia (and Islands in the Indian Ocean, about 1,000 miles off the Korea itself); and eastward into Japan. The initial coast of East Africa, near Mombasa. This is a broad- mail response is very encouraging. We were in Tokyo castservice principally into the Middle East and and on the street in front of the Overseas Press Club, India. We had a very enlightening presentation a few and with a little ten dollar transistor radio, we were moments ago relative to India, and you can realize

- 51 49 the necessity for additional broadcast opportunities encingthe same confusion and indecisions to this vast subcontinent with 550 million people. which they had felt when living simultaneously in two contrasting forms of society and experience. We have before us...and I'd like to leave this as a little challenge toallof us ... a tremendous The late Brigadier General Sarnoff, Chairman of the opportunity for additional broadcast work. This was Board of RCA, stated: apparent inthe very fine presentation relative to Malaysia aridIndia, and which I'm sure will ring Developments are too radical in their nature, through allof the other presentations. A commis- and the pace at which they come is too swift sioner of the FCC, H. Rex Lee, has written: for the past to serve as any effective prelude to the communicating future. We must look for The vast potential of radio, television, film, entirely new procedures attuned to the realities computers, and communication satellites, for of the space age. helping solve our problems,lies largely un- tapped. Never before has man had so many We have before us, therefore, in this conference as tools and methods for improving the quality well as in all of the opportunities that are available of life,and yet he refuses fully to utilize to usinour specific areas of broadcasting, mar- them. velous new opportunities for the future. I would look to the conference to highlight from year to year Marshall McCluhan wrote: in the presentations that are made here, as they bring before us, with ever greater clarity and intensity, and We are today as fur into the electronic age as the Elizabethans had advanced into the typo- into even sharper focus, the great opportunities and graphic and menchanical age. And we're experi- challenges of broadcasting to the Pacific area.

INSIDE CHINA FILM PRESENTATION SCRIPT & SLIDE DESCRIPTION FOLLOWS:

r- - 52 o 3 INSIDE CHINA COLOR SLIDES WITH SOUND TRACK

119 VIEWS 18 MINUTES

INSIDE CHINA an unusual set of color slides with sound track narration is presented by the Far East Broadcasting Company. This widely based Christian radio mission (now in its 28th year)uses 23 transmitters to reach 100 countries with Truth and Hope in 63 languages. Listeners from around the world write up to 22,000 letters monthly.

Mainland China... its target of emphasis at the present time, has 800 million oppressed people. Talented Christian Chinese are trained to use FEBC's giant facilities in Kong, Manila, San Francisco (shortwave) and Cheju, South Korea (mediumwave or AM) to cover every square mile of Red .

Refugees reaching freedom report great blessing from these bioadLasts of the gospel. Now you can see Inside China for yourself even the actual closed church structures now used for purposes more suited to the atheistic Marxist cause: Don't fail to catch the sensation communicated in the showing by our friend who was permitted behind the "bamboo curtain" for a few days... especially his delight upon tuning a radio to an FEBC broadcast penetrating the "curtain" and hearing gospel hymns loud and clear... Inside China!

This presentation is available in either a slide/sound tape combination or a film strip/cassette combination. The running time is approximately 18 minutes and containes 119 different slides.

To schedule this program PLEASE CONTACT

FILM DEPARTMENT FAR EAST BROADCASTING COMPANY POST OFFICE BOX 1 WHITTIER, CALIFORNIA 90608 1111 PHONL: (213) 698-8077

The narration script and a short description of each slide follows:

53 INSIDE CHINA COLOR SLIDES WITH SOUND TRACK 119 VIEWS 18 MINUTES

NO. PICTURE NARRATION NO. PICTURE NARRATION

1. BOWMAN I'm Bob Bowman, President of the 17. INSIDE CHINA theseexclusivepictures andhis SEATED Far East Broadcasting Company. eyewitness reportfromInside For nearly 25 years ... [music up) China.

2. BOWMAN the borders to the People's Re- 18. PICTURE The first thing that I saw in China, AT MAP public of China have been firmly aftercrossingtheborderfrom barred. , was this picture of an 80 year old man Mao Tse-Tung. 3. VIEW AT The closest view most westerners BORDER have had of the "bamboo curtain" 19. WALL SIGN The second piece of scenery of has been from this vantage point in note wasthiswallplaque con- Hong Kong's New Territories over spicuously posted on the wall of looking China. this combination immigration customs office and railway station 4. CHINESE For more than twenty years the it admonished the people of the CROWD FarEastBroadcasting Company worldtouniteagainstwestern has been broadcasting by "fuith" agressors.I suddenly realized they intotheworld's most populous were talking about me! nation. 20. TRAINS Several cups of tea and as many 5. PHILIPPINE FEBC first began broadcasting to inspectionslater, I boarded this STATION China by shortwave in 1949. Our "show" train for the trip to .. 50,000 watt transmitters beamed on the middle kingdom arc located 21. BUILDINGS Canton - the southernmost city of in the Philippines. the mainland.

6. OKINAWA IN- In 1960 we put into operation on 22. CANTON The streets of Canton weren't ex STALLATION Okinawa our 100,000 watt medi- STREET actly crowded, nor were the people umwave station, KSBU, beamed on hurried. Shanghai. 23. PEOPLE ON Canton has always been known as 7. OPEN DOOR But in1971, knowing the door BENCH the bourgeois city of China, and BOOKLETS would close to us on Okinawa, the less affected by Maoism than any Lord began to open the door to other major area on the mainland. new broadcast opportunities. 24. TWO MEN The dictates of Mao to work hard 8. NEW SITE The fulfillment of that open door (the laborers arc few and the rice ON CHEJU to China came on June 30, 1973, supply is short) isn't when to the glory of ... 25. MAN always greeted in Canton with the 9. FEEDER LINES God, I and other members of our SLEEPING kind of enthusiasm you'd find in CHEJU staffdedicated our mighty 250 [music up) Peking. thousand watt mediumwave ... 26. TEETOR- We weren't there long till we began 10. 250,000 WATT transmitter on the small island of BOARD to run into the children 01 Canton, TRANSMITTERCheju, South Korea in the Yellow where we (Lund they were much Sea. likethoseinother partsofthe world SOW' EV In these days of relaxed tension RELAXED between the and 27. MERRYGO- stilluntaineci and beautifully in- communist China we ure not . . ROUND nocent,

12. CHINA MAP slackening our interest in 800 mil- 28. PING PONG as they play their games ... ping lion precious people. Imentioned pong included. ghat our ministry was one of luith. 29. TWO The women in China do the same 13. CHINESE And so it has been. Although we've WOMEN work as their male counterparts. BORDER had a number of letters over the years from China ... 30. PLOW Their equipment is not an electCe dishwasher, but a plow which is 14. CITY SCENE and although we've been able to used lor planting rice HONG KONG talk with refugees from China in Hong Kong, we've .. 31. GRAIN orthishand turned winnowing MACHINE machine which is used to harvest 15. CHINESE never been able to take a first hand the rice. FACES lookatChinaitself F EBC's largest target audience. 32. BAGS OF And then that same rice is shipped RICE Irom the commune to the markets 16. SHANGHAI But all that has changed. Just re- abroad, marked by the sweat of STREET cently a friend of FEBC was able men and women alike. to visit Red China. It is with ex- citement that I share with you ...

-54- NO. PICTURE NARRATION NO. PICTURE NARRATION 33. FIELD Only when the crop is in do they 51. RAILROAD rock pusher the belt attached to WCR.!

43. BAGS OF rice, and many other products for 59. HOTEL We had a night's rest in the Russian RICE the worlds' markets. built Friendship Hotel its' sever- Al thousand rooms are set aside for 44. ALLEY WAY One cannot go to China without foreign"friends"(Russiansnot being invited to visit a commune included). (some setaside lustfor such a purpose), this alley way opened 60. TIEN AN MIEN One of ow first stops in Peking SQUARE was Tien An Mien Square. 45. BRICK HOME onto a largercomplex which housed 105 families. 61. COLORFUL Irecalled seeing this picture when CROWDS over 1 million people had gathered 46. HOUSE I was ushered into this home for a for a May Day celebration, INTERIOR brief explanation of the workings of the communes and watched 62. GREAT HALL but today only small groups of over by the Chairman himself. chil 'ren were to be seen these just returning from a visit to the 47. A PIG AND Outsidei./as met by some of the Great Hall of The People (seen in CHICKEN pets that will soon find their way thebackground). Thisiswhere to various commune tables. President Nixon dined.

48. FACTORY The people living here worked in 63. CHILDREN Another groupof children had commune cement factories, gathered to ... 49. SHOE BENCH plastic shoe factories, 64. WREATHES lay these wreathes at the base of the Monument of The People's 50. SHOP or in the communes' maintenance Heroes. shop. Some work on the railroad and may use this unique ...

- 55 NO. PICTURE NARRATION NO. PICTURE NARRATION

65. MONUMENT We were then led past this visual 80. A LADY But by far the most popular form WALL presentation of the triumphs of WITH CHART of medicine in China is Acupunc (music up' Mau Tse-Tung, ture an art this lady has been practicingforeightyears(and 66. RED and then to the Gate of Heavenly that's how she learnedit by BUILDING Peace and the entrance to the For- practicing) on other people. bidden City. 81. OPERATION On a more sophisticated level I 67. CHILDREN Once "off limits" to everyone ex watched this operation performed WALKING cept the elite it is now open to under Acupuncture anesthesia. everyone, the children 82. SIX DOCTORS I actuallyconversedwiththis 68. ADULTS and the peasants make their way AND A PATIENT patient, who was alert during the WALKING into the Inner Court, entireoperation, asthe doctors worked to remove the lower part 69. THRONE VIEWand theninside where they are of his stomach. shown how the Manchu emperors and the court spent the peasants' 83. A SOLDIER This man from the People's Libera- money. IN A CHAIR tionArmy(likesoldiersevery- where) had to have a tonsilectomy. 70. THE SUMMER Sevel,1 hours away from the no PALACE lunge"Forbidden" City is the em- 84. TONSIL Four needles were stuck into his perors' old Summer Palace with OPERATION face and hands ... and with no the Pavillion of The Fragrance of otheranesthesiathedoctorre- Buddha overlooking what was once moved his tonsils. a spectacular sight 85. THE SOLDIER I visited him in the ward a few 71, THE MARBLE including the Marble Boat, which IN A WARD minutes alter the surgery ... he BOAT according to our guide, was built drank a glass of milk and prepared with money intended to build a to return to his barracks and go Chinese navy. [music up) back to work.

72. FIVE GIRLS As in the other cities, there were 86. A PATIENT Acupuncture is also used to treat children but this is Peking, the IN BED nonoperable ailments. "seat of power" and there are fewer smiles... 87. ACUPUNCTURE At times the needles are attached NEEDLES tobattery operated stimulators. 73, RED ARM and there are those who proudly Other times the patients get it "in BANDS displaythe badge of the "heirs the neck". apparent" to China's, future .... (music up] the Red Guard. 88. OLD MEN Outside the hospitals people seem to do all they can to avoid medical. 74, COWS On the way from the Summer Pal- treatment. Every's% here you go, ace we visited another commune. This one dedicated to the raising of 89. YOUTHS in the morning hundreds take to cattle and the supplying of milk the streets to do their for the masses, !W. TWO IN BLUE daily exercises ... both young and 75. ICE CREW as ss ell as the. necessary ingredients music up) old. for the 800 tons of ice cream that this plant produces annually. 91. 1 HF GREAT No one should ever leave China WALL without seeing the Great Wall! 76. POPSI( LIS Andityou don't likeice (Aydin there are popsicles 180 million 92. 1111. WALL Builtin200 B.C. and stretching popsicles a year are hand wrapped (CLOSL-UP) 1,500miles(thedistancetrorn here in this factory, New York Cityto Omaha), itis just what they say itis ... a big 77, CANNING while down the sheet others work Wall PORK tosupply9,000tons offood, I music upj mostly pork. 93. GRAFFITI and like the New York subway, it CARVINGS doesn't escape the artofgraffiti ofthe No.'' 78. DENTIST The advancement ofthe practice ...this on hehall ofmedicineinChinaisnote [music. upj V ielnamcse innunt. worthy, such as this dental office serving a commune, with modern POSTER As a journalist, one aspect of China equipment. MURAL that most moved me (with some apprehension) was the ever present 79. HERB STICKS A short distance away traditional Chinese herbs (tryin preparation 9S, I OUR MTN multimedia approachtopropa- for distribution to stores through- IN BROWN ganda Seemingly, in China noall outthemainland and to many is immune. Everywhere one turns other pants ()I the world. there are posters admonishing

56 5 1 NO. PICTURE NARRATION NO. PICTURE NARRATION

96. A SIGN AND the people to unite, that we are all 108. SOLOIST & and I didn't hear the revolutionary LADDERS one under Mao regardless of PIANIST songs of Mao that I half expected our color. to hear. Rather I heard in Chinese a song that I had often sung myself 97. MILITANT Aggressorshave tobe defeated in Canada... GROUP SIGN wherever they may be. 109. DEBBIE WANGThe words came to me ... stayed 98. CHILDREN IN And painfully, the young arc set upon Jehovah hearts ore fully A ROW aside for very special attention, blessed. [Chinese gong opt HO. MAN AT I waslisteningtotheI arLast 99. TWO YOUTHS whetheritbe this revolutionary CONSOLE Broadcast ing Company broad- stage play, castingIrom Manila into China, and my spirit was lilted up... 100. CHILD or singers performing to the song DANCLRS "I 1.(111' MOO". HI. DR. LUKE and I thought ()I the %%olds out [music upj Lord, who had said / will /wild my Church and the ones 0/ /it'll 101. RADIO/T.V. andforthose who cannotbe OW/ /to( prevail nnoinst It... BUILDING reached in this way there is Radio Peking, or what k calledThe Lips 112. OLD MAN And Iknew that, %shunI stepped ()I Mao." Broadcasting not only to outside and looked into this old [music op 1 China, but around the world. man's lace, there %%as need their. and that some of these day', he 102. CHURCH Not only being a journalist, but too %%ould be listening to a ladio BUILDING more important a Christian, Issas and that need would be met. interested in finding out about the Church in China, and this vacant 113. 3 YOUNG Down the sweet away, %%cie the edifice in Peking gave me precious HEADS youths. less clues... 114. CHINESE Mao hasn't satisfiedtheirneeds. 103. CURVED and even less where to be tound in YOUTHS But I praised the brid again asI FRONT this church in Shanghai. Unused, it becameawareofthetactthat isreportedlytheonce famous I LBC isbroadcasting eachdaN Moore MemorialChurch whose Irom Manila and ChejuI oi'hest: walls one resoundedtogreat young people... hymns and messages. 115. A WOMAN and I thanked the Lord that He in 104. NARROW In the city of Canton the building WITH RADIO this the twentieth century is using CHURCH was there, the people were not... radio to help

105. CATHEDRAL the Canton Cathedral still towers 116. RADIO MAP build His Church in China ... SPIRES 160 feet into the air... I map held 10 seconds'

106. CATHEDRAL but the gates arc locked and itis 117. LISTENERS (CLOSE-UP) usedasa warehouse for storing IN A I IELD building supplies. [ ITHISIC tinder to end'

107. A GROHP But the story of the Church dues 118. BOATS SINGING not end there. While in my hotel room, in Canton, Iturned on my 11'). GROUP LISTENING music up I iadio...

-57- BIBLIOGRAPHY

A MASS COMMUNICATION PLAN FOR INDIA; Richard J. Knecht

References:

1 Daniel Lerner and Wilbur Schram, Editors, Communication and Change in the Developing Countries, (Honolulu, 1967), p. 192. 2 Ibid., p. 194. 'Radio Broadcasting Serves Rural Development, (Paris, 1965), p. 7. 4 Selden and Audrey Meneffee, A Country Weekly Proves Itself in India, Journalism Quarterly (1967), p. 116. 5 Lerner and Schramm, p. 163. 6 Wilbur Schramm, Mass Media and National Development (Stanford, 1964),p. 151. 'Ibid., p. 168. Royal D. Colle, The Indian Satellite Experiment: What Next? (unpublished paper for the VII General Assembly for the International Association for Mass Communication Research, West Germany, c3ptember 1-4, 1970), p.

1 9 Ibid., p. 1. loSig Mickelson, The First Eight Years Saturday Review (October 24, 1970), p. 23. 11 Eugene V.Rostrow, SatelliteCommunications and Educational TelevisioninLess Developed Countries (Springfield, 1969), p. 71. 12 L.P. Kammans, Satellites for Education, EBU Review (November, 1969), p. 76.

BROADCASTING IN THE PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA; Peter Graumann

References :

'Geography of China, (Peking: Foreign Languages Press, 1972), pp. 1-5. 2 Dr. Chu Chia-Hua, China's Postal and Other Communications Services, (Shanghai: China United Press, 1937), pp. 192-193. (for all figures cited) 'Ibid., p. 194. 4 Fu-wu Hou (Franklin W. Houn), To Change A Nation, (New York: Crowell-Collier Publishing Co., 1961, p. 97. Ibid., p. 155. 6lbid., p. 156. (for all figures cited in paragraph) 7 Ibid., p. 160, as cited by Houn from New China Monthly, and People's Daily. albid., p. 161. 9 Ibid. '°Alan Ping-linLiu, The Growth and Modernizing Function of Rural Radio in Communist China, Journalism Quarterly 41 (Autumn 1964), pp. 573-7. Ibid. 12 ibid.

13 Ibid. 14 Hugh Howse, The Use of Radio in China, China Quarterly 2 (April-June 1960),p. 60.

" UnitedNationsEducational,ScientificandCulturalOrganization.VlbrldRadio andTelevision(New York: United Nations. 1965). 16 Ibid.

17 Howse, Use of Radio, p. 60. 18 ldem. The Role of the , The Chinese Model : A Political, Economic and Social Survey. Werner Klatt, editor. (Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press, 1965), pp. 48-64. 19 Alan Ping-linLiu, Communications and National Integration in Communist China. (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1971). 20 Howse, Use of Radio. p. 61. 21 Liu, Communications and National Integration.pp. 575-76. 22 Frost, editor, lhbrld Radio and TV Handbook, (Hirdour, : World Radio-TV Handbook Co., 1972). 23 Liu, Communications and National Integration. 24 Ibid., p. 119. 25 Hou (Noun), To Change A Nation. p. 168. 26 Ibid., p. 170. 27 Howse, Use of Radio. p. 63. 28 U.N.E.S.C.O. Vbrld Radio and Television. 29 Liu, Communications and National Integration. 3° Frederick T.C. Yu, Persuasive Communications During the Cultural Revolution, Gazette :International Journal for Mass Communications Studies Vol. 16, Issue number 2. pp. 73-87. 31 U.N.E.S.C.O. %odd Radio and Television. 'People's Daily. (Peking), September 13, 1965. 33 Julian Schuman, How Television In China Is Growing Up, . (December 3, 1973), p. 10. 'Ibid. 35 T.V. Factbook, International TV Directory. (Washington D.C.: Television Digest Inc., 1972), p. 1066b. Schuman, How TV Is Growing Up.

31 tbid. 'Howse, Role of the Media. pp. 67-68.

39 Ibid. 40 Howse, Role of the Media. 41 George A. Codding Jr:, Broadcasting Vtithout Barriers. (The Hague, Netherlands: United Nations, 1959), pp. 46-47 and 68-69. (for all information cited in this paragraph) 42 Craig Covault, China to Launch Satcom in 'Near Future.' Aviation Illeek and Space Technology 97, (Hightstown, N.J.: McGraw-Hill Inc.,) November 27, 1972. 43 Howse, The Role of the Media.

-60 THE MULTINATIONAL CONCEPT; Noreene Khanna

References :

'Emile G. McAnany, Impact of Mass Communicationson Social and Cultural Systems: Some Reflections on the International Flow of Information, a paper for the Conference on Television and Satellites, Airlie House, Feb., 1974, p. 16.

Kaarle No rdenstreng and Tapio Varis, The Nonhomogeneity of the National State and the International Flow c` Communication, in George Gerbner, et.al., Communication Technology and Social Policy, (New York: Wiley & Sons, 1973), p. 393.

3see Wilbur Schramm, Mass Media and National Development (Stanford:Stanford University Press, 1964), p. 44, and V. Sarabhai, et.al., Application of Science and Technology to Development, Report for the United Nations Advisory Committee on the Application of Science and Technologyto Development. (cited in UNESCO, Reports and Papers on Mass Communications, No. 66, 1972,p. 23.) 4Henri Dieuzeide, Possible Uses of Satellites in Education, inUNESCO, Communication in the Space Age, (Paris: UNESCO, 1968), p. 6-4.

5 Robert Arnove, Educational Television: A Policy Critique and Guide for the Developing Countries,A Report to the Ford Foundation (Stanford University School of Education, 1973),p. 85. 6 Heather Hudson, Ph.D. Dissertation, Stanford University, 1974.

61 PART III

AMERICAN BROADCASTING PROBLEMS

5) ELECTRONIC MEDIA AS AN INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGY FOR SELF-AWARENESS AND FUTURE CHANGE

William Murry San Francisco State University

I have become increasingly aware, sometimes pain- I. Pricing and cherishing fully so, of the rapid change and complexity of life today. New alternatives arise so quicklyinmost 2. Publicly affirming areasoflife choice, that no one setof specific 3. Choosing from alternatives beliefs and behaviors could possibly answer all the choice situations now and inthe future.Ifthis is 4. Choosing alternatives alter considering con- true,it then seems important to educate students to sequences not only expect to change butto be capable of change. Stated another way, the illiterate of tomor- 5. Chnnsing freely row may not be the one who cannot read or write, 6. Acting but rather the person without the capacity to learn, unlearn, and relearn. 7. Acting with apattern,repetition or con- sistency. This paper is my attempt to help myself and others tolive with turmoil and change while contributing The emphasis is "how" to learn instead ol "what" totheevolutionofsomething moresatisfying. to learn. Understanding our values today may provide

Specifically, I wishtodifferentiate between print creative insight for living in tomorrow's world.' and electronic literacy, review some recent media researchconclusions, andfinallytointegrate the By self- awareness I mean getting inside and educating "valuesclarificationapproach"tothefeedback ow psychological and physiological screens, our selec- capacity of audio, video and biofeedback. tive perceptions. Because I am treading inside We deiense mechanisms ol humans, this strategy neces- My theoryisthatthe systematicintegrationof sitates the employment of professional psychologists, visual-electronic literacy to simulations of value con- communicators, and counselors. Professionals aware flicts 'employing the "values clarilication approach" ofthedifferencebetweenpiiniandelectronic can signiricantly increase self-awareness and one's literacy. abilityto cope with future social change. In short, the educationofthe affective mid cognitive do- mains,withthe emphasis ontheaffective,our PRINT VS. ELECTRONIC LITERACY emotions,ourfeelingsratherthanourthinking In the last third of this ceiltuiy, we stand with one intellect. foot in the age of piint and the other in the ',RIO of electronics. We dye changing from a world of piint The rationale for using nonprint Media is hosed on dominationtonee ofelectronic extension. This its unique abilityto provide immediate feedback. evolution or perhaps revoluticn in media dominance Feedback which issimultaneous withexperience accounts for vast new perceptual habits in persons. rather than fragmented, such as print. The young are especially affected because they have had greater exposure and more exclusive exposure By "value clarification approach",I am relerring to to the new electronic media. the decision-making technique developed by Louis Rath, Sidney Simon and others. The technique is in- The single medium that has most shaped the world tegrated in all branches of horndoistir, teaching. The in the lastthree centuries has keen ihe invention of seven valuing processes include. Gutenberg mass produced print. A characteristic of

1.Louis E. Rath, Merrill Hariminmd.Sidney B. Simon. Values and Tea, Ulna.

65-60' print, other than its sameness, is its sequential, linear, printed word, the educational techniques used in his and fragmented nature. One word after another, one education must make allowance for this. He is use paragraph after another, one page after another. One to and needs more than the classified information idea at a time in a logical, connected line. which the printed word gives him. This paper is an attempt to provide a response to that need. A society which receives most of its important infor- mation through print tends to think in a linear and As broadcasters we are aware that an outstanding sequential way; to build its cities this way; to con- feature of video isits ability to provide immediate struct machines which operate this way; to play feedback. Through thetelevision camera we can games, such as baseball, which happen in a sequen- lookat,into,andexploredifferentaspectsof tial,linear,and fragmentedmanner;tobuild human relationships,in-depth.McLuhan's "cool buildings this way; to arrange classrooms, schools, medium"3is low definition and its messages make and schedules in such a manner. us listen and look harder ... as a result we concen- trate more. Television's electromagnetic spectrum is I believeelectronic media areclashing with the iconic, that is, "all at once", "now", the feedback is older print medium, thus causing at least part of the simultaneous with experience, an extension of our turmoilinthe United States today. For example, nervous system, a metaphor. Through video we can electronic media are all-at-once instead of one-at-a- experience the "act of becoming" of ourselves as time.Printisfor private consumption, electronic well as other human beings and events. mediaisforlarge groups. Time and space in an electronic world are destroyed as barriers between Although young people have developedthiselec- people; involvement replaces detachment. tronic literacy, many perhaps most educators who matured before the birth of television, scarcely Repression of feelings, which is needed, learned and recognize the existence of visual-electronic literacy. valued in a literate society, fades away as a value to I believe most are still entrenched with their hook be replaced by openness in the expression of feel- bias. The significance of electronic literacy is only ingsin an electronic society.Printing emphasized beginning to be understood. "Sesame Street" and the intellect; electronics arouses the emotions. Print- the "Electric Company" are examples of one appli- ing helped create separation into nations; electronics cation ofthisliteracy. Alternative applications of unites the world into one big "global village". Print this potential seem desirable and necessary to cope createsobservers; electronicscreates participatory with social change. With thisin mind, perhaps a involvements.' briefreview of some recent media research con- clusions will provide insight. The rebellion of today's youth is not iust a passing phase.Itispartly the result of a new society less MEDIA RESEARCH dominated by print. The new electronic environ- ment demands involvement. Schools can no longer Earlier this year Jamison et al., [1974], published a be run without the students being involved in the comprehensive evaluation of The Effectiveness of actual administration. Racial or economic minorities Alternative Instructional Media. The study implied cannot be denied participationinthose decisions that experimental research and design evaluations of which shape theirlives.Religious bodies are beset ITV vs.TraditionalInstruction have held almost with criesfor greater participation. A capitalistic everythingconstantbutthe mediumitself.The system oflifeis challenged as destructive of true study concludes that: human democracy offered as more plausible in an it is plausible, though not experimentally electronic age. The new media have brought about a verified that attempts to use the distinctive new way of viewing the world.2 potential of the television medium would re- sult in more systematic findings of significant Therefore, if today's student is as much a citizen of differences between ITV and alternative forms the age of electronics and nonprint media as the of instruction.

1.Marshal McLuhan. The Galen/wig Galaxy. 2: Donald R. Gordon. The New Literary. 3. Marshal McLuhan. Understanding Media.

- 66 1 What is necessary is for us to use the television medi- significant messages. Messages through the camers of um in imaginative ways. I will suggest some ideas. selected stimuli which are carefully patterned to jolt us outofour perceptual complacency. Messages In a related area of research, a recent review of the through a camera which allow us to experience the literature on video self-confrontation by Fuller and complexity of ourselves and others. Messages through Manning [19731 indicates TV's promising potential the camera which allow learners to experience and as an instructional strategy. Video self-confrontation understand their personal values and the values of isalso known as and indexed as self-viewing and others. self-feedback. An example of videoself-confron- tationisalearner viewing behaviorsofhimself Ultimately,if we know who we are, and if we are through televisicin to ascertain discrepancies between self-actualized, secure in what we are doing, know- "real" and "ideal" images of self. ing the world around us, we can understand our anxieties and conquer the complexity oflife.In The research indicates that video self-confrontation short, we need an evolution of the human system solves educators and psychotherapists most pressing which I believe begins with the "self". Furthermore, problems: How to increase motivation and how to the cybernetics approach may teach us how to learn put the responsibility for learning into the learner's to live creatively.' own hands. A review of the literature covering 13 years, from 1960 to Spring 1973 provides a conceptu- What followsisa conceptual application of elec- alization which includes: Purposes, outcomes, subject tronic media as an instructional strategy for self- characteristics, treatments, and helper characteristics. awareness and future change. An applicationof electronicliteracyintegratedwiththeresearch Video self-confrontation increases information and conclusionsof Jamieson andFuller. A systems can provide a more total seeing of self while offering approach. the learner a more realistic image of self. The study concludes that video self-confrontation (VS-C) now This system should not he interpreted as a placebo

seems more promising than we had dared to hope and forallour problems. I am not suggestingthat more dangerous than we knew to fear. In short, VSAC machines should replace person-to-person interaction can not only motivate behavior change but has the or relationships.I am not suggesting that self-actual- positive potential to create a wholistic view of man. izationcanoccur only through machines. These On the other hand, this powerful potential can have suggestions would be absurd.I am however, siggest- equally damaging consequences in the hands of well- ing that it is the users of technology which render it

meaning, naive educators and communicators. valuable or harmful. I am advocating the use of a man-machine relationship as one diverse method of The message seems clear. The utilization of this creating greater awareness and value clarification. A potential requires knowledge, skill and sensitivity relationship which provides simulations and a testing qualities and responsibilities we accept as profession- ground for experimenting with new Ltaviors and als. What seems necessary is to integrate the unique future oriented value conflicts. potential of our media in ways which help us solve

human problems. I believethe unique feedback potential of our new media can motivate students to A CONCEPTUAL SYSTEM accept the responsibility for self-discovery and learn- oh had %WM' Power Mr (ill tie !lie us to ,cc oursrls w others see us! ing in order to cope with "overchoice" and future Hobert Burns, 1786 change. The facilities and equipment necessary to operate this system are. moderate in cost. The system re- FUTURE CHANGE quires a medium size rectangular classroom. Within theclassroom isa smallercircular room which If change is going to be one of the more stable ele- serves as a small studio. The circular studio (the ments of ourlives, we need continual significant earthisround, our solar system revolves information for decision making. Our new media in the sun a gestalt simulation) contains a simulation the hands of knowledgeable, skilled and sensitive screen and two chairs. One chair is for the learner educators and communicators can create and transfer andtheother chair isforthefacilitator,lor

1. Hubert Zettl.119741.

-67 - 9 example, a psychologist. Three vidicon cameras are The evolution of our society is increasingly inter- mountedatequaldistance aroundthecircular woven with media. The gatekeepers need to he self- studio walls. The cameras can be moved vertically actualized,emotionallyliterateaswellas highly from floor level(looking up)to the top of the skilled, knowledgeable, and sensitive. We can and I studiowall(lookingdown) by silentelectronic believe ought to employ the new media in an experi- manipulation which also controls pan and tilt move- mental and experiential course of study which facil- ments. Their images can be enlarged if desired and itates our own evolution before we accept the respon- projected onto the circular walls of the studio. All sibility of shaping the perceptions of others. This in camera movements are controlled from the control turn, implies an effective intra- and interpersonal room directing console. process.

The console also is equipped with preview monitors, a special effects generator, studio lighting controls, a INTERPERSONAL COMPONENTS film projector, a multi-track stereo audio system, and The basic interpersonal components of this system a physiological feedback system to measure cardiac are modeled and based on the research of Kagan and activity as well 3ccrine sweat activity. Cardiac ac- others at Michigan State. Their system, called Inter- tivity measures the stress on the heart while eccrine personal Process Recall is designed to stimulate self- sweat ratereveals evidenceof increased environ- discovery and awareness. Their process has been mental involvement by the individual. tested on diverse populations since 1961 and still contains asafe record with statistically significant A fourth camerais focused on the visual graphic differences. The components include: simulations, response of the biofeedback machine. Also in the stimulated recall, and physiological feedback.' control room are four Sony 3650 1/2-inch PVTR decks which record sessions and/or individual cam- The process involves a session where a student views a eras as well as make "time delays" possible The simulation film in which an actor or actress looks system can be operated by one person in simple directly at the viewer and engages the viewer in rejec- feedback sessions,or by two when advanced, in tion, pseudoacceptance, seductiveness,guilt,affec- depth feedback is desirable. In short, the hardwdre tion, etc. Most students have no difficulty becoming ofthis sytemisorientedtoprovide feedback intensely involved with the filmed "other" as they simple through complex; an opportunity to obtain a view the screen. Learners are videotaped as they are more total seeing and hearing of our consciousness. engaged in the simulation. The objective is to be able to increase significant in- formation to a self-correcting learner through elec- A recall session is conducted based primarily on the tronic extension. subjects stimulatedrecallofthe feelings he had duringthesimulation.Inaddition,physiological activityisrecorded, videotaped, and played hack TARGET AUDIENCE visually without audio to the learner as one more The first question which needs an answer is who is basis for understanding his interpersonal behavior. is the target audience for this system? I believe most The purpose of the biofeedback not to help a people could probably benefit in some way. However, subject control his physiological response, rather it this may not be practical. On second thought, I chose is to encourage him to use the physiological data to those individuals who shape public policy, spend tax better know himself. payer money, and are charged with the responsibility of protecting the public. I'm referring to the police, Kagan's basic method is complicated but practical. educators, elected officials, prison guards, etc. Again, While a subject watches a stimulus film of an actor

I determined this was probably not practical. Finally, looking directly at him, the physiological activities

I decided the target audience should be those persons of the learner's body are video recorded. A second who shape our culture and serve as catalysts for the televisioncamerarecordsthesulgectandboth continuing social evolution/revolution. They is we, images are transposed onto a videotape using a split "us", communicators. Those of us preparing to ex- tend or stretch or interpret man's senses.

1.N. Kagan & D.R. Krathwohl. Studies in Human Intent( lion: Interpersonal Process Retail .Stimulated by Videotape.

68 3 screen format. By carefully positioning the cameras, clarification.However, as the pace of change in- allthree elements are on the same videotape. One creases, the process of value clarification becomes a camera is focused on the subject and on the graph vital part of any education designed to help people of his eccrine sweat rate and heart rate. In this way, cope with "overchoice" (e.g., future shock). asplit screen videotape picture composed of the subject, the originally viewed stimulus film, and a WhatI am suggesting is that we employ visual elec- graphic iisual presentation of the subject's heart and tronicliteracy whichissimultaneous with experi- sweat activity is played back to the subject. ence to simulate imaginative value conflicts as well as simulated sequences for self-discovery and self- An added dimension ofthis basic method is the awareness,Using carefullydesigned sequences of abilitytorecordthesubject'sphysiologicalre- complex questions such asreligion, love and sex, sponses duringthe video playback. Thatis,the family, friends, drugs, materialism, race, work, aging physiological electrodes on the heart and sweat ac- and death, leisure time, school, health, etc. we may tivity are not removed from the learner as he goes be able to significantly increase the evolution of the through the recall process. In this way, the inquirer human system which I believe begins with the (apsychologist) can observe the subject's physio- "self". The objective is to master the complexity of logical behavior as he talks with the learner during life and creatively contribute to the search for a the videotape playback process. higher consciousness which is not separate from the reality of contemporary experience. [Backtrackingj...When the taping session is ended and the videotape recording is ready to be played back, a second communicator (professional or para- INTEGRATION professional?) enters the room with the subject to The technique to be used in the simulations is the conduct the recall session. This recall worker's func- "value clarification approach" I mentioned earlier. tionis to facilitate the subject's self-analysis of his The approach isintegratedinallbranchesof underlying thoughts, feelings, images, expectations, humanistic teaching. The seven valuingprocesses and general pattern of interactions during the re- include: corded session under review. The recall worker tries not to establish a new counseling relationship with 1. Prizing and cherishing t hesubject,butattemptstokeepthesubject focused solely on the feelings or content of the 2. Publicly affirming originalsession.He helpsthe subjectrelivethe 3, Choosing from alternatives original experience and encourages the subject to comment only on what then transpired.' 4. Choosing alternatives after considering con- sequences Theobjectiveisself-discovery and changingen- trenched behaviors by putting the change process 5. Choosing freely into the hand,s of the learner himself. The goal is 6. Acting increased awareness and realism, and as such, have an important contribution to make to the process 7. Acting with a pattern repetition, and con- conceptualized here. sistency

The emphasis is "how" to learn instead of "what" VALUE CONFLICTS tolearn. The approach is a structure for decision

What I would integrateintoKagan's designare making. sequences of value conflicts, Self-awareness cannot be divorcedfromfuturesocialchange,inmy During the valuing sessions of this process, when the opinion. Learners need simulated value conflicts to subject is no longer a feedback neophyte, we can encourage them to question their values or make begin to tap the unique potential of our electronic them explicity. In the past, parents have heen and toolsto give the learner aneartotalseeing and stillare very important sources of values and their hearing of self. A focused increase in information so

1.J. Archer, jr., et.al. New Method for Irecamera, and Research in1111171(117 1171Call Ii017.

- 69 64 the human system can become self-correcting. Mes- allowing the learner to seize controlofhis own sages which make thelearner aware of the com- learning by playingallthe parts:that of experi- plexity of human experience. encer, the observer, and the goal setter.In short, this process seems to have implications for a learner An important question hereis how do we show accepting responsibility for his decision making and complexitywithoutlosingaestheticandartistic actualization. I believe skill in decision making is in- control. Too much complexity without proper moti- creasingly important in an age of "overchoice" and vation is synonomous with communication noise. rapidsocialchange. Video,hen,isone way to increase complexity.

VIDEO One way isfor the camera to show the learner's AUDIO lower depths of consciousness, to observe the way Another electronic toolis to increase audio com- he behaves,his body language, his tensions. Tele- plexity.Television isvery dependent on sound. vision's iconic image can dig deep and pick up tiny Television is a sound/visual medium. Besides an im- clues.Television's talkingface can be extremely portant information source, soundhelps with powerfulifdone correctly withsensitivity.In psychological closure. Sound is also an integral pro- addition,thenaturalextensionofthetelevision ess of electronic literacy mosiac imageismultiple screens.Camera 1can focus on a close-up (CU) of the learner's face; Cam- We can begin to probe self-awareness and values and era 2 a CU of the torso; Camera 3 a CU or MS of theirdepth with multiple audiotracks. Track 1 the simulations' actress; and Camera 4 a CU of the would record the verbal response to the simulation visualgraphic response of the physiological feed- experience. Track 2 records the physiological feed- back. back of the eccrine sweat rate (one palm and the other "neutral" wrist), whichisevidenceofin During the playback we can create a video environ- creased environmental involvement by the individ- ment by shooting enlarged camera images directly ual. Track 3 records the physiological feedback of on the circular walls of our studio. The learner can cardiac activity which is stress on the heart. experience his "act of becoming" and see himself as others seehim.Different cameras shooting from Thisapplicationdiffersfrom Kagan'sinthat I various angles and difterent focal lengths can shift would audio- and video- record physiological feed- physical, psychological, and philosophical points of back whereas Kagan only video recorded the bio- view. A director does thisallthe time with his feedback.Duringstimulatedrecallplaybackof cameras and monitors. Furthermore, through elec- enlarged multiple. visual images, a learner through tronic arid videotape manipulation, multiple images stereomultipletrackaudiocanexperiencehis of videoin both "real time" and "time delayed" intensity or lack of intensity while interacting with can further increase the information theindividual value conflicts. Multiple tracks of audio will hope- receives about himself in an effort to obtain a more fully have the potentialto dig deeper within the total"seeing"(e.g.,self-image,self-identity,self- intensity of the situation, an attempt to turn the expression, etc.) for self-analysis.Its as though we direction of modern technology "inward". allow a person to step out ofhis body through electronic extension and see himself as the rest of SUMMARY the world sees him (perhaps a jolt to our perception for increased awareness of ourself). I believe this has implications for self- The objectiveisfeedback

discovery, empathy, and values. and value clarification. I believe this process, which I've described, makes it considerably easier to teach Fuller's research on VS-C clearly indicates we can learners about their feelings by allowing them liter- teach ourselves some things that others cannot teach ailytosee, hear, and study their own emotional

us, and we can learn more from ourselves or at least reactions. I believe this process also has implications from our own voices and images as from others. forself-motivation;perhaps a foothillorpeak Further, perhaps the greatest value of VS-C lies in experience?

1.Herbert Zettl.[1974).

70- A.^ If we know where our psychological and physio- responsibilityforlearningintothelearners own logical screens are at, andif we can educate these hands. This process is enhanced by video self-con- feelings, we can open them up, shift them, and frontation, according to the research of Fuller and control them while we are interacting with people. Manning. The system described integrates these con- Inthis way, we can begintoincreasingly sense cepts with the belief that self-improvement must be other people, communicate, and hopefully live more motivated from within the learner. Through VS-C I creatively in our changing social environment. allow the learner to seize control of his own learn-

ing. I providesignificant(focused)information which allows the learner to be self-correcting. This RESEARCH INTEGRATION process hopefully allows self-discovery and increased Brieflybeforeconcluding,letme integratethis awareness to become simultaneous with the experi- system with the research conclusions of Jamison ence. Learners will hopefully become conscious of and Fuller, to see ifI have followed their guidelines. change, expect to change, and be capable of change. Jamison's research on The Effectiveness of Alterna- tive Instructional Media says to use the distinctive Inaddition, I have integratedelectronic literacy potentialofthe mediums. I believetheuseof with filmed simulations of value conflicts of increas- multi-images of video can give a learner a more total ing complexity. The "value clarification approach" seeingofself.Biofeedbackandmultipleaudio providesthetechniquefordecisionmaking.In tracks provide a more total hearing of self. "Time short, it is a system designed to motivate learners to delay" video can change physical, psychological, and accept the responsibility for learning, to cope with philosophicalpoints of view. The objectiveisto "over choice", and future change. send the learner messages of selected stimuli which are carefully patterned to jolt him out of his per- In conclusion, what I have just discussed is a com- ceptual complacency. plicatedcommunication system.Itisnecessary because of the complexity of life today. The more

Together, I believe this combination of media to complex our lives become, the more complex our extend out nervous system, our consciousness;it communications must become, and the more sophis- employs our electronic literacy, our resources. The ticated we as communicators must become. The system is designed to provide simple to complex, in glue which might hold us together is some kind of depth feedback. The level or intensity of the feed- "clarified and intensified experien,,e" we can share. back depends on the learner, the motivation of his The aesthetic and artistic potential of our media can professional instructor, or the tasks involved. This help us become both more human as well as help us combination of media obviously affords immediate, clarifyourvalues.Finally,thepossibleofthis firsthand contact with both eyes and ears. To the strategy increased realism, satisfaction, and com- extent this sense of intimacy fosters acceptance, and petence may translate into truth, joy, and beauty. acceptance in turn means greater awareness of the Truth, joy, and beauty are the foundations of srof reality of our human condition, we benefit. transcendence livingatthelevelofBeing. I believe many ofusfind"livingatthe levelof Of related importance is how to motivate learners Being" a worthy goal. tobe capapbleofchange, and how to put the

-71- A COMPARATIVE ANALYSIS OFMATRIX AND DISCRETE FOUR CHANNEL DISCS

TyeI.ldonas San Francisco State University

Almost one hundred years ago Thomas A. Edison, early 1950's. With the invention of the microgroove with his invention of the phonograph, proved that disc by Peter Goldmark in 1948 and the use of fil- sound could be preserved and then played back at lerless vinyl as the material for the disc. Background any later time. The principle on which his phono- noise and distortion was greatly suppressed and high graph worked was that grooves with a configuration frequency signals could be cut into the disc.'By corresponding directly to a sound could be cut into thenengineershaddevelopedequipment which a tinfoil sheath wrapped around a rotating metal could record and reproduce a uniform frequency cylinder. The grooves were cut with a needle which response fnr the entire audible spectrum (20 Hz to was attached to a diaphragm that vibrated when it 20,000 Hz), almost completely eliminate distortion was hit by the pressure waves of a sound. Each and greatly increase the signal to noise ratio. With sound was then etched into the foil as a unique in- these advances, high fidelity became the rage of the dentation which was the mechanical representation late '50's and now, up to date equipment is almost of this sound. To playback the recorded sound the all high fidelity. process was reversed.' As with just about anything new, the fancy weals There were no electrical or electronic components off aftera while and the engineers were not sat- involved to create electronit signals, amplify them, isfied with just reproducing sound that had great and make them drive speakers as with today's sys- tone andlittledistortion. Eventhough the repro- tems, soit was a totally mechanical operation and duced sound was highfidelity,it was stillbeing obviously, the reproduced sound was at best iden- processedinone channel or monophonic sound tifiable, but by no means accurate. Edison made the Becauseoftechnicallimitationsallthe recorded initial breakthrough and since then countless men sound was combined into one signal and it was this have been involvedinthe struggleto reproduce solitary signal that was reproduced in the hi fi sys- sound as it would be heard originally. tem. Essentially allthe sound came from one soot andthis madeitunnatural, becauserealsound The crude tin foil and metal cylinder was replaced originatesfrom aninfinite numherofspotskill by a wax coated cardboard onf-2 whiGh ill-turn was around the listener. It was the engineers' contention replaced by the flat disc format which is still used that it different sounds could he recorded separately today. The materials used in the discs evolved from andtheircorrespondingelectronicsignalskepi early shellac and clay mixtures to the present day separatethroughreproduction,then more reality fine grade polyvinyl chloride discs used in very high would be achieved by creating the spacial effect of fidelity recording:2 Though the shape and materials breadth.VVorkiiiiiwills!IN()separate signalsthey have changed, the principle remains the same for were able tocreate stereophonic sound, an ]hill creating a record. system which has a distinctleft and right channel whichenablesthelistenertodistinguish sound Inthe paramount struggle of wain] engineersto sources originating at the leftorright side of the create a reproduced sound which is as the original listening area. two major factors must he considered. These are high fidelity reproduction and the re-creation of the Stereo got off to a slow start because of piolilems space in which the original sound was made. The involving cross talk between channels, synchroniza- problem Of high fidelity was virtually solved by the tion of the two channels tin-line heads \Nero nut yet 1. The World Book of Encyclopedia. Vol. XV, pp. 362.-363. 2. The Way Things Work. Vol. 1, p. 318. invented and stereo was recorded by using two stag- in which this contestisbeing held, such as FM gered heads), simulated stereo produced by a mul- broadcasting and recording techniques, will not be titudeof less-than-above board manufacturers who discussed...but will he mentioned as corallary relied on phase shifting and psychoacoustics to ped- information. dle their inferior product, and the buying public's reluctancetoinvesta considerable amountof money in a system that was not perfected. But as HOW STEREO DISCS ARE MADE new techniques of recording developed and space When records were being made monophoniCally the age electronics precluded high costs, stereo ran away grooves were cut to impose a lateral motion to the with the field of audio systems. By the late 1960's stylus which tracked it. Comparatively large, spheri- nearly allpublic consumer audio equipment manu- calstyli were used and they tracked heavily in the factured was in stereo. groove. Their side to side motion created a potential difference between the magnets in the pickup car- After the initial excitement of the new stereo sound tridge thus coverting mechanical vibrations into elec- wore off (complete with the demonstration record- trical impulses. These electrical signals then traveled ings of Ping-Pong matches and jet airliners taking off) through the electronic hardware of the system to be there came the realization that sound does not come amplified enough to drive the system's speakers.' from just the left and right side in front of the lis- tener. The problem of capturing the elusive reality in With the development of stereo, the groove cutting of sound reproduction led to the development of qua- a disc was done by a new technique which utilized draphonicsound which madeitsappearancein two 90° displaced axes. This created two distinct sides 1969. With quad there is now even a greater prob- of the groove at 90° angles to each other and 45° lemtodeal with and because ofitthe audio in- angles to the surface of the disc.I he groove configur- dustry isin the middle of a heated battle to decide ationinthis setup caused the stylus to move both which of the two proposals of 4-channel sound will laterally and vertically. Each side of this groove car- be accepted as the standard. ries one channel, the right channel on the outer side of the groove and the left channel on the inner side. The two formats, matrix and discrete, each obtrude The lateral and vertical movements of the stylus are on the standard modes of broadcasting and record- independent of each other so that the up and down ing.Each also have inherent advantages anddis- motion of one side of the groove containing inform, advantages in relation to these modes, but in order tionfor one channel will not he affected hy the togainwidespread acceptance (nottomention movement carrying information for the other chan- governmentalconsent)the formats must possess nel. Niue the two rhannuk it:Milirl separate.' How- these four essential qualities: ever to achieve stereo separation is not as easy as the mechanical description given above. 1. Discreteness

2. Computability Stereo signals are the result of the itlbegraic addition of the SlIFT1 signals (1. + R) 111(1111(1 difference signals 3. Economy - R). The sum signals are contained in the lateral configurationof.the groove while the difference 4. High fidelity signals are in the vertical configuration. Although the side to side and up i111(1 (100.1(1 (11(111(111 of eil1;11 side of Both sidesofthe "matrix vs. discrete" 4channel the ()come r, iiidependent, the signals produced hy battle are going all out to meet the requirements.' Pitch are corielitted aild with the use ul electronic signal inverters, algebraically added In result in the In this report only the iireas of matrix and discrete elunination of the right signal in the left channel and 4channel record discs will be discussed. Other WE'S vice versa."

1. Hans F antel., The True S:Jund of Music, pp. 19-27. 2. Ken Sessions. Four Channel Stereo from Source to Sound, p. 87. 3.Ibid., p. 77. 4, The Way Things Work, Vol. 1, p. 318. 5. Torcryner, Jerome. Interview with, April 23, 1974.

3 .74 Since a record groove has two sides, it was no great recorded tracks into one channel of an audio mixer problem to place information for one stereo channel and selectively adjusts the proportions of each input on one wall of the groove and information for the on a percentage basis (level control). He does this other stereo channel on the other wall. At one point untilhehasfour channels representing as much in the development of the stereo disc it was proposed separation as he wants, and can get, with the equip- to use a subcarrier of high frequency to carry the ment he is using. He can, for example, incorporate distinctive stereo creating difference information. But what willbecome theleftrearchannelby because of the discs' readymade two walls, this Idea apportioning 60% of the sound recorded in the left was obviated and all but totally forgotten.' rear areaofthe studio, 20% from adjacent areas (leftfront and rightrear) and 20% of thetotal In4-channeldiscsthe seemingly insurmountable sound of the studio picked up in the left rear area. problem was how could four separate signals be put The separation of the four channels also depends to intoa two walled groove and be picked up by a a great extent on the manner in which the music single laterally/vertically moving stylus to be repro- was recorded,i.e.,the types and set up ofthe duced as four separate signals? Certainly it may be microphonesused;baffleefficiency and arrange- possible to create a disc with a square hole spiralling ment; acoustical characteristics of the studio; arid through it with one channel on each side and then the inherent characteristicsof the type of music snake a 4-stylis pick up through it, but this would itself symphnny, rnck band, folk, etc. not meet the compatability requirement nor proba- blythe economy requirement.So the problem When the engineer has the four signals he wants he remainedto put four channels into a two sided will feed them into a matrix encoder, which delays groove that won't cost anymore and can be played the signals of some tracks (phase shifting) and pro on any equipment available today. vides the summation and differencing of the signals necessary to be able to extract the encoded signal Both matrix and discrete engineers have developed later. The matrixing resultsin two encoded stereo ways of accomplishing this feat, each by manipula- signals which are cut into the disc in a 45-45 format. ting the stereo groove without changingitsbasic configuration.Butthereishardly anyrelation In playing back the record the effect of the phase between the ways the two sides do it. shifting set down in the recording is what will pro- duce the rear information needed to achieve four We'lllookatthe matrix methodfirst,then the channel sound. Because of the time lag initiated by discrete approach, and finally discuss the relative shifting the phase of the signals while encoding, the merits and drawbacks of each. recordiscut with one side of the grove slightly ahead ofthe other side (see Diagram 1). As the stylustracksthe groove,thisleading/laggingrela- MATRIX FOUR CHANNEL DISCS tionship between the two groove walls will cause Matrix 4-channel sound is achieved by encoding the thestylustotwist and respond with ahelical four quadraphonic signals (left front, left rear, right motion. Clockwise helical motion contains loft -rear front, and right rear) into two signals at the source information andthecounterclockwisehelical and decoding the two signals into the original four motion contains right rear information (see Diagram at the receiving end.' 2.). These helical vibrations are coupled with the lateral and vertical motion of the stylus (carrying Becausematrixinginvolvesphase (almost synon- the sum informationfortheleft and right front ymous with time) shifting and level control of the channels) and detected by the electronic decoder channels, the first important step in getting sound hardware in the system which directs it to the respec- down on a record disc takes place in the sound lab tive rear channel speakers.' ofthe recordirg studio where the recording engi- neer's skill in mixing the music can affect the final What allthis amounts toisin spite ofallthis outcome ofthe disc. The engineer feedsallthe electronic engineering legerdemain is that there are

1. Ken Sessions. Four Channel Stereo from Source to Source, p. 80, 2.Ibid., p. 77. 3.Ibid., pp. 92-95.

75 - 6 D X

00000000000000 0000000000000

2 4 >- H

3

This diagram shows the route that the signals take when a matrix disc is processed. Inputs from the music source are fed into audio mixers (1) and mixed down to 16 signals which are recorded on a 16 track tape deck (2). The recorded signals are then fed to Audio mixers which the engineer manipulates to get four channels. This mixer is (3). The next stop is the four channel matrix encoder (4) where the four signals are encoded to two which are imparted to the record disc cutter (5) to he cut as a stereo record.'

1

1. Ken Sessions, Four Channel Stereo, p. 92.

-77- 0 Record Groove Movement

Groove walls

This diagram shows a view of a record groove looking down from the top. In sketch A, the bottom side of the groove lifts the stylus, which falls toward the other side and drops, to be lifted again by the lOwer side. This results in a counter-clockwise helical motion. In sketch B, the upper groove wall's modulation leads the lower wall, and the result is clockwise helical motion.'

1. Ken Sessions, Four Channel Stereo, p 95.

- 79- 7 1 stillonlytwobasicchannels. When thereis a On a discrete disc the sum signals (LF + LR) for the combiningofthe channels due tothe sinusoidal left and (RF + RR) for the right are cut into the additionofthe signals from the orthogonal and discinstandardlateralandverticalorthogonal helical movement of the stylus, there is a resultant of motions. The difference information (LE - LR and greater amplitudeforin-phasesignalsthanfor RF - RR), which accounts for the rear information, out-of-phase signals. Logic circuits detecting this level are used to modulate two 30 kHz subcarrier waves, difference immediately suppress the lower level signal one cut into each side of the groove. With this coding and direct the higher level signal to the rear speakers. system the four quadraphonic signals remain sepa- It is a teeter-totter effect because the logic circuits are rate.4This is called the CD 4 system, C for com- simply automatic gain control amplifiers that are patability, D for discrete, and 4 for four channel. (See going to send information to wherever they detect Diagram 3.) thereis not enough.If the signals are in phase a predominant sound will appear to come from only Some special equipment is needed in order to play one of the speakers, and with a multitude of complex back a discrete four channel disc and get discrete four signals constantly going in and out of phase in a channel. Since the rear channel signals modulate a matterofmicroseconds coupled withthe subcarrier, a demodulator must be added to the play- psychoacoustics of human hearing a good matrix back system. The function of the demodulator is to system will give a believable illusion of four channel recover the modulated FM subcarrier and obtain the sound.' Stillif seen on a scope and measured the difference signals which are then sent separately separation comes no better than 6 db, an almost through the electronic hardware to their respective non-competitive figure when placed against discrete's rear speakers.4It can be seen now that throughout 35 db separation.2 the entire process of the CD 4 system all the quadra- phonic channel signals are kept separate.

Because this method involves a high frequency sub- DISCRETE FOUR CHANNEL DISCS carrier, conventional stereo styli cannot be used to CD-4 SYSTEM get discrete four channel. An elliptical stereo stylus Inmaking adiscrete four channel disc the only has an effective frequency range up to about 20 kHz. similarity with the matrix system is that the groove is By the time it picks up a 30 kHz signal its level has cut in the same manner as the stereo disc using the dropped so drastically that it is virtually not respond- 45-45 format.This cuttingprocessmustbe ing at all. Japan Victor Company (JVC) developed a maintainedto ensure compatability as mentioned completely new stylus called the Shibata to he used before. The unique feature which makes it possible to with the CD 4 system. The Shihata stylus' design put four separe channels into a two sided groove is (see Diagram 4.) enables it to detect frequencing up the coding system used. Someone did not completely to 50 kHz' which is even greater than the carrier forget the idea that a high frequency sub-carrier wave frequency,- without suffering an appreciable loss in could be used to carry the extra information of the the level or an increase of adjacent channel pickup. rear channels. This principle of using sub-carriers is used in FM stereo transmission.' Although the Shibata stylus has to track at roughly twice the weight of the conventional elliptical stylus, As mentioned in thf: section on how a stereo disc was its design allows itto sit deeper in the groove and made, the stereo signals were the result of the alge- contact more surface area thus distributing this extra braic audition of the sum and difference signals which tracking weight in a way that exerts nc more pressure

resultedinaleft and right channel. Discrete four or CdUSOS no more wear on the groove of'd stereo channel, inthis respect,is merely an expansion of record than the elliptical stylus. Fin thennore, itis this. Only now there are two more signals to he plug- fully compatable with stereo records, and infact, ged into the formula (right- and left-rear). But the makes stereo records sound better hecause it can mathematics still holds true. more readily detect high frequent:Ms than the ellip-

1.Friedman, Herb. Here's Looking at Jour Channel Mauls Sound, p. 65. 2. Torceyner, Jerome. An interview with. 3.Idonas Tye, J. Basic Principles of Four Channel Broachasting Using the Doran Quadruples System. 4. Sensei, Shinri. Get the Facts About CD-I, Elementary Electronics, p. 47. 5. O'Keefe, Gerald. A Fully Integrated CD-4 Disc Demodulation System and Preamplifier.

7 281 Sound Groove CD-4 Disc

15kHz 30kHz 0 15kHz 30kHz

Sound Groove

Left

Right Channel

0 15kHz 0 15K.Hz

The diagram shows the manner in which a high frequency suh-carrier is used to carry rear channel information on a CD-4 disc compared to a standard stereo disc.'

1. Shinri Sansei, Elementary Electronics, July-August 1973, p. 47.

2. Ibid, p. 47.

-83 Shibata Elliptical

This diagram shows the design of the Shibata stylus as compared with a conventional elliptical stylus.'

1. Ken Sessions, Four Channel Stereo, pp. 82-84.

-85- 7 +5 Shibata

0 -'------v---'--, 5- Frequency response

Elliptical 10

15_

20 Elliptical------P 25 Adjacent channel 30 pick up ---) Shibata 35; I i

10 100 1000 10K 50K

Frequency

This diagram shows a comparison of performance between the Shibata and the elliptical styli. Note the relative smoothness of the Shibata stylus compared tothe elliptical stylusinthe frequencies above 10 kFlr.1

I. Ken Sessions, Four Channel Stereo, p. 85.

-87- tical stylus and since it sits deeper in the groove it system to prove its worth to become the accepted does not allow the record ruining build up of dust.' standard includes discreteness, compatability, econ- omy, and high fidelity. The following is a compari- son to show how these systems measure up to these COMPARISON OF THE MATRIX AND qualities. A scale from 1 (lowest) to 10 (highest) DISCRETE DISCS follows each section. These grades were assigned by A recap of the four essential qualities needed by each me after listening.

DISCRETENESS The amount of channel separation achieved by the system with regard to the independence of one channel from the other three and the pattern in which the surround sound is formed.

MATRIX DISCRETE Matrix is unable to provide total Indiscretefourindependent separation of channels. Thisis channels are kept sepeate from attributedtotheencodingof theirsourcetoreproduction. lourchannelsintotwo.Tests Channel separationon CD 4 have shown the maximum separa- di5 LS havebeenmeasuredto tionachievedtobe6-8 db. 35 db, virtually 100% as heard by Because phase shifting and level humans. A spherical patternof control are used there arc only surround sound is formed. two basic channels. The rear in- formation is an illusion because of phasing and leveldifferences in other channels. There are many -10- patterns depending on the matrix- ing method used, but all have gaps from which no sound originates. - 6 -

COMPATABILITY The ability for a system to be used with existing equipment under current standards prescribed by government regulating agencies throughout the world.

MATRIX MATRIX DISCRETE

ully compatable. Fullycompatableit a de- -10- modulator is used. 10

1. Ken Sessions, Four Channel Stereo, pp. 82-84.

89 - 6 ECONOMY The system must not incur any excessive expenseon the buyer and be at a price comparable to equally efficient existing equipment.

MATRIX DISCRETE Matrix involves the need for a Discrete needs rear channel amps, decoder, rear channel amps and demodulator, four channelcar- two extra speakers if converting tridgeandstylus,twoextra from stereo to quad. Existing FM speakers and CD 4 discs for pro- stereo stations need no modifica- gram material if converting from a tion to play matrix discs. stereo system. Present quad sys- -10- tems will require the demodulator and tour channel cartridge and stylus and CD- 4 discs as program material. FM stereo stations will incur a considerable expense to get a tourchannelgenerator, CD 4 discs,four channel tape decks and tapes, double the minor equipment (mikes, controls, etc.) and four channel cartridges and styli. -7-

HIGH FIDELITY The systems must meet the current standards set by the audio industry for high fidelity with regard to uniform frequency response for the 20-20,000 Hzrange, minimum distortion, a tenable increase in the signal-to-noise ration, and low noise.

MATRIX DISCRETE Meets the standards Meets the standards -10- -10-

In adding up the scores I have given each system the scene an artificiallook. I thinkthisis what the totals are: happens when we hear Discrete.(CD-4),hence it has a sound that is a bit artificial. Matrix ... +36 Discrete ... +37 Technology may ultimately condition the minds of This is very close but the most important criterion the masses to respond to reality and artificial reality was not mentioned and thatisthe reality of the as oneinthe same, but untilthat happens we sound produced by each. After having listened to should sit back and listen to the music of Discrete countless hours of each format as part of the re- four channel not with a critical ear, but to enjoy search for other papers I have written on the sub- the newest, and to date, the most realistic repro- ject,I would give a +9 rating to Matrix and a +3 duced sound man has ever heard. rating to Discrete.

I feelmatrix hasfallen short in reproducing this In spite of its commendable characteristics Discrete realistic sound, but technology is constantly advan- four channel soundis still not like reality. There cing and the day will come when Matrix will inn seems to be a psychological illusion ingrained in the neck and neck with Discrete. It's not impossible mind of the listener. This is analogous to seeing in afterall, 's technology did the im- three dimensions naturally and experiencing a shar- possible almost a hundred years ago, and that was pening of this subliminal perception when we look just the first step. into a stereoscope viewer. The closed system gives

-90. y BASIC PRINCIPLES OF FOUR CHANNEL FM BROADCASTING USING THE DORREN QUADRAPLEX SYSTEM

Tye J. Idonas San r rancisco State University

Popular acceptance of any basic engineering development usually dictates from the standpoint of progress and financial return that the initial concept be broadened to include whatever is technically and economically feasible. 1

Broadcastingisnoexpection.Fromtheinitial In1969 a young Sari Francisco man named Lou development of transmitting messages and music over Dorren tackled the problem of broadcasting discrete the airwaves to the present day sophistication of high four channel sound. Dorrenfeltthatthe matrix fidelity, stereo, and multiplex broadcasting, achieving approach was not producing true four channel sound greater realism in reproducing sound has been the and thatit was "merely a clever advertising stunt struggle and victory of many men. Recently, a new perpetrated by mercenary manufacturers to bilk an concept, one which expands the left and right spatial enthusiastic four channel bound public of millions of illusionof stereo to one of all-around space and dollars."4 The big obstacle was to devise a system reality, has been driving headlong into the forefront which could maintain the current high standards of of sophisticated sound reproduction. Thisisfour the government licensing agencies throughoutthe channel quadraphonic sound. world total compatability with existing equipment; unqualifieddirectionalityaridchannel separation; This new audio system is following the premise of reproduction ofthe 50 Hz5 to 15,000 Hz audio broadening the concept by entering broadcasting via frequency range for all channels; minimum distortion FM transmission. However, quad is currently in the and channeltochannel crosstalk; and atenable middle of an intra-industry battle to determine which increasein thesignal-to-noiseration. 6Dorren format of four channel soundisbetter and why. approached the problem from a compatability angle, There are two proponents in this battle, those who which otherproposals tendedtoignore, and he favor the extensive use of matrixing (combining the contended that the of an FM signal was four quad signals at the source and then separating sufficient to allow transmission of lour discrete and them at the receiving end) and those who advocate compatable signals.His plan wasto expand the thediscrete approach(keepingthefour signals present stereo system separate from the origintotheir reproduction).2 Matrixfourchannel isideallysuitedforFM In FM broadcasting the amplitude of the transmitted transmission becauseitrequiresvirtuallyno wave is kept constant and the frequency of the wave modificationto existing equipment.Itis done by is varied (modulated) in accordance with the message simplyplaying stereorecordsthathavebeen information which is the electronic signal equivilant previously encoded by one of the existing matrixing tothephysicalfluctuationsofsound.'The methods.3 But because discrete is dealing with lour complexity of the information waves results inthe completely separate channels, there has been more need for a composite wave to carry the message. This difficulty in devising a system which could broadcast isachieved bymodulatingthecarrierwaves it without making major equipment changes at the containi..g me information with the utilization nl transmitting station. sideband frequencies. In the receiver the carrier wave

I.Louis Dun en and lames I. Gibbose,TheDome; Quadruples System ol / our Channel / M lirouelcustioq." 2. Tye I. Idonas, "AComparative Analysis of AIWA and Discrete I our Channel Discs." 3. Ken Sessions, Four Channel Stereo From Soirce to Sound, p. 126. 4.Louis Dorren and Limes I. Gabbert,"71w Dorren Qoudraplm. System",p. 13. 6. Hi (him) is the accepted symbol in the audio industry lor cycles pei second. It mas named in hone,' ol the German physicist Heinrich Hort/. 6.Louis Dorren and lames I. Gabbert,"The Dorren Quadruples System",p. 2. 7, Ken Sessions, Four Channel Stereo, p. 126. 8, Frederick Emmons Termon, Electronic and Radio Engineering, p. 4.

-91- 7,43 and the information init are separated. The carrier sum of allfour signals (LF + LR + RF + RR). The wave is dissipated while the message travels through equivalent of the stereo subchannel in quadraphonic the electronic hardware to be reproduced as audible broadcasting is called the "quadrature" channel and it soundinthe speaker.1However,the theoretical is made up of two distinct carriers at 38 kHz. The maximum of side bands cannot be employed by an first of these carriers holds the information for the individual channel because an adequate frequency leftfrontandrearchannelsminustheright margin must be ma;ntainedtoprevent crosstalk information (LF + LR- RF - RR), and the other between adjacent channels.' Dorren said that the FM carries the information for the right front and rear bandwidth was wide enough to accommodate the channelsminustheleftinformation (LF - LR - four separate signals used in quad.3 RF + RR). Still one more subchannel is required for four channelbroadcasting.Thisiscalledthe

To betterunderstandDorren'sproposal,let us "quadraphonic" subchannel, located at 76 kHz, and examine how stereo is broadcast by the use of carrier this carrier signal is modulated by the difference of all waves and multiplexing. Discrete stereo implies the the signals (LF - LR + RF Rn).6' 7 total and continuous separation of two signals from their origin to their reproduction, but to transmit two Thissetupistotally compatable with existing separate signals would require two transmitters and monophonic and stereo receivers (refer to Diagram two receivers and would be inordinately costly and 1.). Mono receivers will detect only the main channel technically complex. Instead, a pilot carrier signal is (sum of all the signals) and therefore reproduce all used upon which more than one signalcan be theinformationitcontains. The stereoreceiver transmitted. discriminator will detect the 38 kHz subcarrier and will extract both the sum and difference signals which Stereo is comprised of two signals which are the sum will result in stereo. A quad receiver, built to detect of the left and right information (1 r R) and the the"quadraphonic" subchannel,willextractthe difference of the right and left information (L - R). entire difference signal which added to the previously This difference information can be carried by a mentioned main and subchannel signals will result in 38 kHz subcarrier wave simultaneously with the pilot discrete four channel sound. 8 carrier which carries the sum information. When the waves reach the stereo receiver the subcarrier signal is DIAGRAM 1. detected by a discriminator built into the unit and the difference signal is extracted. The algebraic SUM 100% of the two signals results in a left signal and a right signal, hence stereo!' Main channel Ouadrlture sub-ch nnel Basicallythis istheideabehindLou Dorren's LF +1...F4+ Quadriphonic LF+LF4tF4F-RR sub-ch nnel quadraplexb system. But it goes several steps further F-IF +RR anld by including not just left arid right information, L LF -LR-rtF+RF-1 LF-LF-41-F4F-RR also front and rear information. 0% In stereo broadcasting the sum (L + R) signal is called 0 15 13 23 38 53 61 16 91 the main channel and the difference (LR) signal is frequency (IcHi) called the subchannel. With the introduction of left and rightrear signals in quadraphonic sound, the Ilw spectrum of the Dorren Quadiaphonic Signal.- equations are expanded. Now the main channel is the

I,Interview with Melvin I:. O'Boyle, Systron-Donner Collimation, Concord, California, 25 April 1974. 2.The Way Things Work, v.)I. 2: p. 534. 3. Louis Dorren and lames I. Gabbert, The Dorren Quadruples Svstetn, p. 3. 4.Interview with Jerome Torciyner, Quadiacast Systems, Inc., San Mateo, California, 23 April 1974. 5. Quadraplcx is the term which has been accepted by the audio industry to refer to discrete low channel broadcasting. 6. The resulting Algebraic sums meobtained when consideration is made for the electronic inverters built into transmitters and receivers. These considerations are beyond the scope of this papei. 7.Louis Dorren, Dorren Quudruplex System: Laboratory and Field Tests, p. 3 8.Interview with Jerome Torc/yner. 9.Louis Dorren and Jerome Torc/yner, European Broadcasting Union Review, 138 (April 1973): 4.

- 92- 7 9 FM quadraolexbroadcastingiscurrentlyinthe At QuadracastSystems,Inc.,inSanMateo, testingstages andisnot availabletotheradio California, where Dorren is research director, work audience. The nationaltestcenterislocatedat has continued to satisfy allthe objections of the KI01-FM (a 150,000 watt station) in San Francisco. industry. As of this writing, the Dorren system is James J.Gabbert, President ofPacific FM, Inc., undergoinganother seriesoftestsatKI01, the which owns KI01, applied for, and was granted, a content of which is confidential, and the results are Station Temporary Authorization from the Federal expected to lead to the beginning of quadraphonic Communications Commission. During a two month broadcasting at the end of the summer.2 test beginning in January 1971, KI01 broadcasted test signals and a large percentage of music from four Quadraphonic broadcasting is making headway and channel tapes at selected times using the Darren much ofthe creditis due to Lou Dorren, who Quadraplex System.Inconjunction withthe transcended the conventional way of thinking in the computer laboratory, at nearby Stanford University, industry, openly fought the proponents of matrix a 20,000 page computer study was compiled on the four channel at industry conventions, and moved results of these exhaustive tests, which also included ahead withhisassociatesto make discrete four listener reaction. The results proved that the Dorren channel broadcasting a reality. Quadraplex System performed in accordance with all of its theoretical expectations. Subsequently, Pacific FM submitted a petition for rule making to the FCC that would permit four channel broadcasting under this system. Within four days the FCC responded, an action which usually takes sixto nine months.' Obviously they were impressed.

1.Louis Dorren and lames J. Gabbert, The Dorren Quadruple), System, p. 16. 2.Interview with Lou Dorren, Quadracast Systems, Inc., San Mateo, California, 18 April 1974.

-93- TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND SOCIAL IMPACT

Joan McKenna President, Quantum Communications Palo Alto

When we speak of technology, most of us have a of unprecedented changes in our lives and in the mental image of gadgets, wires, hardware...all the fabric of our society in future years. machines that we see around us in industry, business, and the home. Yet the true definition of technology Foretelling the future is a risky business, to say the approach, encompasses much more. Technology is the totality least. We favor,instead, a heuristic' ofthe means employed toprovide objects and attempting to give the mosaic patterns of cause and services for human sustenance and comfort. To a effectsbecoming visible. These may be helpful, society,therefore,technologyrepresentsthe nonetheless, since we must plan in anticipation if we methods; processes; institutions; and products in use aretoseethegreatestbenefits fromthe or availai_ile to its citizens. communications technologies.

What we, as citizens, see in our gadgets and devices is Keen interest has developed in the vast potential of but a small part of a broader, changing, interactive bidirectionaltelevision,especiallyinthe areas of network ofprocessesandproducts,andmost information and dataservices.Technological importantly, people. As new processes develop, new developersenvisionunprecedented servicesinan products become usable and the type, definition and almost awesome array. Vision precedes realization, level of human skill is affected. A single technology however. Feasibility, from the financial end, depends pyramidsitsprocesses andproductsonother in large measure on the market for such services. No technologies. A smallchangeinoneareaof simple precedent exists to indicate whether the public production, service or materials can have wide scale will find the costs, systems of services or content of ramificationsonthesociety,thelife,andthe services valuable or even attractive. livelihoods of its citizens. To developrealisticguidelines for evaluating the The nerve systems of the society critical toits feasibility of the new technologies and services of functioning and affecting every process, institution cable, we must look to the broader patterns of and person are the communications technologies, technological andservicedevelopment within the human andhardware systemsthatenable contemporary society. By doing so, perhaps we shall informationto flow between people, institutions, find a continuum from which to see our present and government everyone. Changes and developments choose our future. in communication technologies have, as a result, the broadest, most forceful and most far-reaching impact There are many areas and many questions which we upon the society and all other technologies within it. do not address here. We seek to identify a perspective from which toview the growthof The impact or potential impact of communication telecommunications in this society. services is our concern here. Bidirectional (two-way) information systems will become available to major Following the patterns of the industrial revolutions portions of our population within a decade. The that have taken place throughout theworld, wealth public understanding of these new developments and (a concentrationof power) accumulates when an theservices which arepossible through them is individualor group successfully extends goods or criticalto every citizen. Development of the new servicesto more people.Universal "needs" of a systems and services indicate far greater consequences society forits well-being and the well-being of its

1.heuristic:serving to guide, discover or reveal; valuable for empirical research but unproved or incapable of proof.

-95- citizenscreateutilities,orconcentratepower goods and services needed to manufacture and deliver otherwise in "sole source" relationships. The latter the new product or service; Second cycle the include monopolies, franchises and proprietary rights activitiesofthe secondary markets stimulate yet over materials or services a pattern encompassing more informationflowtothepublicandto the traditional "utilities", and extending to include developers; awareness creates a yet greater demand in smallprivateenterprisessuchas neighborhood the primary market; the original products or services grocery and retail stores four or more blocks from are diversified to meet "special demands"; secondary supermarketsordiscountretailers.Theelderly, markets are again stimulated and the cycle continues mothers with young children, or people living inan until "saturation", i.e., when the public market will areawithoutreasonabletransportation become notsupportadditionaldiversificationor volume dependent onthe smalldistributorsintheir production. neighborhoods. "Costs" of goodsorservices are relative,therefore,totheprocessinvolvedin Those familiar with the advertising industries will acquiringoraccessing anitem. Convenience and recognize the marketing and distribution patterns of availability become critical to effective marketing. new product development in this scenario. Yet, we wish to emphasize that the patterns hold true for Astheindustrialrevolutioncontinues,the social and political ideas, issues, and actions and does technologicalcapacityofthesocietyexpands. not apply only to commercial production. Industrial Greater variety and volume of goods and services expansion will seek the means of developing new become available. The "needs" of the society likewise markets. Yet, government, as a form of corporate change. The definition of "needs" extends more and activity requiring that demands and "needs" of the more tothetotallyavailable goods and services society befulfilled,isnot an exception to the within the society. pattern.

Inadditiontogreateravailabilityof goods and Government investsin both the development and services, public awareness of the goods and services availabilityofsocial,economic, andpolitical must be present. The emphasis on education and mass "services" meeting the new "needs" of the public. media in the last thirty years in the United States has enabledthe population to develop not only an Thetransferofinformation iscriticaltothe awareness of the range of goods and services available development ofallpresent and future goods and throughoutthesociety,butalsotorecognize services,sincemajordecisionsas to"market", discrepancies in the availability of and access to these "costs",and"supplies"must be basedupon ruStiurces. information, the communications content. The role ofcommunicationstechnologies,the scope and Socialunrestisthe common euphemism for the availabilityof communications services,and the frustration,anger,aridinjusticecausedbythe diversity of communications content affects every knowledge of discrepancies, and the implications of stage of production and supply in all services and "selectiveavailability"onsocialandeconomic industries. Developing nations, as an example, invest classes. heavilyintheir communications capabilities. They have discovered that communications development Twn aspects emerge. people place an increasing value precedes economic and social development of the on knowing what the society has available in order to population. determinetheirrights andstatus, and demands increase fur access to resources and services on a The communications and telecommunications universal basis. technologies, as the means of making information concerning the rights, privileges, services, and goods Moreneeds" are defined as information concerning available to the largest number of people, has by services and goods spreads, and more "utilities" are our definition of such a "utility" nature, since it formedto address the new demands. The actual serves as the means of greatest service. With the patternisthen.First cycle information creates increased public demand for information of available awareness, awareness creates demand(primary goods and services, attention has returned again and market); demand creates secondary markets for the againtothecommunicationstechnologies. The inevitable result of this renewed attention has been Once it becomes known that new technology will be increased public awareness of existing "information able to deliver a means of making information, goods industries", servicepotentials, and the impact of or services available to a larger number of people, the communications technologies onthesocial, technologies that will be supplanted demand that economic, and political decision making processes. theirrights be protected. They willuse the new technology first ifit extends their exisitng systems, A greater demand results for information directly markets and self-interests, and oppose it wherever it concerning the communications industries and their threatens their "monopoly" on the market. capabilities. Withthis"market" beingserved, additional demands willdevelopforaccessto Pressure fromtheexistingtechnologiesforces information about specific areas of social, economic, regulation andlegallimitationsonthe new orpolitical concern. These demands, in turn, will technology. These regulations serve to impede the stimulatethe developmentof communications development and expansion of the new technology hardware and services (secondary markets), ramifying unless the demand for goods and services is greater again until saturation is achieved. than what the existing technology can meet. We can see examples of this in UHF television, for instance, We are now engaged in the first cycle of supply and which economically survived the legalrestrictions demand on communications information and are that the VHF interests "imposed", only inareas passing through the secondary markets activities of where the VHF services were insufficient to meet the this pattern, i.e., information is being disseminated to public's demands for services. , as the public regarding the communications technologies anotherexample, whenitsprimaryservice was andthe public "demand" forspecialservicesis improvedreception, had unimpeded expansionin growing. areas where broadcast signals were poor or were not received atall.However, once the cable industry As the telecommunications technology expanded and began importing independent broadcast programming diversified its services during the 1950's and 1960's, from distant cities, and began substituting advertising, greater demands forgoods andservicesofan severe opposition was raised by the broadcast and informational nature resulted. Education, counseling, network interests their monopolies on audience referralservices,data as such, became defined as and advertising revenues were threatened. industries.Buying clubs,cooperatives, consumers' unions,legalservices, community organizations, Once it becomes apparent that a new technology will neighborhood associations, etc., developed to enable respond to the demands of the public in a broader or more peopletoshareinformationonavailable more diversified manner than the existing technology, services and goods. efforts develop to supply the goods, services, and materialsrequiredto mount/construct/market the Within the communications industries, the repeated new systems (secondary market activities). The first appraisal of information markets and services during thrust is in the hardware and raw materials needs. The the 1950's and 1960's caused greater focus on and second is in the legal/political realm to insure business concern for diversified communications development, survival. Thethird, andeventuallythemost inparticularcable television development as the profitable, is in the development of the "software ", means of serving the largest information market. The i.e.,services and informational areas that are the larger the market, the higher the economic stakes. "goods" the public wilfneed/access/demand. The technology that can deliver the broadest range of services tothe most people supplantslesser Each older technology communicates information technologies with more limitedservicesor about the new technology via telephone, telegaph, distribution capabilities. television, radio, and print as well as through the organizational and educational "grapevines" to make Where an evolutionary change in the hardware or thepublic furtherawareoftheservices and process takes place, new alignments of "wealth" or advantages of the new technology. "power" are possible and certain events take place.

97 83 As the new technology expands, develops, diversifies, Whether the public will sooner or later receive the information concerning both the existing goods and envisioned services is determined by the economics of services and potential services and products moves delivery systems new equipmentcostsand ahead of the visible and available, often obsoleting secondary market activities and current costs for services and products recently made similar services available from other, more established available/consumable to the public. The market for technologies. "newer" services begins to form before the hardware organizationsorservicesareavailable.This Communications technologies reflect this pattern. If dissemination of information creates high visibility, good services are available "free"' to the public, such especial lyofthe economicpotentialofthe as broadcast television, the public will not pay for technology, often snowballing both the interests and duplicate services.If the "information" delivered is the opposition and bringing the issue to one of general or mass oriented, but greater in volume and "public concern".Socialinterestgroups form; has better technical quality, the public will pay a government stepsofsurveillance andregulation; small and reasonable price for the improved reception business begins to anticipate the demands and services and diversification (initial definition of cable service of the public and private sectors for information and and market). People are willing, however, to pay services.Greateractivity andmore information more forthe convenienceofspecializedor dissemination is the result. individualized services answering specific interest or problem areas. The increased volume of communications over many media informs the public of existing services available The market for individualized services is the largest through the new technology, but also communicates and most diversified. The trendofall the potential ("blue sky") services and systems of communications evolution in organization, hardware service the cost, process, scope, delivery procedures and service patterns focuses on providing for the envisioned to make the new technological services specialty needs of the individual at the time and place available publicly. most convenient for the user. We use the term individualized services for this development goal.

1 Broadcasting terms itself a "free" service to the public, because the public does not pay at the time the information or programming is seen. Consumers pay for mass advertising through media in the higher costs and limited diversity of products available through the retail stores. Advertising costs account for 40% or more of the cost of goods to consumers.

98 8 COMMUNICATION AND HUMAN SURVIVAL

Geraldine B. Lange San 1- rancisco State University

In a recent research proposal entitled Human Survival no resemblancetoreality.Therefore,this and the Mass Media of Entertainment, Dr. Roderic potent means of enlisting millions of people in Gorney defines entertainment as the struggle for human survival is wasted or even allowed to foster our extinction. ... an ancient distraction from misery, refined by the Romans into an effective method of These are strong words and go to the heart of what controlling people by diverting them from has gone wrong with mass media. If we should have reality. learned anything from the Romans, it was that Rome burned while Nero fiddled away, and the people so Dr.Gorney, a psychiatristand member ofthe diverted from reality, that they very possibly never Department ofPsychiatry,Neuropsychiatric knew it fell! Institute,UniversityofCalifornia,, School of Medicine, also feels that Not onlyare Americans deluged with mediocre programming, far removed from the realities of life, . ..urgently needed for human survival is a we are now witnessing such an overlap of fantasy and means of influencing large numbers of people reality that one cannot be sure anymore. A case in to put into rapid action those measures which point is the recent shooting and bank robbery that could neutralize such major menances as took place in broad daylight, while some citizens, pollution, overpopulation, and violence. noticing so many policemen in the area...thought they were shooting scenes from "Streets of San To date, mass media has not yet met this challenge. Francisco". And if one tunes in to current vibrations, it has no future plans to do so. About two years ago, I visited the BBC in London, to ask ifit was possible for the United States to have This becomes frightening when you considerDr. television like the BBC. The British broadcaster said, Gorney's further observation that "No, because our media is here to inform and educate ... yoursis there to entertain." ...surprisingly little research has been done to elucidate just what effect mass entertainment Ask any top level broadcaster why and he'll tell you

produces, or how such effects are achieved. it's because Americans are El bunch of uneducated More importantly, almost nothing is known masses of people with about a 7th grade levelof about how to use such a powerful modality to intelligence. They're not intellectual arid they don't influence deliberately the attitudes, values and like anything complicated! So, broadcasters pander to behavior of people with regard to problems the lowest possible common denominator, seeking to which directly threatened the survival of the entertain. Now, if this is the case, then we should be human species. producing documentaries on why we keep paying for an educational sytem that is producing a 7th grade Dr. Gorney continues to say mentality in its citizens.

.it is alarming that at present, television But, I don't think that is the case. It's simply a good operates mainly under rigorous and final excuse to keep grinding out second rate television

institutionalization of censorship and thought shows for public consumption. I reject, outright, the control exercised by broadcast executives to concept that Americans have a low level capacity for produce programs deliberately designed to have intelligent, first rate television. The success of the

-99- 85 outstanding BBC productions sent to this country relations? What about a poll on how Americans felt attest to that. viewing "Judgement at Nuremberg" more than 10 years ago, and how they felt after viewing it on

I think we are a nation and a people trying to reach television recently? I think the results would show out to the world in a more meaningful way to just how far we have become conditioned to accept communicate ourselves to others. There is a large the dehumanization of men, and at the same time dichotomy between what we are and how others view gain new insights into Orwell's accurate predictions. us. We must close that gap. Televisionnews has come undercriticalattack How long shall we fool ourselves, that we have had recently as no longer being news. Perhaps we have something to say about how media has been used? arrived at "happy talk news" because we've become We've been doing the same things over again because so deadened by being fed one kind of news for so we fear new ideas. We need to encourage a diversity long, and deprived of good news for so long, that we of attitudes and values so that people can intelligently just don't expect to hear it anymore. But the lack of choose...rather than give them a restricted and good news is not because there is no good news, but deficient diet of very few choices. This is the balance because we have become conditionedtothe that makes objectivity a reality. assumption that the only good part of all the bad news we hear are the "happy comments" interspersed

I believe one of the reasons Orwell could predict spontaneously on amoments notice by our 1984 so accurately, is because he understood human newscasters. We don't seek out good news because nature so well. we've been programmed to respond only to violence and sex. Our news, like everything else, is a reflection We really don't want to accept the responsibility for of ourselves and our needs. But again, where does the our lives. We want to do it. How else responsibility lie? Who gets us off this merry-go-round could we have solittleto say about what has of death? happened to us. We have investigated all manner of space ... except inner space ... that secret place that I don't pretend to know the answer, neither do Ifeel can tell us who we are.Idon't really think we want it is the sole responsibility of the broadcaster alone to to know. findit.Every Americanischargedwiththe responsibility of doing something to save the human With our life support systems steadily being taken species. However, the broadcaster, by nature of his from us by the corporate structure, we stand by like profession, has a unique opportunity to project this littlechildren, instead of demanding that the free understanding tolarge numbers ofpeople press,undertheFirstAmendment, along with everywhere. television,operatinginthe publicinterest,start investigating these shortages. And what about race There are over 200 million Americans living within relations? Has the media used its powerful force to these boundaries of the United States. Many forces bring about understanding the many diverse cultures have succeeded in keeping us apart. As a result, we in its midst? have become fragmented, spiritually impoverished human .beings. We have made ourselves ill, not only Let's look at the current racial strife emerging right by what we have done to each other, what we have here in San Francisco. Has any newspaper journalist said to each other, directly and through the media, or television reporter investigated the onset, of the but also that subtle area of what we have thought rashofkidnappings, murder inthestreets,and about each other and not expressed. Changes are emergence of the Nazi party ... one right after the going on around us at such a rate of speed ... with so other...almost in concert with one another. Who's much information being thrust at us, we have become the conductor? I'd like to know. Maybe there is no confused. conductor. But I'm left with rumor and innuendo, because no one seems to be able to get the facts. Are We have been programmedtoeither surviveor we afraid to ask? Is anyone planning a documentary self-destruct. on the changing views on constitutional rights? The impactofinternationaleventsoninternalrace At a time of unprecedented achievement in the world We can begin right here, you and I, at this conference oftechnology andcommunication,our human by declaring our affirmation for life and by not survival is at stake. Our world is slowly dying right in abdicating our responsibility to that life to those front of our eyes, and we go on fleeing from reality involved in a national pastime of death. ...begging to be entertained!

Who's responsibility is it to do something?...Where Let us reaffirm our dedication to all that is living ... does one begin?...We can start by preparing to leave a legacy for those who will come after us, America to see itself as other see it. Americans live in enabling them to use the means of Communication to an unreal world. This country has decided how it will lead to a greater understanding of ourselves and the view itself at the expense of everyone else. ultimate freedom of Man's right to know.

$7 101 . TELEVISION NETWORK NEWS: CAUGHT IN THE MIDDLE

William C. Wente, Ph.D. Professor of Broadcast Communications Art San Francisco State University

The field of news is so vast and so important today fully documented and well sampled study to show (so much a part of our lives, in fact), that I found it that the public uses television as its main source of difficult to narrow the subject for my talk to you to a finding out what is happening in the world.' The single thesis. The more I tried to focus on that elusive publicalsotendstoplacemore credibility on thesis topic, the more it seemed to fly out of my television news than on newspapers or radio, perhaps grasp and become a part of the ether, where all of our demonstrating the "seeing is believing" idea. Later words go eventually. And, like all the millions of surveys by Roper and by Harris, as recent as last year, words and ideas on the newscasts of today and substantiate the earlier conclusions, with 67% of the yesterday, in that ether, they join the graveyard of respondents inthe survey thinking that television past expressions to be lost forever. news was fair and balancpd.20ther studies show that 19 million people watchC,B8;- 18 million watch NBC, HereI am, having already doomed my thoughts and and 14 million view ABC news nightly. That makes a words without having really uttered them. Least I be total of 41 million Americans who get their ideas of dubbed a fatalistic existentialist, I'd better assure you the day's events from across the country and the that I did settle on a topic, one, in fact, very close to worldfrom televisionnewscasts. That, we must an overriding concern I've had for some time a admit, is a large viewing market. concern for the status of television network news. That interest has helped me to decide to share with Who is responsible for feeding this huge market its youtoday anoverviewofsome of the major daily diet of news? Mainly three organizations based problems, as I see them, iin the area of television in New York City, each made up of approximately network news. I hope all of you share three things in 200 employees. It is important, however, to focus on common with me so far. thedecisionmakers thenetworkexecutive producers andeditors who havetheultimate That youhave atelevisionsetinyour responsibility of deciding what should be put on the house, perhaps more than one set. air. Additionally, the decision makers must articulate the policies to be adopted as current and future That you watch the evening network news guides for the employees within their organizations.

programs, and When I visitedand studiedthenetwoi knews organizations in 1967, I was quite impressed with the That you really care about the dissemination statements made by the executives concerning their of information and news in our society. awareness of what news should be and how it should be handled. (Most had come from a long tradition of If the third is lacking to any great degree among you, print journalism.) Keep in mind this was during the

I really am in trouble. race andcivilrights turmoil when every evening contained a substantial portion of stories covering

However, if you consider yourself average, I really that large subject of race relations.It was at this don't have to worry that much. Because the average period of history that some time at conferences was person in America does watch television news, not devoted to whether to refer to the subjects of civil only watches it daily but relies upon it as the most rights as "negroes", "colored people", or "blacks". A believable source of information. Many polls since small minority at that time kept saying "refer to us as 1963 reaffirm this fact. In that year Gary Steiner's blacks." book, The People Look at Television, was the first

1. Steiner, Gary A. The People Look at Television. 2. What People Think of Television and Other Mass Media from 1959-1972.

-103- 6 3 What was the role of the network news organizations Telecommunications Policy, exerts a pressure on the in this period, I asked myself when I was there. In networks which has brought many persons to the fact, I realized then, asI do now, that it's necessary firm conclusion that the First Amendment's right of to determine what the function of news is and the freedom for the press is now being violated. One of function of the news organizations, in order to be the most famous examplesisthe subpoena and able to access the worth of such news gathering and contempt citations by the government against CBS disseminating groups as the networks. The function and Frank Stanton,afterthe network aired the of news in a democracy, ' believe, is to keep the body program, "TheSellingofthePentagon". The politic informed about what effects our present as government contended that it needed the outtakes well as our future. Well, that seems like a relatively andnotesthenetwork hadasmaterialforits simple andeasytask.Itis,until you consider documentary which exposedtheeffortsof the informedabout what and whom?Ifyou mean governmenttopublicizethe pentagon'smilitary information about the government, you immediately program. By throwing out the case, the courts struck run into trouble, into what I consider the affairs of a an important note for the freedom of the press.If natural "enemy" of the network news. While the news organizations are iequired to submit their notes networks want toletus know what the national and unused materials, itis evident that there would government is doing, that same government doesn't be little or no effort to do investigative reporting. like the networks probing into its affairs which make Efforts to expose corruption and graft in government itappear lessbenignorefficient.Thereisan would be curtailed. The networks would be spending immediateconflict.Whilethepurposeofthe most of their energies and expense in defending their politician is to keep himself in office and to run his rights rather than in probing into all areas of news affairs unimpeded by outside forces, members at the about which the public has a right to know. A seriom networks want to show what the government leaders blow has beendealttoaccess to news sources, are doing wrong and why, in fact, a particular person however, by the court decisions in June of 1972 might be unsuited for his office. Some newsmen take involving three newsmen whose cases will be talked this purpose and task so seriously as to place them about inthe annals of journalism for decades to squarelyunder anoperational theorycalledthe come. They are EarlCaldwell of the New York "socialresponsibilitytheory"ofnews. They see Times,PaulBranzburg oftheLouisvilleCourier themselves not merely as a reflector or mirror of Journal, andPaulPappas of WTEV-TV inNew events but rather as an active participant in bringing Bedford, Massachusetts. Caldwell and Pappas were about social reform.It's true this role is assumed subpoened but refused to testify about black radicals more nftenby printjournalists,such asJack with whom they had a rapport; Branzburg was to be Andersonor by members oftheso-called questionedaboutallegedma7ijuanaandhashish "underground" press.But some television people offenses.Each man asserted that to testify consider themselves crusaders or muckrackers also. destroy his confidential relationship with his sources Because of the necessity for objectivity, however, and would impede the flow of information to the their battleground is not the newscast itself but rather public. They contented that the First Ammendment's the commentary sections of the newscast clearly free press guarantee shields them from having to labeled as such. Another forum for the crusader's comply with the subpoenas.' views is the documentary program which is all but dead in 1974 and about which I'll say more later. With the Supreme Court ruling against them, the result could well be what has been the worst fear of So networks, as all the press, is in almost constant newsmen thattheiraccess to sources will be conflict with the government. Unlike its ally, the impeded and, without some kind of protection, their newspaper, whichoperatesunder a freeand news sources will dry up. People will be afraid to talk unhampered environment, network news operates, in to newsmen confidentially and newsmen will be an indirect way, under the government. While it has unable to bring news about criminal activity to the no direct control over programming, the government, public. through the Federal Communications Commission and more recently through theOfficeof

1.Press Freedoms Under Pressure, pp. 15-16.

83104. Another demonstration of government antagonism to the portions which the stationsfelt were biased. the news and an ensuing pressure on the news media Besides being anindefensibleplan,itwould be was focused in the attacks by former Vice President impossible to enforce solely on the basis of trying to Agnew. Itis no mystery that the impetus for the definebias.Biasaccordingto whom?...the attacks came from a still higher office and resulted in administration the man on the street news these phrases: "vast unchecked power in the small directors acrossthe nation? The suggestion from unelected elite" and the "drivel disseminated by the Whitehead's office prompted the following response liberal news media's.' This speaker before you now from Walter Cronkite: hopes those acrimonious, alliterative allusions so much a trademark of Agnew didn't escape your This Washington atmosphere so repressive to awed attention. Suchstatements, which were the free press is now further poisoned with the designed to cast suspicion on newsmen, prompted attempt to bring the network news programs to Walter Cronkite later to remark: heel by making them responsive to the local stations, where the government has licensing While it would take extraordinary gall for the power and thus can bring political and financial administration to resume its attacks on the pressures to bear.' press now [after Watergate] , the atmosphere it has created will take some time to dissipate, This typeofdirect government intervention has and it has set in motion a train of events that helped shape the battle between the network news still present a serious danger to air freedoms of organizations and the government and helped solidify speech and press.2 the positions of each.

Itis significant that the attacks from the President's The government,it seems tome, has the greater emissary subsided following Watergate and, of course, inherent position of power, by virtue of the authority have stopped altogether, since that source no longer resting in both the executive office and in legislation occupies a position in the administration. However, passed by Congress. Further power is on the side of rather than a stoppage of the attacks on news, there the government through the Federal Communications has merely been a shiftineffortsbythe Commission. This regulatory body has, among its administration. The concentration now is within the other duties, the responsibility to see that Section Office of Telecommunications Policy, set up recently 315 of the Communications Act is adhered to. I'll not by the President. The young spokesman for that discuss the many restrictions this Act imposes, even office is Clay Whitehead whose ominous and veiled though this is an election year. Instead, I'll pass on to threats are worth quoting: another momentous decision by the FCC which deals with a requirement that has become known as the Ithink we have arightto expect from "Fairness Doctrine". This obliges the broadcaster to television journalism the highest standards of afford reasonable opportunity for the presentation of

professional journalism .if they don't change contrasting viewpoints on any controversialissue voluntarily, then the public has no recourse but which he chooses to cover.' Therefore, when any to induce changes, the lifting of licenses of broadcasterpresents a particularpointofview individual stations.3 concerning an important issue, he is expected to give air time to counter viewpoints. On the surface, this is One of the suggestions from his office was to make afairproposition and ideally keeps a broadcaster network stations across the country responsible for from becoming a demagogue. II there was no outside monitoring the network newscasts and for eliminating power to check his fairness, the broadcaster could

1. Time, November 21, 1969, p. 20. 2. Walter Cronkite, Vital Speeches, p. 522. 3.U.S. News and World Report, February 19, 1973, p. 48. 4. Walter Cronkite, p. 523. 5. Frank J. Kahn, ed., Documents of American Broadcasting, p. 375.

105 9 3 present only a biased point of view and the public public relies on the networks for its news, which I would be robbedof the knowledge of contrary statedearlier, a certainsegmentofthepublic opinions. However, as applied at the present time, the mistrusts the newsbearer. Some viewers vent their "Fairness Doctrine" could have the effect of silencing displeasure athearing bad news by heaping their the broadcaster and encouraging him not to delve scorn on the news bearer. Like ancient rituals in into any issues of a controversial nature which the messenger was sacrificed, modern receivers of bad news symbolicallykillthemessenger. The most recent occurrence detrimental to network Likewise, network news becomes the target of the news was the FCC decisionconcerning an NBC viewer's wrath. Whereas television cameramen and documentary programtitled"Pensions:Broken television reporters were once welcomed by the civil Promises". The network news organization sought to righters and the war activists, radical elements in the show the inadequacies of certain existing pension late 1960's became suspicious of the newsmen and plans. At the instigation of a group called Accuracy in excluded them frommeetings and from Media, Inc., the FCC decided that the network must demonstrations. This reaction was intensified by an show whatis good about the pension plans they odiouspracticeofagentsofthe United States criticized on the program or about other pension Government,aswellas by units oflocalpolice plans.Ifthis same principle had been applied to agencies across the nation, to pose as newsmen, in network documentary efforts oncivilrights and order to gain access to views expressed at meetings. integration during the 1960's, with its many programs Dnce disguised as newsmen, they presumably could during that decade, the networks would have had to moreeasilygatherinformationaboutpolitical giveas much timeto the segregationist and his dissenters. viewpoints as they did to the integrationist. News should be able to concentrate more on what needs to Even the FBI was engaged in similar undercover work be done what changes need to be made than on inits admitted practice of accepting information the status quo. It's the extraordinary rather than the fromjournalists.Inthe caseofCarlGilman, a ordinary which makes news and when the decision television -4portericameraman for station KFMB-TV arbitrarily is made that the one side, the ordinary, is inSan Diego,theFBIpaid him approximately as important as the other, the extraordinary, the $10,000 for his information as an informer. Dozens definition of news has indeed been compromised and of cases have been documented by the 20th Century news organizations willexistto congratulate the Task Forceinitsreport Press Freedoms Under public rather than show us some of the inadequacies Pressure! The result of paid informers and disguised of our society. agents posing as newsmenisto erode the public confidence in newsmen and to dig a chasm between The networks have beguntoproduce fewer the news reporters and the news sources, especially documentaries each year since the 1960's until now affecting the radical community with whom newsmen there is almost total dearth. With such pressures as havetriedtoaffect arapport.Dften now the the decision by the FCC against NBC, it is no wonder militants show open hostility to news gatherers and that the networks have retreated and do not now the suspicionissorealthatnewsmen and tacklegutsy,controversialissues. Insteadofan photographers may suffer bodily harm. Actually, the investigation of the prisons or of pensions, we have a loser in this practice is the public which has the right probe into the latest hair styles or the exciting life of to know about the activities of all people who are the California doodad. newsworthy.

So far I've concentrated on the pressures and threats Whilenot exhibitingoper-. hostility,theaverage posed by the government against network news. What viewer mistrusts the newsman because the viewer

I neglected to say earlier, which is the title of my sometimes believes him to be a creator of news. report this afternoon Television Network News: Daniel Boorstin in his book, The Image: A Guide to Caught in the Middle is that broadcast news is Pseudo-Events in America,givesexamplesof trapped midway between the government, on the one manipulationfor whichtheviewer shouldbe hand, and the public, on the other. Although the suspicious manufactured news, for instance, in the

1.Press Freedoms Under Pressure, pp. 29-31.

-106. 9 1 form of news leaks and news conferences.' Agnew spokesman, seems tohave been encouraging this claimed that news leaks brought his criminal charges effort. None would deny that local stations must put to the attention of the public. When so-called news more effort into covering local events and in covering occurrences are orchestrated and arranged with the those persons generally left out of the mainstream of precision of a conference and with no freedom of a news coverage, particularly the minorities. However, spontaneous news event, then viewers have a right to it would be a tragic mistake to think, therefore, that be both suspicious and guarded. the network news operations should either be made less effective or worse, dismantled completely. Who Other criticisms by viewers have been concerned with else, with large reserves of trained personnel and with the method of presentation and the treatment of the neededfinances couldcoveradequately news items. One of the most often heard complaints important national and international events? Would isthe capsuled and fragmented treatment of the our local San Jose television station have covered the stories.Most stories do not go thoroughlyinto civil rights marches of the 1960's? Would that or any motivation and background, what brought about the other station in the country have brought us the daily news events. Therefore, they appear to be shallow flow of that long and cruel war? Who will be the and lack depth. watchdogofgovernment?Besides suchobvious examples as "The Selling of the Pentagon" and the Another oftenheard complaintisthat television recent "Senate SubcommitteeHearingson concentrates too much on action and will pick out Watergate", what individual station would criticize the person or incident which focues on the stronger, the administration?It seems to me this is not the more aggressive physical activity rather than selecting time to retreat into the restricted spheres of our own those pers--is or portions that deal with a quieter and small community concerns. To the contrary, it is vital less sensational activity. Newsmen have been told to that we now keep the small community circles open select that which creates attention. News is concerned and connected with larger communication circles that with something that is happening which is of interest include the nation, the world and the universe! toalarge number of people. To avoid action is impossible but itis possible to consider carefully the How can the balance of power be maintained and degree and type of action when making news story how can we protect our news sources from being choices.In this area, however, the neimen, both dismantled or overrun either by the government or by writers and editors, must rely cn the age-old qualities the public? Some answers are being worked on at the of good news judgment. They are damned if they moment and seem worthly of our brief consideration: don't "tell it like it is" and they are damned if they show too muchof whatisreal.Newsmen are One isthe formation ofPress and News particularly consciousoftheir judgement Councils throughout the country. Although responsibilities in stories concerning war and crime. their approaches are somewhat different it is What to show and how much? Should they show still important that members from both the bodies of dead soldiers? Should they project the print and electronic media get together to atrocities of way? Should they "shoot it bloody", as articulate andmaintainjournalistic the concept has become known? standards, in addition to forming a common front with which to meet the assaults on the It was interesting to note in a recent news seminar preS.s. The local chapters of the Radio and that many in the class thought some gruesome details Television News Directors Associations can shouldbe shown, but wouldolder,nonstudents be a significant input to the Councils. accept this approach? What purpose isserved by parading the ghastly and the grim? While occasionally A second answer isthe enactment by the we may have a fascination for the grisly, television Federal Government of privilege laws which news editors wisely feel this fascination is better left wouldprotectallnewsmenacrossthe to other forms of communication to cover. nation. This, in fact, must be an immediate concern of the News Councils. States have There is a fairly widespread effort in this country to longrecognizedthenecessitytoprotect place and to concentrate television news at the local newsmens' sourcesand 18stateshave level. The government, through Clay Whitehead as enactedso-called"shield"laws that give

1. Daniel J. Boorstin, The Image: A Guide to Pseudo-Events in America, pp. 11 and 31.

-107.92 newsmen some measure of immunity from A final solution would affect the industry to the duty to bear witness. Most do no more a great extent but is essential if television than give reporters the right not to disclose news is to be given more positive attention the identities of confidential sources. New in the future. And that is the separation of York, Michigan, and Oregon additionally news from commercial considerations. Too protect the reported from being required to often news has suffered because of economic disclose confidential information. At least factors and because the networks have not onebillpendingintheUnitedStates been willing to put a larger portion of their Congress seeks to give absolute privilege to profitsintothe areaof news.Itis my newsmen. feeling, furthermore, that adequate news is virtually impossible under the sponsorship A third answer to achieving a better balance system andshouldbeseparated from of power is to eliminate or diminish some of commercial sponsorship. the controls, mostly governmental, which now threated the successful functioning of This overview of the struggle of network news caught the network news organizations.Besides between the government and the public could only further amendment of Section 315 covering present the major problems inherent in the endless candidates for political office, the "Fairness conflict. The most important overall consideration is Doctrine" must be reexamined. Also ready that all of us in this democracy work to safeguard the for review in Canon 35 of the American Bar free flow of news and information through which prohibits live radio and television networks, so that all levels in our society television coverage in the courtroom. are covered the affairs of government, the activities of business and the concerns of the citizens. Only A fourth answer is the necessity for more through unrestricted access to information can we time to be devoted to news, in addition to hope to discern the truth about our lives in this more in depth reporting. The causes behind democracy. a news event or action must be reported as well as including the traditional who, what, where, and when of the news story.

f08 93 BCTV: A GOOD NEIGHBOR APPROACH TO EDUCATION

Dr. Rene Cardena, Executive Director Bilingual Childrens Television

Whileithas become almost trite to say that the research very definitely supports the notion that children of a country are its most valuable resource, it racial attitudes are formed by the time a child is 7 or is nevertheless true. Therefore, it is incumbent upon 8. the leaders of this nation, as well as its educators and parents, to realize the tremendous importance of the Gordon Allport observed that by the time a child is 7 formative years of a child's life, for it is during this or 8, he has arrived as what he describes as "totalized period of time that his potential as an adult will be rejection", which seems to reach is ethnocentric shaped.Itisthebasicphilosophy ofBilingual peak in early puberty. Children's Television ( BC/TV) that all children will be giventhe opportunity torealizehisor her full Lambert's studies indicate thatracial attitudes of potential for in this resource lies the strength and children in the United States is fostered by negative survival of the United States as a nation. characterizationofethnically different people on television; and that children in the United States are Our main objective is twofold: while showing the more positively conscious ofRussiansthan child from a Latin American background that he is a Argentines, Brazilians, or Peruvians. great asset to the surrounding populace, we hope at the same time to expose the nation to a virtually BC/TV has indicated to the Dffice of Education the untapped reservoir of human energy. The impact of globalnationalneedforbilingualmulticultural television on the lives of its viewers cannot be denied. programs that instill in the child a positive self-image By using this important and powerful media, BC/TV on one level, and one which provides knowledge, will attempt to promote significant changes in the insight and sensitivity to children whose experiences way the children from these homes not only perceive and contacts have been limited due to geographical or themselves, but equally significant, how they are social distance. perceived by society in general. The loom that weaves a society together can be the Mary Martin sang a song in "South Pacific" " instrument ofnationaltelevision,butnational you have to be taught to hate you have to be televisionmustprovidethe viewer withthe carefully taught before you are six or seven or kaleidoscopethat isAmerica,ignoringnoone, eight."Horowitz, Goodman, Radke, Trager, and offending no one sterotypically, but reachingall Davis, as well as Cook, Cobb, Yarrow and a host of clientele with appropriate programming to celebrate others have shown that racial awareness is fairly well differ inns. formed in children by the time they enter school. Traditional educational strategies are archaic since its Their evidence indicz.,.es thatifa negative attitude resists fostering an espirt of accommodation to a accompanies racial awareness, integration is stymied, child'sspecificneeds.BC/TV isattemptingto This awareness cuts across all racial groups. humanize the educational process attempting to humanize education to provideit with a visceral Whether one viewsracialawareness froma understandingthatchildrenmust be embraced, psychoanalytic or social learning approach, the results touched, reinforced, and loved and that notion can support the same basic conclusion that interracial only be implemented at the pre-K levelifitis to concepts and feelings are usually crystalized in first influence the child. and second grades. These social perceptions usually do not find expression until children are older, but

- 109 - 9 4 Planned change in education is meaningless unless the the status of a language in these domains general basis of education is analyzed in terms of influence his attitude towards a language, interrelationships betweenlearner,societyand the people who use it, and his willingness to educational institutions. As a prerequisite to such speak it. analysis,however, a distinctionmust be made between both symptoms and causes. A strategy 4. If children are exposedto two languages predicated on contextual framework increases the simultaneously, they can learn both just as probability of generating prescriptions based on needs easilyastheylearnone,providedthe assessment data which are in concert with identified amount and quality of exposure to both are casual factors. the same.

What has often been viewed as casual factors such as The functionoflanguageis communication, the low income causing low educational achievement also function of communication is to end isolation. As far can be regarded as simply an interaction between two as minority group isolation is concerned, schooling symptoms whose common cause has been does not seem to provide the answer pertaining to overlooked. The results of such a process tend to these functions. O'Reilly [1970] stated: produce inconsequentialgeneralizations asthe guidelines forchange. The factthatcurrent Evaluations of compensatory programs for the educational planning has failed to adequately assess disadvantaged have shown that, in general, they the needsofdesignatedtargetpopulationsis are not succeeding in raising the achievement evidenced by the ineffectivenessof many levels of the deprived .. .. It is apparent that compensatory educational programs throughout the many basic questions related to the causes of United States. inadequate educational development remain unanswered, and that programs thatwill 1. Although Spanish medium work (bilingual produce academic change in the public schools schooling) is a powerful educational took, it have yet to be devised. is more profitable to think of it not just as a The addition of visual aids like the television to the pedagogicalinnovation, as a but broad education process seems to be a viable alternative for sociological movement. Any bilingual increasing relevant communications both within and schooling project should be tied to efforts between sociolinguisticallyisolatedgroupsin the outside the school to achieve social justice. UnitedStates.Skornia[1965] recognizedthis enormous potential when he stated: 2. A child will not want to speak a language unless: A child normally begins to watch television long before he can either read or attend school. His significant others speak it. Through his school years, the average student spends far more time per year (about 1,200 His significant others have a positive hours) withtelevisionthan in classes.This attitude towards it. situation is even more pronounced in preschool and post school years. So it would be strange if Activitiesinterestingtohimare television's influence were not one of the most conducted in that language. powerful forces, educational or antieducational, which shapes young lives. He experiences successin communicating in that language. In its relatively short existence of 25 years, television has become a permanent fixture in 96% of the homes It has a positive value (status)in the throughout the nation. Today's children, especially society in which he must function. those of preschool age, have virtually been weaned on television. Research by Lyle and Hoffman [1969] 3. There are several communication domains in indicated that 98% of a sample of preschool age a child's life his home, his neighborhood, children "enjoyed watching television." In fact, the the school and other social institutions, and average first grader watches approximately 23 hours the mass media. The child's perception of of television per week.

-110. There is general agreement that television has indeed There is a needfor a bilingual,multicultural influenced the developmental process of the young children's series on television directed towards the child during his formative years. The polemic begins preschool age audience.Existingeducational when we consider how the medium has affected the programming has neither the educational concept nor youth of our nation: Is television responsive to the the target audience of BC/TV. By taking advantage of special needs of the child? What does it contribute to television's ability to uniquely respond to the special the child's ability to live and interact with his family, needs of the child, and by making beneficial use of his neighbors, or his culture? theinherentqualitiesof the medium itself(i.e., national scope of audience, measurability of results), Pioneering efforts in creative children's programming the bilingual and multicultural dream of America will can be attributed to Children's Television Workship become a reality.Inthepastyear,Bilingual (CTW), creators of "Sesame Street", the landmark Children's Television developed a model, Villa Alegre, series that began the recent and optimistic "boom" in a seriesof 65 30-minute shows, which celebrates children's television. However, none seems to be able cultural differences and established a standardized tofillthe sociocultural and linguistic needs of the Spanish language base that transcends regionalism and child of Latin America. This obvious lack of positive interethnic barriers. Latin American role models on currently offered children's television programs is evidenced from an "Villa Alegre" will address itself to a target audience assessment of the 9 top shows aired in 1969 [Lyle & of children between 4 and 8 years of age. Ideally, it Hoffman]. The following factors confirm that: wouldalsoliketoattractadults.During these formative years,the childacquires an enormous amount of information about the world around him. 1. ChildrenofLatin American origin spend At the same time, he develops a set of intellectual and more time (57.1%) watching more television, social skills to help him in dealing with that world. 5 shows per day, than Ca icasians (37.9%) or These skills, together with his concept of self, are the Blacks (48.6%). foundationforhislaterintellecturaland psychologicaldevelopment. The BC/TVseries, 2. Children of Latin American origin showed consisting of 65 shows lasting 30 minutes has been no interest in watching television programs designed to accomplish the following goals: such as "Bozo", "Sesame Street", or "Mister Rogers" family situation comedy. To promote cultural pluralism through an understanding and an appreciation of Latin 3. Children of Latin American origin indicated Americanculture,heritage,values,and their favorite as "The Flintstones" (40.7%), mores. violentcartoons(14.8%),Mickey Mouse (7.4%),generalcartoons(7.4%),and To provide the Latin American child with an situation comedy (3.7%). experience in which his home language and culture predominate,forthepurpose of 4. More than twice as many children of Latin enhancing hisself-image, encouraging his American origin watch "The Flintstones" continuedorrenewedpride inhis and cartoons of a violent nature than do background, and bridging whatever gap may Blacks and Caucasians. exist between home and school.

In essence, thisis a sad reminder of the failure of To provide non-Spanish speakers with an existing education programs to present positive rather opportunity to become familiar with the than stereotype ethnic role models. Moreover, none Spanish language, and to help all viewers can meet the specific needs of the child of Latin recognize the advantages of speaking more American origin. Learner growth does not take place than one language. in a cultural vacuum. Educational planners cannot identify differences and cultural contributions of To aidthe viewerindevelopingthe different peopies without reference to content. the communication and problem solving skills to to 4-8thgradelevelhas proven be too late necessaryto function successfullyinhis commence cultural indoctrination. environment.

C6- 111 To present selected information designed to Findings revealed that 98% of the 800 children in the lead to the development of concepts in the test samplelikedthe shows and indicatedthey areas of Human Relations, Nutrition and wanted to see them again. Average comprehensibility Food, NaturalEnvironment, Energy, and for the 2 pilots were 72% and 79% respectively. Manmade Objects. Direct learning effects were demonstrated for both shows and thelanguage segments were found The content of the series "Villa Alegre" has been especia I lymeaningfulforSpanishandEnglish selected,organizedand developedwiththese monolingual children. objectivesinmind.It has been classified under 5 separate categories labelled as strands which form the Meanwhile, some 98% of the 250 parents interviewed most general unit of the series. These strands serve as found positive values in the pilots and 93% to 100% a framework for the content area which include depending on the individual show, felt the program learning experiences commensurate with each strand. would promote cultural understanding. There were no significantattitudingaldifferences between They have been developed so that, much like the title parents of Spanish speaking and non-Spanish speaking infers, they can be interwoven from one area to the backgrounds. next, thusfacilitating a learning experience that maximizes the interrelationships between subject Of the 244 teachers involved in the study, 89% areas, rather than theirisolation. The strands are indicatedthe program would be usefulintheir labelledas Human Relations, Food and Nutrition, classroom and 83% judged the content appropriate Natural Environment, Energy, and Manmade Objects. forprekindergartenthrough the 3rdgrade. The teachers judged that 80% of the content of the pilot Language development andculturalandsocial they viewed would reinforce their own curriculum. awareness are also key features of the television series.T hey providethe environmentforthe In terms of overall effectiveness of individual show the average segment at presentationof selected messages from the above segments,teachersrated mentioned strands. nearly four on a scale of one-to-five in increasing effectiveness. Two pilot programs produced and field tested by BC/TV last year received high marks from children, These findings have indicated to us what we had done parents, and teachers in 8 cities across the country. right and what we had done wrong. Moreover, from this data base, we have been able to establish specific The' rhour bilingual pilots, which were tested among show by show objectives for the entire set of 65 shows. audiencesspeaking SpanishorEnglishcontained many of the characters and educationalapproaches being used in the shows now in production. Hence, As we have stated, our purpose is socialized change they were considered valid for determining program for the children of our country; to expand their appeal and comprehensibility. world view, to reinforce their linguistic and cultural heritages while introducing them to concepts which underlies how the world works. That is our message; our medium will be TV production as guided by ongoing research.

- 112

VC4 PUBLIC AFFAIRS SYMPOSIUM

Raymond N. Doyle, Moderator Associate Dean, School of Creative Arts San Francisco State University

It is a pleasure for me to welcome you all to this the unturned out there in the overworked soil?I submit first symposium of the conference and to serve as that some astonishing things have happened out there your moderator.Our topicisPublicAffairs in the field during the past five years and it's high Broadcasting. We are privileged to have with us as time that we sharpened our plow blade for another members of our panel, representatives of six stations run at the topic. What has happened? Here in the which have been the recipients of numerous local and mid-70's...in broadcasting's 54th year ... we find nationalawardsfor excellence and distinguished that radio and television's involvement in community achievementinpublic affairsprogramming, and national affairs has never been higher. Coverage community service, and news. It is my pleasure to of local issues has never been more intense. Service to present and to welcome: thepublicisat analltime high.Stations are producing more public affairs programs than ever Russ Coughlin before, Broadcasting has jumped into the mainstream General Manager of the hardcoreissues and the tideisrunning KGO-TV San Francisco stronger. Stations are donating more free time and creative services. We are caught up in an era of public Herb Levy access,freespeechmessages, andpublic service Public Affairs Director announcements. Response to community needs has KRON San Francisco reached new heights. It has been stated that if public affairs programming on radio and television were all Len Schlosser that was needed to solve the grave problems of Public Affairs Director society, the state of the nation would be fine indeed. KPIX-TV San Francisco Publicaccesshastaken on new and somewhat Robert Vainowski disturbing dimensions. It has been estimated that the number ofPSA'scarriedby TV isexceeding Public Affairs and Editorial Director KCBS Radio San Francisco 10,000,000 spots a year. Radio carries close to 10 times that figure. The competitive push for free air Howard Sturm time is almost out of control. The sheer magnitude of Public Affairs Director the program output threatens to create a psychic KNBC-TV Los Angeles pollution which could dull the public's sensitivity to the staggering number of issues being aired. These Jan Yanehiro unprecedented developments call for a new breed of Public Service Director Public Service Director... onewho is equipped to KFRC Radio San Francisco carry broader responsibilitiesin a whole new ball game. The simple task of selecting and scheduling Public Affairs Broadcasting is not a new theme at a publicservicespotsor producing "comfortable" Ithas been the subject of broadcast conference. public affairs programs was left back at the turn of speeches andpanelssincethefirstmeaningful the decade. Skillin ascertaining community needs, regulations controlling broadcasting were adopted in expertise in the assessment of public attitudes and the Radio Act of 1927. Station managers and public opinion, and the ability to translate findings into affairsdirectorshave beenlectured,instructed, effective programming... are someof the tools nagged, and thankfully praisedfortheir today'spractionermustcarry.Today's Station stewardship by astupefying array of concerned Manager requires the same skills. individuals.If the subject fieldhas been so well plowed why should we have another go at it this morning? Could there possibly be some stone left

- 113 93 PUBLIC AFFAIRS: BILINGUAL TELEVISION

Len Schlosser Public Affairs Director KPIX-TV, San Francisco

There are some very clear oigns of change in the air Recently we simulcasted a translation in Chinese of a today, particularly in San Francisco television. The special, "CBS Reports: Shanghai", in prime time. change is in the language I should say languages. You'rehearingmultilingualsounds andseeing And right now, we're in an exciting new production multiculturalthingson numerous programs.It's offive specialchildren's shows bilingual and happened on all the channels in our town. bicultural programs which we are coproducing again withtheChinese Media Committee, under the Throughout America, people are trapped in their own supervision of Ruth Yee. The shows are called Yut, communities, unable to talk their way out. They're Yee, Sahn ("One, Two, Three") and Here We Come, imprisoned behind an impenetrable barrier because co-hosted by Toby the Panda and Duffy the Tiger. they can't speak English. In San Francisco, things The whole idea is to reinforce the Chinese identity began to change a few years ago. A committee of for Chinese children and make it understandable to Chinese citizens (the Chinese Media Committee) came non-Chinese children. You won't hear any broken to KPIX and asked for our help. Working together, English or see funny clothes as stereotyped so often we created a new Chinese language curriculum and in American TV shows, and no stereotyped characters handbook and then televised 65 Y2 -hour television of any kind. You'll see and hear real Chinese children programs calledSut Yung YungYee meaning as they really are. "Practical English." These bilingual shows were so successful, an appliance store in Chinatown had a run The exciting part of it all is the enthusiastic support on TV sets the first week on the air and since then, by the Chinese community over 70 people are we have distributed the-series to stations in Los involvedinthe project...50 children and 20 Angeles, , Sacramento, and Philadelphia. All volunteer adults participate. the programs have been transferred to cassette and are being seen in neighborhoods all over the San Putting a show together like this isn't easy by any Francisco area. means, especially when so many participants have never been inside a TV studio before, and much Also, on KPIX is a new series of weekly half hour patience is needed when working with children who programs called Sol es Vida (Sun is Life), a bilingual, go to school. But it's a learning experience for all of bicultural Spanish program each Sunday with Marcos us we're even learning some Cantonese in the Gutierrez as host, featuring Latino people and what's process. happening in their community. We're living in a multilingual and multiethnic society And on , we simulcast the 11 p.m. news in here andour television screens are beginning to

a Spanish translation each weeknightover reflect this reality. KBRG-FM. Channel 2 is also translating its 10 o'clock news over a radio station. Channel 7is doing a translation of its 11 p.m. news in Chinese over the educational radio station.

- 115- 9 THOUGHTS ON PUBLIC AFFAIRS

Herb Levy Public Affairs Director KRON, San Francisco

Public Affairs Programmin3% philisophically, includes gamut from a program concerning senior citizens to just about all local prograriiiiiing whether it be news, youth to children, to the pros and cons of a situation, religion,educationalorwhatever.While such to a direct interview conducted by a minority person, designations are delineated into special categories by to an all encompassing program which brings various both thelocalstations and by Federal community interest to the viewers of the Bay Area. Communication Commission edict, nonetheless, we feelthat alllocally generated programs are public We at KR ON-TV take pride in what we do in the area affairs. of Public Affairs programming, just as we take pride in what we're doing with our news presentations. Yet, News certainly must be considered public affairs. It is we are never satisfied with the end product, simply the conduit by which better than 68% of Americans because we are always trying to better our product. get their news. What other item could be more of a The final judge of our efforts, of course, must be the public affair? viewing public.

Documentaries,educationalprograms,discussion We innovate constantly, we develop pilot prOgrams, sessions are allpublic affairs programming because some of which eventually become part of our regular they are programs which inform the public. We programming, we explore new and different and suppose the only difference between programs is that interesting ways of presenting the problems with one is Public Affairs and the other Entertainment. hoped for solutions.

We would be less than candid if we did not concede But by andlarge, we alsorecognize that such that televisionis not principally an entertainment products, in order to be effective, must be presented medium. While this is true, its impact is so great on in an interesting and if you will entertaining the American public that any adjuct of programming manner. It would be foolhardy to produce a program that is not entertainment has a telling effect on the which is so dull as to drive the viewers away and yet audience. at the same time have noble thoughts and desires of what such a program migh produce. We have turned Because of the ever changing social circumstances of out our share of bombs over the years. But even if our community, many of the programs which are some oftheseprograms wereplainlybad, the devoted to so-called problem areas inevitably concern motivation washonest,thedesire was tobe theminority community. And we emphasizeit informative. because the Public Affairs Department at KR ON-TV ispledgedtokeepitsprogramming topical and As we look down the road, the day of Public Affairs informative.Ifwefailtorecognizethesocial programming will perhaps be equal to that of the revolution whichisconstantly going oninour entertainment portion of television. This might be society, then simply, we wouldn't be doing our job considered heresy to some, but we only have to properly. This doesn't mean that other items of examine the tremendous effect of this mediam on the interest are excluded and only minority oriented public to know that there must be more to it than programming is provided, but only that the emphasis cops and robbers, soapers, comedy shows, and the is placed on minority elements because this is one of like. But still, even way down the road, those public the most meaningful, explosive, and farreaching affairs programs of the future must be done in an ele'ments in our community. interesting, intelligent and informative way, using all the effects of the visual medium if they are going to At KR ON-TV we strike a balance, where we have our be successful. so designated Public Affairs programs running the Philisophically, television is a public affair.

117 .1.03 BIBLIOGRAPHY

ELECTRONIC MEDIA AS AN INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGY FOR SELF-AWARENESS AND FUTURE CHANGE; Bill Murry

References :

'Archer, J.,Jr.,Fiester, T., Kagan, N., Rate, L., Spierling, T., & Van Noord, R., New Method for Education, Treatment, and Research in Human /nteraction.Journal of Counseling, Psychology, 1972, 19(4), 275-281. 2 Fuller, Francis F. and Manning, Brad A., Self-Confrontation Reviewed: A,Conceptualization for Video Playback in Teacher Education, Review of Educational Research, Vol. 43, No. 4 (Winter, 1973), 469-528. 'Gordon, Donald R. The New Literacy. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1971. 4Jamison, Dean, Suppes, Patrick, and Wells, Stuart, The Effectiveness of Alternative Instructional Media, Review of Educational Research, Vol. 44, No. 1 (Spring, 1974), 3-62. 'Kagan, N., & Krathwohl, D.R. Studies in Human Interaction : Interpersonal Process Recall Stimulated by Videotape. Final Report, OE 7-32-0410-270. East Lansing: Michigan State University, December 1967. (ERIC ED 017 946.) 6 McLuhan, Marshal. The Gutenberg Galaxy. Toronto: University of Toronot Press, 1962. 7 McLuhan, Marshal. Understanding Media. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1965 8Rath, Louis E., Harimin, Merrill, and Simon, Sidney B. Values and Teaching. Columbus, Ohio: Charles E. Merrill, 1966. 'San Francisco State University, Personal Interviews with Herbert Zettle, Ph.D., February-May, 1974. °Toffler, Alvin. Future Shock. New York: Random House, 1970. llToffler, Alvin (ed.). Learning for Tomorrow. The Role of the Future in Education. New York: Vintage Books, 1Y/4.

A COMPARATIVE ANALYSIS OF MATRIX AND DISCRETE FOUR CHANNEL DISCS; Tye J. Idonas

References :

1Fantel, Hans. The True Sound of Music. New York: E.P. Dutton and Company, Inc., 1973. 2Friedman, Herb. Here's Looking at Four Channel Matrix Sound. Elementary Electronics, May-June 1973, pp. 61-65. 'O'Keefe, Gerald, A Fully Integrated CD-4 Disc Demodulation System and Preamplifier. Guadracast Systems, Inc., San Mateo, California, promotional pamphlet. 4Sensei, Shinri. Get The Facts About CD-4. Elementary Electronics, July-August 1973, pp. 45-49. 'Sessions, Ken. Four Channel Stereo From Source to Sound. Blue Ridge Summit, Pennsylvania: Tab Books, 1973. 6The Vtay Things {Rork. Vol. 1: New York: Simon and Schuster, 1967. 'The World Book Encyclopedia. Vol. 15: Chicago: Field Enterprises Educational Corporation, 1973. 8Torczyner, Jerome. Quadracast Systems, Inc., San Mateo, California. Interview, 23 April 1974.

1 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF FOUR CHANNEL FM BROADCASTING USING THE DORREN QUADRAPLEX SYSTEM; Tye J. /dons

References :

'Darren, Louis. Dorren Ouadraplex System : Laboratory and Field Tests. San Mateo, California: Quadracast Systems, Inc., (1971). 2 Dorren, Louis and Gabbert, James J. The Dorren Ouadraplex System of Four Channel FM Boradcasting. Audio Engineering Society, (May 1972). 3Dorren, Louis and Torczyner, Jerome. The Dorren Ouadraplex System of Four Channel Frequency Modulated Sound Broadcasting. Brussels, Belgium: European Broadcasting Union Review, (April 1973). 4Sessions, Ken. Four Channel Stereo From Source to Sound. Blue Ridge Summit, Pennsylvania: Tab Books, 1973. 'Terman, Frederick Emmons. Electronic and Radio Engineering. New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., 1955. 6The Vtay Things Viark. Vol. 2: New York: Simon and Schuster, 1971. 'Darren, Louis. Quadracast Systems, Inc., San Mateo, California. Interview, 18 April 1974. 'O'Boyle, Melvin E. Systron-Donner Corporation, Concord, California. Interview, 25 April 1974. 9Torczyner, Jerome. Quadracast Systems, Inc., San Mateo, California. Interview, 23 April 1974.

TELEVISION NETWORK NEWS: CAUGHT IN THE MIDDLE; William C. Wente

References :

'Gary A. Steiner, The People Look at Television New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1963). 2 Mat People Think of Television and Other Mass Media From 1959-1972. Report by the Roper Organization, Inc. (New York: Television Information Office, May, 1973). 'Press Freedoms Under Pressure. Report of the Twentieth Century Fund Task Force (New York, 1972), pp. 15-16. 'The Unelected Elite, Time, November 21, 1969, p. 20. 'Walter Cronkite, Privilege: Broadcast News and the First Amendment, Vital Speeches, XXXI X (June 15, 1973), p. 522. 'Both Sides of Debate Over Television News, U.S. News and Vt'orld Report. February 19, 1973. p. 48. 'Walter Cronkite, p. 523. 8 Frank J. Kahn, ed., Documents of American Broadcasting (New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1969), p. 375. 'Press Freedoms Under Pressure. pp. 29-31. 1°Daniel J. Boorstin, The Image : A Guide Pseudo-Events in America (New York: Harper and Row, 1961), pp. 11 and 31.

120 - I 02 PART IV

CHALLENGE STATEMENTS

103 EXPERIENCE NECESSARY: MYTH OR REALITY

James Strickling San Francisco State University

The broadcasting medium has come of age, with performance thaneverbefore.Ourcolleges, radio, TV, cable TV, and video taped segments for universities, and specialty institutions are producing a viewing on closed circuit and institutional hookups. flowing stream of talent. They have been overlooked This powerful message vehicle has become the most and submerged by the combined torrentof effective element of shaping behavior patterns since nonex posed, nonexperienced, nepotistical footwork the creation of man. With this in mind, I'd like to of policies, and the quota game of polarization of view asegment of the spherical domain of the ethnic minorities competing for a share of the pie. broadcasting spectrum which is "students breaking-in This has produced a very high frustration quotient to the media." among graduatingseniors. The netresultisthe wasting away of talent with promise. Also, many have We, broadcastingstudents,areconstantlybeing gone into unrelated fields and are like fish out of the bombarded with managerial and labor rhetoric that water. "thisis a smallindustry." Thisis abelievable statement,but there must be a broader horizon I'd like to explore some alternatives to some present incorporated into the thinking of our present leaders policies and give a "right-on" to some progressive toincludethe cultivation of future leaders with attitudes. newer ideas and methods. The stagnation inthe industry doesn't exist totally due to the reluctance of 1. I wouldliketosee communication the industry to make greater use of students with organizationssetuponcampuses with creative, technical, and aggressive techniques, but this pipelinestotheirlocalmedia is an important factor. organization(s). The rationale would be to have a higher percentage of the part time The fact remains that there is a besetting fear of the positions be made available to individuals "young upstarts" with their college diplomas taking with an interest in that medium. away those securepositions.In some cases the attitudesborder onparanoia,because some 2. There should be alisting of the specific individuals have a psychological marriage to their specialties whether theyaredeadend vocation. The feeling of self-worth is only in terms of positions or not, so that, when you go to a their position in their respective hierachy. station and talk about a job, one can be specific. Most operations managers want to Must thisgenerationadoptthatpsychological know specifics. This isfine to a point, as perspective? This is debatable, and far from being a long as the management doesn't want a new mute issue. The broad awareness due to academic person to have to travel the same path that exposure should modify this myopic and slender view they traveled ten to twenty-five years ago. of the field of broadcast communications. There must be dynamic flux invited on all levels of the industry, :3. The ethnic program of affirmative action and not be satisfied with successful methods of ten should be vigorously pursued until the whole years ago to accomplish effective communications. industry is homogenized by talented persons of many colorsratherthanblatant The students of the 70's are a new breed indeed. tokenisms to justify a quota to maintain a They were nurtured and baby sat by TV, and lulled license at renewal time. to sleep by the Top Forty Hits of Radio. With so great a depository of media tucked away in their 4. There should be greater efforts in the area of scholarships by allof the stations to give experience,there is a seeminglygreatercritical awareness andsophisticationoftoday'smedia additional incentives to the ambitious, low

123 - 264 income, and those striving for academic 7. Since the media leaders are interested in promise. making this world a better place through the broadcasting medium, or they should be J.There are some stations that have internship interested, should promote a healthy and programs with their scholarships, this is to balanced program to the enriching of homes, be encouragedandthe amountof the communities, and the wider social spheres. scholarship increased. We've satinivory towers and called progressive 6. There should be two task forces set up: thinking nonsense, it's high time to move forward and not continue to be "looking in the rear view mirror" a. Thelocalstation,labor, community to quote Marshall McLuhan. representatives, student(s)of communications gettogetherto Tomorrow's yesterdayistoday!Unless we ascertainthe future direction of the acknowledge on the campuses and the industry that media in that community. we must do more, do better and soon, we'll be known as a generation of procrastination; with ideals and b. The representatives of all the stations ideas in the skies, and performance below the surface getting together with the students and of the ground. As students will have to include pain community to help resolve the social in the growing process, but it doesn't have to be and media ills of that community. administered by the present broadcasters indescriminately, open the avenue of communication which can lead to a bright tomorrow.

124.'00 BROADCASTING'S IGNORED MINORITY

J. F. Brown San Francisco State University

During the past decade in America, we have witnessed provide captions or subtitles on selected a positive move to concern ourselves more with the programs, but the only response has been that problems of our minorities. Broadcasting, although from ABC, which presents emergency news slow torespond, has taken up the issues of our bulletins in both aural and visual forms.' Blacks, Chicanos and Chinese Americans along with the many other minority groups here. There has been Since broadcasting like any other big business is an one group of people, however that have been almost industry that survives by the revenue it receives the completely forgotten. That group is the handicapped reason for not captioning programs is explainable: of America. The networks cite two reasons for not acting: This paper will concern itself primarily with the deaf the cost of captioning and the danger of losing and hard of heal-Frig in our country. The reader would viewers with normal hearing who would be be wise though to keep in mind that any nation bothered or distracted by the captions. The which numbers the handicapped among its citizens problem touches not only the conscience of the must begin to use radio and television in any way community but the difficult area in which possible to help those citizens who until recently have majority and minority rights are balanced:4 been left on their own. The fears the networks have of losing money on Itis estimated that in America there are at least ten captioned programs are understandable, but if one millionpeopleafflictedwith various degreesof were to look at a survey conducted to examine the deafness. Ten million, or 5% of our population, and possibilitiesof captioning programs, then some of they like most of the population watch television, but those fears may be diminished. the deaf's enjoyment of TV is obviously restricted.' A 1970 investigation, conducted by While television is mainly a visual medium, the aural HRB-,Inc.,for the US Office of aspects ofit cannot be overlooked. To follow a Education's Bureau of the Handicapped program on TV without sound is next to impossible. examined the merits of alternative methods of Dr.HerbertZettl,inhisTelevisionProduction coding TV programs for the deaf and also Handbook,statesthat:Experts inthe field of reported on atest, conducted over a cable communication estimate that as much as 65% of television system inPennsylvania, in which human intelligence is transmitted among people by viewers with normal hearing were asked to sound.' This writer feels that the audio portion of a comment after watching two captioned film television programisatleast 50% responsible for programs. Though approximately 25% of those getting across a programs content. queried reported some degree of distraction, the remaining 75% said that the captions did One way of dealing with the deaf's absence of sound not bother them or added to their enjoyment. is by providing subtitles for various programs. The results also showed that the more time theseviewers spent watching the captioned For a long time the Councel of Organizations films the less bothersome they found them.' Serving the Deaf has asked the networks to

1. Robert Lewis Shayon, Saturday Review, p. 47. 2.Herbert Zettl, Television Production Handbook, p. 73. 3. Robert Lewis Shayon, Saturday Review, p. 47. 4.Ibid. 5.Ibid.

- 125 - 0 (3 It is also interesting to note that when the viewing across America. The possibilities of special service audience was asked "What would be your general programs would then be endless. There is already a reaction to captions on selected TV programs (not all proposal to link more than 100 cable systems by programs)?" The response was very favorable and communication satellite by 1975, providing them "indicated a sympatheticunderstandingofthe with 8 new channels of programming.3 problemofthehearingimpared when viewing television and a generally favorable reaction toward The proof that broadcasting for the handicapped is the presentation of captioned television programming indeed a reality now can be seen by looking to our on a selective basis." fellow broadcasters in Japan.

But what of the other handicapped minorities who As early as 1961, the broadcasting system of Japan, are part of the vast audience of broadcasting? Here in Nippon Hoso Kyokai, (NHK) recognized and took the Bay Area the blind are partially served by radio action for the handicapped citizens of that country. KQED through that stations program, "Newspapers In 1961, NHK created the "TV School for the Deaf" for the Blind". other programs for the handicapped have originated. Programs such as the "Merry Classroom", a special In a conversation with Marilyn Butter of KQED this class for mentally retarded children plus a special writer was told how that program has been highly language training class for stutterers along with the successful.The showisinitssecondyear and "Hour for the Blind" began.4 operates by using volunteers to read several local newspapers Monday through Friday for one hour. In order to stay in tune with the world of today, one must be awareofhisenvironment andthe Obviously radioisthe medium for the blind and environment of the others around the globe. One of partially sighted. KQED uses radio well and besides the best ways to do this is by the proper use of radio the reading of the newspapers there is a nationally and television. Broadcasting has a responsibility to syndicated program entitled"Book Time" where serveallpeople tothebestofitsability. This popular books arereadtothe audience. Oddly responsibility can perhaps best be met by following enough,notonlydotheblindfindthe show Japan's standards for their educational programs as interesting but also the sighted make good use of the broadcast over NHK. service. People who have a hard time reading or who simply can't afford to purchase many books, get as Efforts will be made to clarify the persons much from "Book Time" as do the blind. for whom the program is intended and make the contents of the program beneficial and

Perhapsthe most immediate way of helping the appropriate to those persons. handicapped would be through cable television. By Inorder toobtainthe best educational usingcable,thecosttoindividualhandicapped results,efforts will be made to keep the persons could be kept to a minimum. programs well organized and continuous.

Eventually, cable systems may offer subscribers No stones will be left unturned by means of a low basic monthly rate although probably broadcasting tomake educational not zero, and charge for each additional service. opportunities availableequallyto Subscribers would then receive an itemized everybody.' monthly billlistingthe pay TV programs, educational courses, and other cable services If the term "broadcasting" were substituted for the they used.' word "educational" in the preceding standards, then we would be assured that ow, and your nation's Ultimately, through connecting cable systems there handicapped wouldnolongerbebroadcasting's could be an entire network servicing the handicapped ignored minority.

1. Robert Root, Ph.D., American Annals of the Deaf, p. 567. 2.Walter S. Baer, Cable Television: A Handbook For Decision-making, pp. 52-53. 3.Ibid., p. 175. 1. Public. Relations Bureau, Public Report. This Is NHK, p. 30. 5.Ministry of Education, Education and Broadcasting in Japan, pp. 77-78.

126 7 MY CHALLENGE

Michele Acosta San Francisco State University

About a year ago I decided to black out television As communicators I believe we should attempt to and return to books and magazines during prime make television a service medium, as well as a sel- time. TV was using up too much of my time and I ling one. We should be able to see our own friends wasn't getting anything inreturn. I realized that on local TV and people in our community so we television was not serving my needs.It was not can know them.Publicservice spots should be entertaining or educational. It was serving no one's allowed to shake up the establishment and not be needs but the advertisers. The business of commer- censored through selection processes. More shows cial television has nothing to do with public service should be produced locally so a sense of community and interest,it's business is to sell the viewer/con- can be felt. And we should have live coverage of sumer to a product. And the meager programming events(other than sports). Commercial television that I was once hooked on was only a vehicle to get doesn't have to be bad. It could be used to educate, my attention for the next advertisement. entertain, and sellif we take on the responsibility to serve the communities in which we live.

I'm not against commercial television; I just think that inits present stateit has nothing to do with serving anyone. I believe that television could be used to give the basic information that we all need and in an entertaining way. Television should help us better understand our lives and help us under- stand others.

-127- .1.08 CHALLENGE TO BROADCASTERS

Lincoln Pain and Jon Holden San Francisco State University

In the middle 1940's, a number of West Coast banks and the opening up of trade between China and and industries began planning a new economic, social, non-Communist nations. Thereisno comprehensive and political strategy for the United States. The idea reporting of the overall picture. What is happening to was to shift the commercial focus of the U.S. from us all is being seen as an unrelated series of events. the East Coast to the West, concentrating American trade in the Pacific and making San Francisco the Instead of taking an aggressive leadershiprolein new Manhattan. This plan is often called the "Pacific informing its viewers, the broadcasting industry has Rim Strategy". been merely responsive, the tail on the dog, wagging after each event. Thereisno discussionof the Itisno coincidence that the theme of the San cnIletive political and economic intentions of the Francisco State University broadcast conference is PacificNations. Nocriticism,constructiveor "Pacific Nations Broadcasting". The daily realities of otherwise. No information which would help people life here in San Francisco are constantly affected by influence these plans in their best interests. this new emphasis. We are being mobilized for the new era. We have rapid transit, still being built, with Atleastthree,perhaps four US presidents have planning to include the nine bay area counties in one influenced the Pacitic Rim Strategy, and each has inclusive coordinated system. We havemassive gone about it quite differently. The governor's race in redevelopment and attempts to draw people back California this year revolves around the approaches to from the suburbs. And we have the rebuilding of our thePacificRimas amajor difference between downtown as a major sky high commercial center for candidates. Yet it is never mentioned on television or Northern California and the West Coast. radio.

These changes must be mirrored to a greater or lesser Similarramificationsmust bepresentinevery extent in nearly every country represented here. Yet country represented here, yet we know nothing of the news media and broadcasters from our countries them. There seems to be a conspiracy of ignorance in have remained strangly quiet about it all. the broadcast industry.

This is not to say that relevant events have not been An information bureau on the international strategy reported, but the connection between these events forPacificNations shouldbeestablished,with goes undiscussed in broadcasting. The Viet Nam War, representatives from all broadcast industries on the an early manifestationofthisstrategy, was Pacific Rim. It should analyze as well as report.It extensively documented. But now the US plans for should stay ahead of the news instead of under it, Viet Nam and the war itself still goes on, and that is providing Pacific broadcasters with the results of its hardly reported on at all. There seem to be implicit collective analysis. There is no other forum available connections between the development of mass transit forthe serious public discussionof the here and in Japan, social upheaval in the Philipines, interrelationships of these international events.

-129 ABOUT THE NEWS

Juno C. H. Lin San Francisco State University

Nowadays whenever we listen to a news cast on radio need some kind of antidote to this social poison. It or on TV, itis mostly about the tragic news, like will take just a few minutes or maybe a few seconds slayingpeople onthestreets,trafficaccidents, to show a film on these cultural events and give some injustice in politics, and so forth. And people are comments and explanations, and it will make a lot of listening to this news almost without changing their people feel cheerful likeI did. I am sure that we have expressions because they are hearing this kind of as much cheerful news as depressing news when we news day after day and their feelings are paralyzed; look at the world. humans become less human; while eating their dinner, they listen to murder on the news. Now, the world is like one country because of the broadcasting system's use of satellites. And it will nGt

I think newscasts can be more cheerful and more be any trouble to exchange cheerful news because useful. I remember that I was so interested and so cheerfulness is common to all humans and all nations. joyful when I heard news about Chinatown during Ifthe newsis about domesticated serious news, the Chinese New Year celebration or news about the however;, it might not be that easy to exchange the Japanese cultural events in the Japan Center. Why news because no nation wants to expose her problems can't we have more of this kind of news? There are oritmight disturb the international relationships. more than 100 countries in the world, and most of Therefore, I believe we can give a lot of comfort to them have their own special traditional occasions and people and can have better relationships between events but we hardly know most of them. Why can't nations by simply exchanging each other's more we have more news on these kinds of things? I know cheerful news, and I think we must do it. this type of news is not as important as the coverage of slaying people or politicalinjustice news, but I THE RESPONSIBLE BROADCASTER

Chaz Austin San Francisco State University

Inthe countriesofthePacificBasinwhere depth as it is possible to do. This will accomplish two commercial broadcasting is the operative system, we things; thebroadcaster asbusinessmanwillbe find in 1974, a strong and vital industry. Itis also satisfiedinthatthe public has been served and financially profitable for those entrepreneurs who are because the public has been given what it wants and fortunate enough to own and run a part of such an needs, the public has tuned in and a profit has been important and exciting enterprise. turned. But ahigher goal has been achieved; the broadcaster had done the job as communicator. The But in an industry in such a healthy state, those public has been informed, perhaps even enlightened, persons who areresponsible for the growth and and the art from that is television has once again direction of television must not rest on their laurels. reared its beautiful head. The broadcaster has acted as They are not, after all, making tires or automibiles or the eyes and ears, yes, even the soul of the public aspirin or anything quite so prosaic. They are dealing which he or she serves. The broadcaster hassbeen to with the minds and hearts of the people in their all the places the public should have been that day, respective countries, and that is a responsibility that and has seen and explored all the important events goes far beyond the financial obligations they have to that most of us, too busy conducting the everyday themselves or to their stockholders. affairsofour ownlives,have been unable to participate in. This is not to say that financial profits are not to be coveted. The point is that it is the broadcaster who, This is what being a broadcaster is all about. A kind by the nature of his business must lead the way for of immortality has been obtained: the broadcaster the rest of his or her countrymen into those areas of has performed a public service, perhaps the greatest human endeavor which do not fall under the realm of service one can render in our present age; giving the financial renumeration. public quick, accurate, in depth information that it desperately needs in order to function in the modern The broadcaster may very well become the artist of world. the future if he or she shows enough courage and foresight in this area. And what makes this all so And profits have not suffered for it. On the contrary; reasonable and even desirable is that by the very if the job has been done as it should, more people will nature of the business, profits will not suffer by this be watching the station soon enough, for they will effort. The public looks for its television stations to know that here at this station are my friends. These inform it of the world which we are often too busy or are the people who tell me what is really happening too preoccupied to explore in depth by ourselVes. By out there, who give me the accurate, undistorted the very nature of the conditions in which we live in truth about things so I can face the world tomorrow a the world of the mid-seventies, much of that news is little more intelligent, alittle more perceptive and going to be shocking and depressing. perhaps even a little more sensitive thanI was today. This is what it means to be a broadcaster. But the public wants to know. And the broadcaster has to deliver that knowledge as fully and in as great a

- 133I BIBLIOGRAPHY

BROADCASTING'S IGNORED MINORITY;J.F. Brown

References:

1Robert Lewis Shayon, Hearing and Listening, Saturday Review, February 6, 1971, p. 47. 'Herbert Zettle, Television Production Handbook (Belmont, California: Wadsworth Publishing Company, 1961), p. 73. 'Robert Lewis Shayon, Hearing and Listening, Saturday Review, February 6, 1971, p. 47. 4Ibid. 5Robert Lewis Shayon, Hearing and Listening, Saturday Review, February 6, 1971, p. 47. 6Robert Root, Ph.D., A Survey of the Reaction of Hearing Individuals to Captioned Television to Benefit the Hearing Impaired, American Annals of the Deaf, October, 1970, p. 567. 'Walter S. Baer, Cable Television: A Handbook For Decision-making (Santa Monica, California, Rand Co., 1973), pp. 52-53. p. 175 9Public Relations Bureau, Public Report, This Is NHK (Tokyo, Japan), p. 30. "Ministry of Education. Education and Broadcasting in Japan (Government of Japan). pp. 77-78.

.135 2 PART V

SELECTED, ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY SELECTED, ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY

AFGHANISTAN Samoa being dissatisfied with the management of the ETV station run by National Educational Tele- Books vision Broadcasters and turning over the operation Kingdom of Afghanistan Background Notes. U.S. Depart- to the University of Southern California. ment of State, Washington, D.C.:U.S. Government Printing Office, 1970. American Samoa Gets It Live. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 42, No. 6, [June 1971], p. 95. Short item about the ETV station KVZK-TV in American Samoa broadcasting the Flag Day cele- AMERICAN SAMOA bration live.

Periodicals American Samoa Has Hopes of TV Station. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 32, No. 7, [February 1962], p. 37. AUSTRALIA Comments by Secretary of the Interior Udall about improvements to be made to the American Samoan Books School System and his opinion that television is Australia Handbook. Sydney: Australia News and Informa- the best means of educating the people. tion Bureau [1971].

Educational TV Comes to American Samoa. Pacific Islands Australia Handbook 1971. 11th ed. An Australian News and Monthly, Vol. 35, No. 11, [November 1964], pp. 61 Information Bureau Publication, [1971]. and 63. This handbook about Australia, covers every aspect Discuss the first television station inthe Pacific of Australia and Australian life. A chapter is dedi- Islands; established to broadcast educational pro- cated to communications. grams into the schools and the community. O'Neil, J.P., ed. Official Year Book of the Commonwealth of TV Brings Trade to a Standstill. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. Australia. Australia; Commonwealth Bureau of Census 35, No. 11 [November 1964], p. 63. and Statistics, [1972]. Short item about the interest of the Samoans in This publication is a compiled study of Australia. the television programs. Reid, Don and Bladwell, Frank, ed. Close-up: Scripts from Doubts Over 'Total TV' Education. Pacific Islands Monthly, Australian Television's Second Decade. : Mac- Vol. 36, No. 6, [June 1965], p. 27. millan Company of Australia, Pty. Ltd., [1970].

Discuss the controversy in American Samoa over "The scripts in this book ... are from programs whether children should be taught entirely by tele- telecast by the Australian Broadcasting Commis- vision or television should be used as a teaching sion .... They have merely seemed to us tobe aid. suitable for the purpose of showing something of the nature of writing for television. At the same Educational TV Comes to Massacre Bay. Pacific Islands time they can claim to be fairly representative of Monthly, Vol. 38, No. 10, [October 1967], p. 69. the quality and variety of Australian writing for television drama between 1965 and 1970." Short item about the dedication of a new school where children will be taught by ETV in the village of Asu in American Samoa. Twenty-third Annual Report for Year Ending 30 June 1971. Australian Broadcasting Control Board. Canberra: Aus- American Samoa: In Many Ways You've Got To Be Im- tralian Government Publishing Service, [1971]. pressed. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 39, No. 11, [Nov- ember 1968], pp. 60-67. Western, J.S. and Hughes, Colin A. The Mass Media in Aus- tralia: Use and Evaluation. Queensland: University of A long article on American Samoa which includes Queensland Press, [1971]. information on the educational television system which has been put into operation there. This book contains research into the mass media and its effect in Australia. Behind the Shake-Up in American Samoa Television Educa- tion.PacificIslands Monthly, Vol. 40, No. 5, [May Periodicals 1969], p. 25. Radio Australia Voted Tops. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 32, No. 8, [March 1962], p.71. Two columns about the governor of American

-139- 114 Two-paragraph about Radio Australia being voted the most popular shortwave service by the Inter- national Short-Wave Club. Books Britain, the Brookes, and Brunei. Kuala Lumpur, Oxford U. The ABC and Objectivity. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 32, Press, [1971]. No. 7, [February 1962], p. 25. Annual Report on Brunei. Great Britain Colonial Office, Letter to the editor about a "Pacific Island Month- [1946]. ly" comparison of news reporting between the BBC and ABC. State of Brunel, Annual Report. [1969]. Walker, Howell. South Australia, Gateway to the Great Out- Wright, Leigh. The Origins of British Borneo. Hong Kong U. back. National Geographic, [April 1970]. Press, [1970]. Black, White, Blue: Australian Serial No. 96. Time, [June 5, 1972] . BURMA Oswin Heads Media Body in Australia. Advertising Age, [ Jan- uary 29, 1973], p. 64. Book Henderson, John W. Area Handbook for Burma. Washington, Macleish, Kenneth. The Top End of Down Under. National D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [1971]. Geographic, [February 1973]. This book is one of a series of handbooks designed Butts, D.C. Television In Higher Education, an Appraisal of to be useful to military and other personnel who Developments in Australia and New Zealand. Educa- need basic facts about social, economic, political tional Broadcasting International, Vol. 6, No. 2, [June and military institutions and practices of Burma. 1973], pp. 62-66. Closed Circut T.V. and its applications in Austra- lianUniversities and Colleges. Only 10% of the CAMBODIA students go on to college. CCTV is better in Uni- versities that train teachers and have TV in con- Books nection with libraries. The Khmer Republic (Cambodia): Background Notes. U.S. In New Zealand TV is new, with very little money, State Department, Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government and is the size of Britain with 23/4 million people. Printing Office, [1970]. Great research into teaching methods. CCTV is a new approach to integrated resource services. Munson, Frederick P. Area Handbook for Cambodia. Wash- ington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [1 968]. McConnel, Harold. Australia: The changes rocking Sydney. This book is one of a series of handbooks designed San Francisco Examiner & Chronicle, [August 5, 1973]. to be useful to military and other personnel who need basic facts about social, economic, political Australians Ready Guides on Kid TV Ads. Advertising Age, [ July 30, 1973], p. 38. and military institutions and practices of Cam- bodia. Australians love everything American ... except maybe the powertul intlueme of advertising on Periodicals kids as seen every Saturday morning on American Missing in Cambodia.Time, [April 20, 1970], p. 43. TV. This is one import the Aussies would like to do without. The TV Kid Ad Guides are designed to Cambodia' Now It'sOperation Buy Time. Time, [May 25, prevent mass buying of Marx toys. 1970], p. 28. Political. Australia Sets ClgarettelTobacco Ad Ban Rules. Advertising Age, [August 13, 1973], p. 28. Cambodia A Cocky New A RVN. Time, [June 8, 1970] , p. 30. Horne, Donald. The New Nationalism, Pacific, Vol. 3, No. 1, [1974], [quarterly]. Dukuns, Bomohs and Guruhs Time, [November 9, 1970], p. 32.

Toward Talks. Time, [November 9, 1970], p. 30. BANGLADESH Political. Book Brown, William Norman. The United States and India, Paki- Cambodia Partial Paralysis. Time, [May 3, 1971], p. 30 and stan, Bangladesh. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 31. [1972]. Cambodia And Now There Are Nine. Time, [May 10, The purpose of This book isto increase under- 1971]. standing of the problems and difficulties of the three nations: India, Pakistan and Bangladesh. Indochina. Time, [May 10, 1971], pp. 24-25.

146 - It) The Man Behind the Symbol. Time, [May 17, 1971], p. 39. Singer, A. BBC Chief Slams Educational TV. Design, [Sep- tember, 1971], p. 26. Double Trouble. Time, [April 3, 1972], p. 28. "Is the typical allegedly profound educational pro- gram actually effective? Or is it as dull and boring Another. Pause in the Pursuit of Peace. Time, [April 13, as the rest of TV's fare?" That is the question. The 1972], p. 18. article raises questions but doesn't really give us Political. any answers.

Cambodia Dark Events. Time, [October 23, 1972 J ,pp. Carving lip Toronto for Cable Operators. Broadcasting, [ Jan- 47-48. uary 10, 1972], p. 64. Political. CATV is as hot an issue in Canada as it is in the U.S. The Cablecasters see a fat future market in The U.S. After Viet Nam. Time, [November 6, 1972], pp. Canada and plan a takeover in Toronto as a proving 19-23. ground.

The Shape of Peace. Time, [ November 6, 1972], p. 14-17. Canadian RestrictionFostersU.S. Success.Broadcasting, [January 17, 1972], p. 46. The Dance Around the Fire. Time, [November 20, 1972] , p. 43. 41 Stations Planned for CBC 'Radio Two.' Broadcasting, Political. [January 24, 1972], p. 50.

Another Pause on the Road to Peace. Time, [December 4, A Canadian-Only Rule for Broadcast Commercials? Broad- 1972J, p. 14. casting, [May 15, 1972], p. 34. A case of home rule as Canadians feel that they Final Push For Peace. Time, [January 29, 1973], pp. 10-11. should view only advertising made by Canadians for Canadians.

Canada May Go After Children's Vitamin Ads. Broadcasting, CANADA [May 22, 1972J, p. 36.

Books Deceptiveness in advertising is the theme here as Irving, John A., ed., Mass Media in Canada. Toronto: The the Canadian government and consumers begin to Ryerson Press, [1962]. wage war on Vitamin ads for kids deemed some- what on the questionable side. Peers,Frank W. The Politics of Canadian Broadcasting 1920-1951. Toronto: UniveTsity Toronto Press, [1969]. Canada's '71Top 100 Radio Users Hike Spending 11%. Advertising Age, [June 12, 1972], p. 20. Shea, Albert A. Broadcasting the Canadian Way. Montreal: Harvest House, [1963]. CBC's NA BET Workers Go Back on the lob. Broadcasting, [July 3, 1972], p.24. Sturberg, Peter. Mister Broadcasting: The Ernie Bushnell Story.Ontario: PeterMartin AssociatesLimited, CBC Goes 0 For 2. Broadcasting, [ July 10, 1972] , pp. 34-35. [1971]. Canada Clears Way for New TV Network. Broadcasting, This book is a of Ernie Bushnell, cover- [August 7, 1972], p, 34. ing a half century of the Canadian Broadcasting System. Telesat Canada to Start Next Year With CBC. Broadcasting, [August 7, 1972], p. 6. The 1973 World Almanac and Book of Facts. New York: Newspaper Enterprise Association, [1973]. Canadian Caper. Broadcasting, [August 7, 1972], p. 5. Yearbook of the Canadian Entertainment Industry. Toronto: Regulation North of the Border. Broadcasting, [September Film Publications of Canada, Ltd., [1968], [annual] . 11, 1972] , p. 40. Periodicals Who regulates what for now and for the future. A The Sober Swinger. Time,[April 27, 1970], pp. 43-44. look at broadcasting regulation in Canada. Political. Lew Grade Puts on a lolly Good Show Broadcasting, [Oct- This Is A Very' Sorry Moment. Time, [October 26, 1970], ober 16, 1972], p. 52. pp. 33-34. Canadian ProvinceWants to Own CA TV.Broadcasting, Political. [October 16, 1972], p. 56.

U.S. and Canada Sign a Satellite Accord. New York Times, Canada TV Net Plans $7M Outlay. Electronic News, [Octo- [April 21, 1971], p. 20. ber 23, 1972], p. 7.

Once More With Feeling. Time, [October 30, 1972]. Television; Open Door. Economist, [November 11, 1972], p. Canada Still Seeks Guidelines for Reporting Crises. Broad- 29. casting, [May 7, 1973], p. 50.

CanadianNetworkingTakestoSatallite.Broadcasting, Canadian Insider Sees Cable TV As Best Bet There for the [November 13, 1972], p. 42. Future. Broadcasting, [ June 4, 1973], p. 50.

I Am What I Am. Time, [November 13, 1972], p. 35. Canadians Get Consumer Information TV Program. Adver- tising Age, [May 28, 1973], p. 53. The ElectionThat Nobody Won. Time, [November 13, 1972] , p. 32. Canada Broadcast Body at Work on Content Rules. Adver- tising Age, [ July 30, 1973], p. 38. Little Iron Man. Time, [ January 8, 1973], p. 62. Television? TheWaiting Game.Economist, [August 18, Died: Lester Pearson. Time, [January 8, 1973] , p. 56. 1973], pp. 21-22.

The Peacemaker. Time, [ January 8, 1973] , p. 32. Ontario Government Eyes Ban on Commercials From Out- side Agencies. Broadcasting, [August 27, 1973], p. 24. Died: George Drew. Time, [January 15, 1973], p. 65. Moore, J. Prospects Seen Dim for American CATV Firms in A Willing Suspension of Disbelief. Time, [ January 15, 1973] , Europe. Electronic News, [September 10, 1973], p. 28. p. 11. Robertson, H. TV: A Summer Menu: Gingerbread and Television; No Need to See to Believe? Economist, [ January Schmaltz. MacLean's, [October, 1973], p. 107. 20,1973] , p. 30. Parsons, B. Listening to VTR. Artscanada, [October, 1973], New Canada Net Readied, CBS May Ban Advertising. Adver- pp. 27-29. tising Age, [ January 22, 1973], p. 32. Nakay a,F. Japan:VideoHiroba.Artscanada, [October, As Canada puts together a new TV network the 1973], pp. 52-53. possibility of banning advertising is raised. Canadi- ans view American TV with a jaundiced eye and Quebec Cable TV Plans Worry Canadian Admen. Advertising the question of advertising influence rears its ugly Age, [October 1, 1973], p. 66. head.

Tiptoe On A Tightrope. Time, [January 22, 1973], p. 30. Canada's CRTC Will Air Views on Kiddie TV Ads. Advertis- ing Age, [October 15, 1973], p. 34. CATV Unrest in Canada. Broadcasting, [January 29, 1973] , p. 66. U.S Stations Fight Deletions of Ads From Shows Exported to Canadian Cable. Broadcasting, [October 22, 1973], 'CATV, now a household word in the US may be p. 34. headed for Canada and our Canadian broadcasting friends are faced with the same CATV crisis we Take me asI am or let me go. Canadian cable- face in this country ., . regulation and effect upon casters love to pirate those American programs but standard broadcasters. also love to dump out the ads that go with 'em but the U.S. stations say all or nothing at all. The Final Push For Peace. Time, [ January 29, 1973] , pp. 10-11. Robertson, H. TV's Fall Fare: Tears, Tantrums and Toilet Jokes. MacLean's, [November, 1973] , p. 114. The ICC: An Extinct Species Reborn. Time, [February 5, 1973], p. 17. Crowther Fund For The Open University. Economist, [Nov- ember 3, 1973], p. 24. Canadian Group to Tighten Code on Ads to Kids. Advertising Age, [April 9, 1973], p. 32. Revett, J. U.S. Exports to Get Plugs on VOA Radio. Adver- tising Age, [November 5, 1973], p. 2 B.C. Broadcasters Ask End of Liquor, Tobacco Ad Ban. Advertising Age, [April 9, 1973], p. 76. British Like New Commercial Radio, Survey Reports. Adver- tising Age, [November 19, 1973], p. 23. Slover, F. Advertisers Aplenty for Baby Blue Film Shows on Competition for the dollar yields at least more Toronto's CITY-TV. Advertising Age, [April 9, 1973], popular if not better quality radio broadcasting, p. 78. and, according to the first reports out, Canadians find commercial broadcasting more enjoyable than Canada Parliament Weights Ban on Ads for Kiddie TV. Ad- the other kind. vertising Age, [April 23, 1973], p. 139. As Canada wades into commercial broadcasting Canada Broadcasting, Union Shortens Cycles for Talent concern for the welfare of Canadian kiddies surges Advertising Age, [December 3, 1973], p. 60. forward. How to regulate broadcasting kid ads ... that is the question. A brief examination of the Stop Kid TV Ads; Canada Consumerists. Advertising Age, problem in this article. [December 3, 1973], p. 42. Canadian consumer groups fire away at ads geared to hit the little kids and devastate the pocketbooks Nyrop, Richard F. Area Handbook for Ceylon. Washington, of their parents. An all too familiar theme in the D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [1971 ]. USA and now in Canada. This book is one of a series of handbooks designed to be useful to military and other personnel who Robertson, H. KUNG FU and the Cult of the Gentle Hero. need basic facts about social, economic, political MacLean's, [ January, 1974], p. 78. and military institutions and practices of Ceylon. Restrictions, Legislative Overlap are Hampering Growth in Williams, Harry. Ceylon: Pearl of the East. 2nd ed. rev., Age,[December 10, Canada TV AdsAdvertising London: R. Hale, [1963]. 1973], p. 22. Periodicals A Canadian Runs Up A Broadcast Flag for the U.S. Broad- Ceylon Broadcasting Corporation. European Broadcasting casting, [December 17, 1973], p. 34. Union Review, No. 103, Part B, [May 1967], p. 62. Remember Gordon Sinclair? Where is he now? He's the guy who did a commentary entitled, "The Pol. government overthrown, acquittal of 2-69. New York Americans." Naturally we all picked it up and ran Times, [January 3, 1970]. it because it patted us on the shoulder. If he had slammed us for Viet Nam and Watergate would we 1969 Economic Review. New York Times, [January 19, have done the same? This is HIS story. 1970], (71:1).

Death While Waiting For Transplant. S.F. Chronicle, [March Gov't,ImprovesTouristFacilities.New York Times, 20, 1974] , p. 28. [January 19, 1970], (56:6).

Bruce Marsh, Canadian Broadcaster. Travel.

Canada Seen Ready to Let Day timers in U.S. Sign on Before Tourist Board Reports Sharp Increase in Recent Months. Sunrise. Broadcasting, [March 25, 1974], p. 68. New York Times, [January 27, 1970] , 23:7.

Travel American day timers are in severe trouble unless Canada allows a rollback of broadcast treaties Nonaligned Nations. New York Times,. [February 24, 1970]. between the U.S. and Canada which will permit American broadcasters on certain frequencies to Description Of Attractions. New York Times, [April 12, broadcast with limited power before the arbitrary, 1970], X:59. fixed daylight schedule adhered to by both coun- tries. Travel Dissolves Parliament For General Election. New York Times, Hands Across the Border: A U.S. Agency Helps a Canadian [March 8, 1970]. Retailer With Broadcast. Broadcasting, [April 1, 1974], p. 13. Mrs. Bandaranaike's 3-Party Leftist Coalition Wins General Election. New York Times, [May 29, 1970]. Canada May Place Restrictions on Children's Fare. Broad- casting, [April 8, 1974], pp. 24-25. Mrs. Bandaranaike Sworn In, (3rd Woman Prime Minister.) New York Times, [May 30, 1970]. Canadian Parliament discusses possibility of analy- sis of current children's TV programming with eye Government fo Ask Peace Corps To Leave Country. New towards regulation of content in effort to curb York Times, [June 25, 1970]. harmful effects. N.T.D. Kanakaratne Named Ambassador To U.S. New York On The Rocky Track Route. S.F. Examiner & Chronicle, Times, [August 25, 1970]. [May 12, 1974], p. 7. Government Gives Parliament New Draft. (illustrations) New Travel. York Times, [January 2, 1971], (IV; 4:1). Government SpursTourism, Spending up 25% in'70. The Unexpected West. S.F. Examiner & Chronicle [May 26, (illustrations) New York Times, [January 18, 1971]. 1974], p. 4. Prime Minister Imposes Curfew Nationwide. Bans Peramuna Travel. Movement, Which Made 25 Attacks the Previous Night. New York Times, [April 7, 1971].

24 Hour Curfew. Radio Appeal to Nation. New York Times, CEYLON [April 10, 1971].

Books Ceylon Civil War. New York Times, [April 15, 1971]. Arasaratnam, Sinnappah. Ceylon. Englewood, N.J.:Pren- tice-Hall, [1964 ] . Sri Lanka Government. Cracks Down On Newspapers. New York Times, [May 8, 1971]. Ceylon Yearbook, 1967. Colombo: Government Press, De- Government Tightens News Censorship. New York Times, partment of Census and Statistics, [1967]. [May 13, 1971].

- 143 - 18 Free Accommodations to AmericanVisitors. New York No. 209 deals with Double Ten celebration, No. Times, [June 13, 1971]. 210 marks the birthday of Chiang.

Government Tightens News Censorship Further. New York China Handbook, 1972-1973. Taiwan: China Publishing Times, [June 17, 1971]. Company, [1973], 64 pp. Thismaterialis prepared,edited,issuedand circulated by Chinese Information Service, New York. The booklet gives many facts for the traveler CHILE about history and culture, government, political affairs, and communications media. Book Wells, Alan. Picture-Tube Imperialism?: The Impact of U.S. There are 80 radio stations and 3 TV networks. Television on Latin America. New York: Orbis Books, [1972]. 141 Questions and Answers About the Republic of China. Chung Hwa Information Service, [1973]. Periodicals An introduction of Taiwan in brief. The 88 page Chilean News Programs. New York Times, [August 8, 1971] p. 16:1. booklet gives the history of the people, govern- ment, industry, agriculture, and free China versus Accord Between Chile and Cuba on Exchange of Weekly Chinese Communism. News Broadcasts Has Proved of Political Importance. New York Times, [August 23, 1971], p. 16: 1. PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Ranstead D. D. Chile Con Allende: With Editorial Comment. Commonweal4h, [December 10, 1971] , pp. 244-245. Books China Pictorial. [1973] . Secretary Suarez reports Chilean government suspends Thispictorialgives information of the current broadcasting of Radio Balmecenda, station of opposi- activities of Mainland China. Asian-African-Latin tion Christian Democratic Party, on charges of serious American Table Tennis Tournament, (No. 11); The offenses against the president and armed forces; San- Tenth National Congress of the Communist Party tiago army garrison commander General A. Pinochet of China, (special issue No. 11). closes down Tribuna, right wing newspaper. New York Times, [December 12, 1971] , p. 7. Geography of China. Foreign Languages Press, [1972]. This booktellsusthebasicfacts,national Schiller, H. Chile: An End to Cultured Colonialism. Society, resources and geographicalfigures of mainland [Mary 1972] , pp. 35.39. China.

Chilean Television Campaigns. New York Times, [August 23, Snow, Edgar. Red China Today. New York: Vintage Books, 1972], p. 16: 1. [1971]. Chilean Communist Party Newspaper Scores Recent Showing This is a revised and updated book "The Other on TV of Film 1984 for its Anti-Communists Character. Side of the River" first published in 1962. New York Times, [March 13, 1973. This serves as a record of China of the 1950's and 1960's, on which tomorrow's China must arise. It Brute Force of Money; ITT's Attempt to Intervene in Chilean will help to show why and how China's historical Politics. New Republic, [April 14, 1973] , pp. 5-6. problems conditioned the political means available for their solution.Itis a first-person narrative. Crime of Silence. New Republic, [October 1, 1973] , p. 14. Snow went to China when he was twenty-two and became a correspondent. He was a life-time expert File Now, Die Later; Press Coverage of Chile's Coup. Time, of China. [October 1, 1973]. p. 56. Some Basic Facts About China. (Supplement "China Recon- Chile's national TV network announces Chilean government structs"), [1974]. orders closing of radio Balmecenda, major station of opposition, for broadcasting irregularities. New York There are ten questions and answers about general Times, [December 2, 1973] , p. 1. information of mainland China. "Every child, beginning in the third grade, is taught Communist controlled pro-government newspaper In Chile English and Chinese. reports licence of Radio Presedente Balmecenda, owned by opposition party, will soon be revoked for irregular- Trade and Tours, Autumn, 1973. Hong Kong: Chinese ities. New York Times, [October 3, 1973] , p. 28. Export Commodities Fair, [1973]. Radio Station Programming. New York Times, [December Has a section about the growing light industry pro- 28, 1973], p. 16: 1. ducts.

PeermanD.Chile's Media Under the Military. Christian Periodicals Century, [March 27, 1974], pp. 333-334. They Listen to Radio Peking. Pacific Islands Monthly, vol. 33, No. 8, [March 1963] , p. 6.

Shortitem about Papua-New Guinea radio listenerspreferringRadio Peking tothe ABC NATIONALIST REPUBLIC OF CHINA Station at Port Moresby.

Books Ching, Frank. Red China Strives to Sway World Opinion. The Cosmorama Pictorial. [1972] . New York Times, [May 14, 1969] , p. 3. This pictorial magazine brings us the current activ- ities and events in the Republic of China.

- 144 i3 Networks Get Ready For China Visit. Broadcasting, [January Havens, A. Eugene, and Glenn, William L. Structural Blocks 24, 19721, pp. 42-43. to Higher Educational Attainment. Internal Colonialism and Structural ChangeinColombia, Edited by A. Peking Buys WUI Earth Station. Broadcasting, [October 30, Eugene Havens and WilliamL. Glenn. New York: 1972] , p. 44. Praeger Publishers, [1970].

How Doctors are Trained in China. San Francisco Chronicle, [April 14, 19731. COOK ISLANDS Fujii,J. Sarnoff in Orient; Invited toVisit Red. China. Electronic News, [September 24, 19731, p. 46. Book Henderson, John W. Area Handbook for Oceania. Washing- China Reconstructs Vol. XXIII, No. 2, [February 19741. ton, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [19711. This is an illustrated monthly magazine printed in This book is one of a series of handbooks designed English, French, Spanish, Arabic and Russian. This to be useful to military and other personnel who issue deals with "Good Crops in Drought Years" need basic facts about social, economic, political and "China's Young Electronics Industry" among and military institutions and practices of the Cook others. Islands.

Schuman, Julian. Ten-year history: China's Mushrooming Periodicals Electronics. San Francisco Chronicle, [April 4, 1974]. Pogo TV Picked Upon in Rarotonga. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 36, No. 1 [January 1956], p. 37. Schuman, Julian. Inflation Not China's Problem. (Honolulu) Short item about American Samoa's television Star-Bulletin, [May 8, 19741. transmissions beingreceivedinRarotonga and "There have been some substantial price decreases . explains why reception is sometimes good. .. in the late 1960's ... radios ... in the midst of the early years of the cultural revolution." Davies, F.R.J. School Broadcasts for Cook Island. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 26, No. 12, [July 1956] , p. 99. A short letter to the editor explaining the situation in re-educational broadcasting in the Cook Islands, COLOMBIA pointing out thereis no organized program and money lacking. Written with reference to story on Books Western Samoa publishedinPacificIslands Avramovic,Dragoslay.Economic Growthof Colombia: Monthly in April 1956. Problems and Prospects. London: The Johns Hopkins University Press, [19721, Nearly All-Maori Radio Staff. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. This is a study of the economic growth of Colom- 29, No. 7, [February 1959] , p. 141. bia. A section is devoted to telecommunications. Short item about the Cook Islands radio system employing only two Europeans; also information Galbraith, W.O. Colombia: A General Survey. London: about sub-stations and revenue. Oxford University Press, [1966]. Broadcasting StationUrgedfor Cooks.PacificIslands Havens, A. Eugene, and Glenn, William L. Structural Blocks Monthly, Vol. 30, No. 1, [August 1959], p. 131. to Higher Educational Attainment. Internal Colonialism Two paragraphs about members of the Cook Island andStructural Change inColombia. Editedby A. Eugene Havens and WilliamL.Glenn. New York: Legislative Council advocating the establishment of Praeger Publishers, [19701. a broadcasting station.

Maul lin,Richard.Soldiers,Guerrillas,andPoliticsin No More Money for Cook Islands Broadcasts. Pacific Islands Colombia. Lexington, Mass.: Lexington Books, [19731. Monthly, Vol. 31, No. 1, [August 1960], p. 119. This book is a study of the militeristic form of Two-paragraph about the lack of funds for educa- government that has taken over Colombia. tional broadcasts.

Simmons, Alan Burtham. The Emergence ofPlanning They'll Make Their Own Transistors. Pacific Islands Monthly, Orientations in a Modernizing Community: Migration, Vol. 31, No. 2, [September 1960], p. 125. Adaptation, and Family Planning in Highland Colombia. Shortitem aboutestablishmentof the Cook New York: Ithaca, [19701. Islands Radio Manufacturing Cooperative Society Limited which plans to produce a low-cost type of Weil, Thomas E. Area Handbook for Colombia. Washington, transistor receiving set. D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, (19701. This book is one of a series of handbooks designed Rarotonga Has Another 'First'. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. to be useful to militar7 and other personnel who 31, No. 7, [February 1961], p. 125. need basic facts about social, economic, political Short item about portable transistor transmitters andmilitaryinstitutions andpracticesof used for inter-island communication. Colombia.

Periodicals Rogers, Everett M. Mass Media Exposure and Modernization Among Colombian Peasants. Public Opinion Quarterly, 29 (4), [Winter, 1965/661, pp. 614-625.

- 145 - COSTA RICA President Johnson inaugurateseducational TV system sponsored by U.S., San Salvador. New York Times, Book [July 8,19681,17:1. Blutstein,HowardI.Area Handbook forCostaRica. Washington, D.C.:U.S. Government Printing Office, Government Station Program Praises Spanish Rebels. New [1970]. York Times, [November 28,1968] , 3:1. This book is one of a series of handbooks designed to be useful to military and other personnel who need basic facts about social, economic, political and military institutions and practices of Costa FIJI Rica. Books UNESCO Aids to Supervise Installation of Educational TV. Belshaw, Ciril G. Under the Ivi Tree: Society and Economic New York Times, [November 14, 1955], p.52. Growth in Rural Fiji. Berkeley: University of California Press, [1964]. First TV Station Opens, San Jose: ABC Part Owners. New York Times, [May 8,1960], p. 14, section V. Brown, Stanley..Men From Under theSky.Rutland, Vermont: Charles E. Tuttle Company, [19731. History of Fiji from late 18th Century until cession to Britain in 1874. ECUADOR Burns, Alan. Fiji. London: Her Majesty's Stationary Office, Books [1963]. Background Notes, Republic of Ecuador. United States Department of State. Washington, D.C.: Government Coulter, John Wesley. The Drama of Fiji: A Contemporary Printing Office, [1971]. History. Rutland, Vermont: Charles Tuttle Co., [1967].

Gore, Peter H. The Highland Campesino, Backward Peasant Henderson, John W. Area Handbook for Oceania. Washing- or Reluctant Pawn: A Study of the Social and Eco- ton, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [19711. nomic Factors Affecting Small Farmer Modernization in This book is one of a series of handbooks designed Four Highland Ecuadorian Communities. New York: to be useful to military and other personnel who Ithaca, [1971]. need basic facts about social, economic, political and military institutions and practices of Fiji. Linke, Liio. Ecuador: Country of Contrasts. London: Oxford University Press, [1960]. Periodicals Another Newspaper and Radio for Lantoba? Pacific Islands Vel lz, Claudio, ed. Latin America and the Caribbean. New Monthly, Vol. 26, No. 7 , [February 19561, p. 121 . York: F.A. Praeger, Inc., [1968]. Spokesman for Fiji Kisan Sung, du Association of Weil, Thomas E. Area Handbook for Ecuador. Washington, cane growers, says group planning to start news- D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [1973]. paper atLantoba and applying for licenseto operate a broadcasting station. Three short para- This book is one of a series of handbooks designed graphs. to be useful to military and other personnel who need basic facts about social, economic, political MLC's Will Use Radio Appeals to Electors. Pacific Islands and military institutions and practices of Ecuador. Monthly, Vol. 27, No. 10, [May 19561, p. 22. Periodicals Two very short paragraphs. Fiji Broadcasting Com- O'Hara, Hazel. The Voice of the Andes. America, XIII, mission has agreed to make time available free to [September 1961J . pp. 27-30. candidates for Fiji Legislature Council.

Newman, JohnF. Radio Newscasting inLatin America. Better Radio Service in Fiji. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 26, Journal of Broadcasting, X [Winter 19651, pp. 25-32. No. 11, [June 1956], p. 102. Six short paragraphs. Fiji Broadcasting Company plans to install new transmitter at Lantoka to improve services. EL SLAVADOR Fiji No Longer Hears the ABC 9 o'clock News. Pacific Islands Books Monthly, Vol. 27, No. 1, [August 19561, p. 20. Blutstein,HowardI.Area Handbook forElSalvador, Washington, D.C.:U.S. Government Printing Office, Nine-paragraph article on discontinuance of Fiji [1971] . Broadcasting Commission rebroadcast of Australian Broadcasting Commission evening news This book is one of a series of handbooks designed program becauseof complicationswithpress to be useful to military and other personnel who agencies; newscast include material from agenices need basic facts about social, economic, political which Fiji Broadcasting Company was not paying andmilitaryinstitutionsandpracticesofEl to use. Salvador.

Godfrey, Henry F. Your El Salvador Guide. New York: Funk A 'Smithy' Man for Suva Post. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 27, No. 4, [November 1956], p. 135. & Wagnalls Company, [19681. Shortarticlereporting appointment ofJohn Periodicals Stannage as manager of Fiji Broadcasting Com- President Johnson Announces Loan for Pilot TV Station for mission; gives brief bio background. School Instruction. The New York Times, [July 8, 19681,17:1.

.146. .2.L1 Fifteen Thousand UnlicensedRadios.PacificIslands Australia Firm Still Interested inFiji Television.Pacific Monthly, Vol. 28, No. 3, [October 1957] , p. 165. Islands Monthly, Vol. 35, No. 3, [March 1964], pp. 122-123. Two paragraphs. Governmentthreatening a campaign to enforce receiver license fee, estimated Plans of Electronic Industries Limited of Australia 30,000 radios in use. Licenses issued total 15,664. to build two television transmitters on Fiji with a Government estimated losing $17,500/year. signal strong enough to be received in Western Samoa and part of Tonga. British Government is Fiji Radio's Santa Claus. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 28, No. 5, December 1957], p. 101. TV Company Registered in Fiji. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. Six-paragraph story on annual financial report of 35, No. 4, [April 1964] , p. 123. -FijiBroadcasting Commission. Givestotals for Short item on the application for a license to expenditures revenues, cites importance of license operate commercial television in Fiji by Fiji Tele- fees in revenue picture. vision Limited.

Fiji's Mr. Hall Is a Busy Man. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. Ran On Tobacco Advertising. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 29, No. 1, [August 1958] , pp. 77 and 79. 35, No. 6, [June 1964], p.49. Article on a Radio Licensing Inspector and his The decision of the Fiji Broadcasting Commission efforts to track down unlicensed radios. ($33,000 to ban cigarette commercials from the radio. Is The Goal). No Television For Fiji Yet. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. First The Set-Then TV (Maybe). Pacific Islands Monthly, 35, No. 6, [June 1964] , pp. 121-122. Vol. 29, No. 1 0 , [May 1959] , p. 117. Decision of theFiji Government that Fijiis not ShortitemabouttheFijiTrading Company ready tor television. Limited in Suva importing and displaying a tele- vision set. The manager plans to experiment with Fiji Should I Nye Television (Rut Not The Commericial reception from Australia. Kind).PacificIslandsMonthly,Vol.40, No. I, [January 1969] , p. 31. 7 V For SuvaMaybe Later,NotYet. PacificIslands Monthly, Vol. 29, No. 11, [ June 1959] , pp. 141-142. Mayday! Mayday! Come In Mayday! Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 40, No. 5 [Mau 1969], p. 55. One column about the problems of bringing tele- vision to Suva. Article on Radio Suva with information on the area it covers, it broadcasts and the station's super- New TransmittersforFijiBroadcasting.P. :ic Islands visor. Monthly, Vol. 30, No. 5, [December 1959] , p. 121. Less English For Fiji Radio And No Television, Pacific Article about efforts to improve the Fiji Broad- Islands Monthly, Vol. 41, No. 3 [March 1970], p. 32. casting Service by having two new 10 kilowatt out- lets operating by the end of 1961. Article about a report by a 12-man Broadcasting Review Committee on how to Improve Fiji radio How Long Will The Islands Keep Television at Bay?, Pacific programs and whether television is feasible in Fiji. Islands Monthly, Vol. 30, No. 7, [February 1960] , p. 15. New Way To Tax Fiji Radio Sets, Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 41, No. 4 [April 1970] , p. 143. One column about a Suva resident picking up perfect image and sound reception from Australia. Two-paragraphs about the proposal that the Fiji Government levy a tax on each radio sold instead of continuing the radio listeners' tax. New Broadcasts From Fiji and Tarawa.PacificIslands Monthly, Vol. 30, No. 10, [May 1960] , p. 127. Radio Link, Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 43. No. 3 [March Short article about a new English language broad- 1972] , p. 29. cast outlet in Fiji and a new more powerful trans- about a $15,000 grant fromthe mitter at Tarawa which should be operating within Shortitem CarnegieFoundationwhich madepossiblean a month. experimentalsatellitecommunicationslink-up between Fiji and. Hawaii. Fiji's Radio Correspondent. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 32, No. 8, [March 1962], p. 25. Getting Bounce Into Radio Fiji, Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. One-paragraph with further comment on the objec- 43, No. 5 [May 1972] , p. 83. tivity of the ABC. Discussesplansto broadcast programs on one network inEnglish and Fijian and on another 1Vay.PacificIslands Fill'sBroadcasting Service PaysIts networkinHindustaniandEnglish. TheFiji Monthly Vol. 32, No. 11, [June 1962] , p. 23. Broadcasting Company plans to reduce the number One column disputing the facts about Fiji radio in of English language programs. a letter to the editor in the May issue.

School's In! On the Coconut Radio. Pacific Islands Monthly FRENCH POLYNESIA Vol. 32, No. 12, [July 1962] , pp. 91-92. Discusses education programs directed to Fiji class- Books rooms in English. Henderson, John W. Area Handbook for Oceania. Washing- ton, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 11971]. He Makes Friends For Fiji on the Air Waves. Pacific Islands This book is one of a series of handbooks designed Monthly Vol. 32, No. 5, [December 1963] , p. 81. to be useful to military and other personnel who Article about a ham radio operator in Fiji. need basic facts about social, economic, political and military institutions and practices of French Polynesia.

- 147 - 2 Thompson, Virginia and Ad loff, Richard. The French Pacific GUAM Islands: French Polynesia and New Caledonia. Berkeley: University of California Press, [19711. Books The aim of this book is to examine the phenomena Beardsley, Charles. Guam: Past and Present. Tokyo, Japan responsible for the French Island's present tran- and Rutland, Vermont: Charles E. Tuttle Co., 6th print- sitional situation. It will also indicate the problems ing 1973, [1964). that their inhabitants will inevitably face when and Henderson, John W. Area Handbook for Oceania. Washing- iftheislands'statusischanged from a U.S. Government Printing Office, [19711. quasi-colonial to a soveriegn one. ton, D.0 This book is one of a series of handbooks designed Periodicals to be useful to military and other personnel who Radio Tahiti. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 26, No. 12, [July need basic facts about social, economic, political 19561, p. 23. and military institutions and practices of Guam. Radio Tahiti appears to have increased power. Now heard well throughout E. Pacific. Gives schedule Holmes, J.R., ed. This Is Guam. Agana: Pacific Press, [19531. and frervienry. Two short paragraphs.

RadioTahiti.PacificIslands Monthly, Vol. 27, No. 1, [August 19561, p. 59. GUATEMALA One paragraph at the bottom of left column. No Books headline. Gives change of schedule for Radio Tahiti Adams, RichardN.CrucifixionbyPower:Essays on English news broadcast. GuatemalanNationalSocialStructure,1944-1966. Austin, Texas: University of Texas Press, [19701. New Caledonia,Tahiti to Navy TV, Too. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 35, No. 11, [November 19641, pp. Dombrowski, John. Area Handbook for Guatemala. Washing- 63-64. ton, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [19701. Plans of the French government to install television This book is one of a series of handbooks designed stations in Tahiti and New Laledonia. io be useful to military and other personnel who need basic facts about social, economic, political Tahiti Has TV, Too. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 36, No. 11, andmilitaryinstitutions andpracticesof [November 19651, p. 40. Guatemala. One paragraph about the firsttelevisiontrans- mission in Tahiti. Periodicals President Ubico SignsBill for Purchase of Broadcasting It's All 'Go' For French Pacific TV. Pacific Islands Monthly, Stotioa, New York Times, [May 8,19371, p. 21. Vol. 36, No. 12, [December 19651, p. 8. Alisky, M. Red Radio in Guatemala. Radio Daily, [June 24, Information about Tele Nounea and Tele Tahiti 19541, p.6. Central American Radio. Quarterly of and speculation over how much a television license Film, Radio and Television, 10(59), [Fall 1955]. will cost. Educational TV Programs Under Alliance for Progress. All Aboard: Some PacificSpecifics.S.F.Examiner & (Descriptivetitleonly). New York Times, [May 5, Chronicle, [May 26,19741, p. 4. 19631, p.3. Travel.

HONDI I RAS GILBERT AND ELLICE ISLANDS Book Books Blutstein, Howard I. Area Handbook for Honduras. Washing- Coates,Austin. WesternPacificIslands.London:Her ton, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [19711. Majesty's Stationery Office, [19701. This book is one of a series of handbooks designed This book is one of a series of illustrated volumes to be useful to military and other personnel who dealing withtheUnited Kingdom's dependent need basic facts about social, economic, political territories, the way their people live, and how they andmilitaryinstitutions andpracticesof are governed. Honduras.

Reuhen, Olaf and Shadbolt, Robert. Isles of the South Pacific. Washington, D.C.: National Geographics Special Publications Divisions, [19681. HONG KONG

Periodicals Periodicals Hong Kong to Get Commercial Television.Broadcasting, New Broadcast Station for Tarawa. Pacific Islands Monthly, [January 31,19661. Vol. 29, No. 7, [February 19591, p. 147. International Group, Including Time,Inc., and NBC Get Short item about improved broadcast service in the Franchise for First Television Station. New York Times, Gilberts which should begin September 1959. [January 27,19661, p. 67.

Plake, Marvin. El /ice Islands. Travel, [December 1968], pp. Hong Kong. Television Age, [July 3,19671, pp. 64-65. 50-51.

148 3 Harrison, H. Hong Kong's New Dialect Problems. Variety, Nayar, B. K. Dr. Television inIndia. ASWA Newsletter, [April 14, 1971] , p. 70. (AsianScienceWritersAssoc.), No. 3, [December 1971]. Too Much Outside Film in Hong Kong TV. Broadcasting, 450 million peoples of India in rural areas. Has [November 15, 1971] , p. 57. surface area of 2.8 million sq, Kms. 8 states in- habited by 550 million people speaking 15 main Tele- Installation of Earth Stations.International languages. 82% ofthis populationlivein rural communications Journal, 39, [February 1972],51. areas. 70% are in agricultural activities. Main com- municationwas 70 SoundBroadcasting radio Smash Telethon in Hong Kong. Variety, [August 23, 1972], stations. As of 15 September 1959 Experimental p. 42. T.V. Service started by India Radio at Delhi. Need educationof peoples to getlevelof academic Hong Kong Set for 2 More TV Outlets. Advertising Age, knowledge as a prerequisite. Need Satellite system [August 28, 1972] , p. 14. Economics aspect. The conventional ground-based terrestrial system, supplemented by J. Channing, (Dr. of Education). Evaluation of First Year Ed. part-time usage of Communication Satellites thus TV. Educational Television, Hong Kong: Government appears to bc, more suitable for adaptation in India. Printer, Vol. 1, No. 1, [September 1972]. The main advantages are: 1) Flexibility to national Equipped ETV Production Center. Programs have linguistic needs; 2)Developments and availability of been drafted in consultation with teachers com- funds; 3) Technology, hardware and know-how can mittee. ETV syllabuses closely related to those in be made available indigenously and capital outlay Primary schools. Team effort: Film; Photographic is less compared to that for satellite-based system; and graphic arts. Pre-recorded 3 months. 100,000 and 4) The recurring costs may be higher but it will 3rd year primary school pupils reached first year. ensure greater utilization of indigenous technical Basic subjects English, Chinese, mathematio, talent. SocialStudies. I Program per week in each of Main portion of rural population is still to be pre- above 30 week broadcasting year accompanied paredto make them properly receptiveif main by detailed notes for teachers and pupils. Presume object is to be edification and not entertainment. careful preparation and application of each lesson. Progress in adding Primary and Secondary Schools For more than one reason it is inevitable that we until equal 500,000 children':' will use satellites for telecommunication if not TV. Why not incorporate TV system also? Edmonds, Miss Olive M. ETV in the Classroom. Educational Television, Hong Kong: Government Printer, H, Vol. 2, INDONESIA No. 1, [1972-1973]. Vocabulary development. Visual aid to learning. Books Men Behind Kung hooey. Time, [ June 11, 1973] , p. 75. Agassi, Judith B. Mass Media in Indonesia. Cambridge, Mass: Center forInternationalStudies, Mass Int. of Tech. 1969.

INDIA Eschenbach, Josef. Rural Broadcasting in Indonesia: Report Books After Two Years of Experience, Djakarta: January, Broadcasting in India. Ministry of Information and Broad- 1972. casting. Government of India: Recorder Press, [1972j. Feith. Herbert. The Decline of Constitutional Democracy in The Research and Reference Division, Ministry of Informa- Indonesia.Ithaca,N.Y.:i."rnellUniversityPress, tion and Broadcasting Government of India, ed. India: (19621. A Reference Annual 1973. New Delhi: Publications DivisionMinistryof Information andBroadcasting, Hughes,John.IndonesianUpheaval. New York: David Government of India, Patiala House, [1973). McKay Co., Inc., (1967J. This compiled work of references carries informa- tion on diverse aspects of India's national life. Koch, C.Indonesia:EducationalBroadcasting.Paris: UNESCO, [1968]. Kale, Pramod. Satellite Instructional Television Experiment. AIAA Paper No. 71-884, New York: American Institute McVey, Ruth T., ed. Indonesia. New Haven, Conn.: South- of Aeronautics and Astronoautics, [1971]. east Asia Studies, Yale University, [1967].

Shinn, Rinn-Sup. Area Handbook for India. Washington, Ailsa. A Short History of Indontsia. New York: D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 119701. Praeger Publishers, [19701.

This book is one of a series of handbooks designed Periodicals to be useful to military and other personnel who TV Introduced inIndonesia.International Commerce, need basic facts about social, economic, political [January 28, 1963], p. 16. and military institutions and practices of India. Sheehan, Neil. Jakarta TV Fare Heavy on Politics. New York Periodicals Times, [July 18,19651, p. 5. Weatherall, Ernest. India's Golden Age of Radio. Variety, [November 8, 19671, p. 45. Suharto Curbs Broadcasts. New York Times, [January 20, 1968], p. 10. !ndig's Backward TV Development. Variety, [February 21, 19681, p.52. Distant Sounds of Flutes.Holiday,[February1970] 47:32-37. India's Advertisers Plug for Commercials on Nation's TV Net- work If and When [May 6, 1970], p. 58.

- 149 - 124 25th Anniversary of Independence Marked in Jakarta With Sony Turns on Color Television. Magazine of Wall Street, Big Parade. New York Times, [August 18, 1970], p. [July 6, 1968], 122:27-9. 6:4. Abercombie, Thomas. Kansai: Japan's Historic Heartland. Lubis, Mochtar, et.al. Indonesia: A Special Report. The National Geographic, [March 19701. Times (London), [August 17, 19711, pp. 1-VI. Japan'sRemarkableIndustrial Machine.Business Week, Indonesian Government in Move Against Spread of Com- [March 7, 19701. munist Influences. New York Times, [March 26, 19721, p. 14:5. Coleman, Howard C. Japan's Set Ownership at 90% of Home Indonesian government in move against spread of Saturation A Phenomenon. Variety, [April 8, 19701, pp. 91-100. Communist influences,imposescensorship regulations for all imported records, recorded tapes Russians Are Coming? Newsweek, [April 13, 19701. and cassettes containing Chinese songs. Promoting Russian ProduCts on Japanese TV. China Reportedly Toned Down Radio Broadcasts. New York Times, [May 30, 19721, p. 24:4. TV SetTiff: Japan Out Of Focus.SeniorScholar, China reportedlytoned down radio broadcasts [September 28, 19701. which denounced President Suharto's government Revolt of Mama-San. Time, [December 7, 1970]. in efforts to reconcile 2 countries differences. Boycott against buying home-built color TV sets. Fields,Dorothy. Indonesia'sOverlookedIslands.San Francisco Examiner and Chronicle, [January 20, 19741. Boycott Tunes Down Japans TV Makers. Business Week, [March 6, 19711. Travel. Henry, J. Ratings Aren't Everything in Japan. Variety, [April The Dream Still Comes AliveBali. Travel Leisure, Vol. 4, 28, 19711, p.53. No. 3, [March 19741. Belton,J. Crucified Lovers of Mizoguchl. Film Quarterly, Greenway, H.D.S. Investment Woes in Indonesia. Honolulu [Fall 19711, pp. 15-19. Advertiser, (Washington Post Service), [May 11, 19741. Japan Foreign Competition for Educational TV, Top Award for US Show Sesame Street.New York Times, [November 16, 19711, p. 90. JAPAN Fukuyama Center of the Hiroshima Television Company. Books Japan, [March 19721, p. 14. Broadcasting in Japan: A Historical Review. Tokyo: Nippon Hoso Kyokai, [19641. Belt, F.H. What's Different About Japanese Color TV? Pop- ular Electronics, [April 19721. Cassirer,R.Henry.Television Teaching Today.Paris: UNESCO, [19601. Cultural Exchange: Japanese - American.Broadcasting, [August 28, 19721, p. 5. Education and Bruadcasting in Japan. Japan: Ministry of Education, Government of Japan, [19691. Japanese Lag in Color TV Race. Business Week, [November 4, 19721. The in japan. Tokyo: Radio and Television Cultural Research Institute, [1967] . Lachenbruch, D. Report from Tokyo. Radio Electronics, [January 19731. Japan NAB Handbook. japan: National Association of Com- mercial Broadcasters in japan, [19691. Made inJapan Meets Made intheU.S.Broadcasting, [February 12, 19731, p. 60. The Japan of Today. japan: Ministry of Foreign Affairs, [19701. N.Y. Festival This Week Opens Japanese Exchange. Broad- casting, [March 19, 19731, p. 126. Japan Statistical Yearbook 1972. Bureau of Statistics, ed., Office of the Prime Minister, [19721. Colour Television: Fending Off the Japanese. Economist, Statisticalrevueofjapan,from banking and [July 21, 1973], p. 75. finance to housing, to communications. Japan Seeks Broadcast Satellite. Aviation World, [August 13, NHK Today and Tomorrow. japan: japan Broadcasting Cor- 19731, p.19. poration (Nippon Hoso Kyokai), [February 19721. Moskowitz, Milton. It's U.S. vs. Japan In the TV Field. San Nishimoto, Mitoui. The Development of Educational Broad- Francisco Chronicle, [April 6, 19741. casting inJapan. Tokyo: Sophia University Press in cooperation with Charles E. Tuttle Company, [19691. Bartlett, Tony. Japan Tourism to Isles Up 30%. Honolulu Star Bulletin, [May 16, 19741. Norman, E. Herbert. japan's Emergence as a Modern State. New York: Institute of Pacific Relations, [19601. Given, John C. Fortunes Made in Real Estate: Japan in Wild Land Boom. Honolulu Star Bulletin, [May 16, 19741, Periodicals Japan Becomes Top TV Nation. Broadcasting, [February 5, 19681.

- 150- SOUTH KOREA Halloran, Richard. Japan and Korea Curbing Enmity. New York Times, [August 27, 19721, p. 4. Books Area Handbook for the Republic of Korea. American Uni- Tokyo Offers Soft Loans of $170- Million to Seoul. New versity, Foreign Area Studies Division. Washington, D.C.: York Times, [ September 7, 19721, p. 61. U.S. Government Printing Office, [19691. Seoul's Military Chiefs Back President in Martial Law. New Catholic Broadcasters of Asia. Sponsored by UNDA/ASIA. York Times, [October 19, 19721, p. 3. Quezon City, Philippines: Radio Veritas, [19711. Teacher's College To Reopen, After Easing of Martial Law. Chung, Kyung Cho. Korea: The Third Republic. New York: New York Times, [October 20, 19721, p. 3. MacMillan Co., 119711. Schwarz, Daniel. The Presidential Issue, Now Korea. New Korea Annual 1972. 9th ed. Seoul, Korea: Hapdong News York Times, [October 22, 19721, Sec. 4, p. 12. Agency, [19721. An annual report on South Korea from climate to Schwarz,Daniel.Falling Dominoes. New York Times, communications. [November 5, 19721, sec. 4, p. 14.

Periodicals Troops Withdraw In Seoul. New York Times, [November 20, Hu !seri, A.L. Radio Education in Korea. Educational Broad- 19721,p.2. casting Review, [December 19671. Curbs Are EasedInSouthKorea. New York Times, Chang, Yong. Telecommunications and Postal Services in [December 14, 19721, p. 9. Korea. Korea Journal, [ January 19691. Park Is Named To A Third Term By Electoral Body In Seoul. New Korean TV Station Books 80 percent of Available Time New York Times, [December 23, 19721 , p. 6. in First Week. Advertising Age, [September 22, 19691. Halloran, Richard. Park Said To Plan Changes To Extend Conferees Agree on $7.8-Billion Foreign Aid Bill. New York Tenure In Seoul New York Times, [October 20, 19731, Times, [January 8, 19701, p. 8. P. 3.

Kim, Samuel. Korea Acts to Temper Growth. New York Times, [January 19, 19701, p. 59. NORTH KOREA Skyline of Seoul Rises Proud and Gleaming. New York Times, [ January 19, 19701, p. 63. Books Area- Handbook For North Korea. American University, McNamara toVisit Korea, New York Times, [April 30, Foreign Areas Studies Division. Washington, D.C.: U.S. 19701, p. 57. Government Printing Office, [19691.

Seoul Indicates Four for Poem. New York Times, Dune 21, Periodicals 19701, p. 24. Schramm, Wilbur, and Riley, J.W., Jr. Communication In The Sovietized As Demonstrated In Korea. American Sociol- Shabecuff,Philip.South Korea SacrificesLiberties for ogical Review, Vol. 16, pp. 756-757. Security and F;onomic Growth. New York Times, [June 25, 19701, p. 15. Shinn, Rinn-Sup. Area Handbook For North Korea. Washing- ion, u.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [19691. U.S. Aid Official Assures Senn! ar. Economic Help. New This book is one of a series of handbooks York Times, jeptember 19,19701, p. 7. to be useful to milUary and other personnel who need basic facts about social, economic, political South Korea Growth Slows. New York Times, [ January 18, and military institutions and practices of North 19711, p.52. Korea.

South Koreans' Set 3D Five Year Plan. New York Times, Korean Solution. Time, [April 5, 19711, p. 26. [February 14, 19711, p. 23. The War - Has It Passed. Time, [ July 26, 19711, p. 17. Students Battle Police in Seoul. New York Times, [February 14, 19711, p. 23. A Message To All Who Will Listen. Time, [ July 17, 19721,.p. 22. Students Battle Police in Seoul. New York Times, [April 7, 19711, p. 8. Power Grab. Time, [October 30, 19721, p. 44.

Korean Farmers Leave The Land. New York Times, [April Political 11, 19711,p. 7. President For Life. Time, [November 6, 19721, p. 69. Shabecoff, Philip. South Korea's Economy Booming With Cheap Labor. New York Times, [May 12, 19711, p. 57. Political

Jitters In Seoul. New York Times, 'December 12, 19711, sec. 4, p. 2.

Halloran, Richard. Investments Up For South Korea. New York Times, [August 15, 19721, p. 55.

Halloran, Richard. South Korea Debates Parks Leadership. New York Times, [August 18, 19721.

151 - LAOS Gould, James W. The United States and Malaysia. Cambridge, Massachusetts: Harvard University Press, [1969]. Books The purpose of this book is to show that Malaysia Laos: Capsule Facts for the Armed Forces. United States can live in peace with Singapore and Burnei, and Department of Defense, Washington, D.C.: Government how thisremarkable development came about. Printing Office, [1968] . Also to tell how Americans have contributed to this development and to suggest how the develop- Toye, Hugh. Laos: Buffer State of Battleground. London: ment will continue. Oxford University Press, [1968]. Malaysia Official Year Book. Federal Department of Informa- Viravong, Maha Sila. History of Laos. New York Paragon tion with Cooperation of Ministries and Departments of Book Reprint Corp., [1964]. the Malaysian Government Press by Thor Beng Chong, A.M.N., [1969]. Whitaker, Donald P. Area Handbook for Laos. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [1972]. Purcell, Victor. Malaysia. New York: Walker & Co., [1965]. This book is one of a series of handbooks designed to be useful to military and other personnel who Periodicals need basic facts about social, economic, political. . Merkey, Sanford. Malaysian T.V., Now In Its Third Year, Has and military institutions and practices of Laos. a Dialect Problem. Variety, (June 23, 1965], pp. 53-54.

Periodicals Doi, Gordon. T.V. in Malaysia. Variety, [March 29, 1967], p. Indochina. Time, [April 5, 1971] , p. 20. 54.

Incident on Route 9. Time, [April 5, 1971], p. 25. Television Around the World. Television Age, "International Issue," [January 1, 1968] , p. 32. What It Means. Time, [April 5, 1971]. Meng, Leong Hew. First Secretary, Information, Personal The War. Time, [April 12, 1971], p. 24. LetterofInformation About Malaysian Television. [November, 1971]. Indochina. Time, [May 10, 1971], pp. 24-25. Snow, Crocker Jr. Malaysia: A 'Combustible' Melting Pot. Laos the Twilight Zone. Time, [August 16, 1971] . Honolulu Advertiser, [May 11, 1974], (The Boston Globe). Dark Events. Time, [October 23, 1972], pp. 47 -48. McRae, Roddy, Pulau Pinang. Pacific, Vol. 3. No. 1, [1974] , Political. (Quarterly).

The Shape of Peace. Time, [November 6, 1972], pp. 14-17. MEXICO

Another Pause in the Pursuit of Peace. Time, [November 13, Book 1972], p. 18. Emery, Walter B. National and International Systems of Broadcasting: Their History, Operation and Control. Political East Lansing, Michigan: Michigan State University Press, [1969]. The Dance Around the Fire. Time, [November 20, 1972] , p, 43. Periodicals Vladimir, Andrew. Mexican Media Mix. Media in Decision, Final Push for Peace. Time, (January 29, 1973], pp. 10-11. [July, 1967] , p, 14.

Lowry, Dennis T. Radio, TV and Literacy in Mexico. Journal MACAO of Broadcasting, X IV, [Spring, 1970], pp. 239-244.

Book Government to Explain Mexican FM Plan.Broadcasting, Pastore, Arthur R. Jr., Macao Centuries Away From Mod [June 26, 1972], p.52. Orient. Honolulu Advertiser and Sunday Star-Bulletin [May 19, 1974]. FCC, State Departnient Have a Date in Mexico City. Broad- casting, [July 10, 1972] , p. 29.

Progress Seen on Mexican FM Problem.Broadcasting, MALAYSIA [August 7, 1972] , p. 35.

Books Any Real Progress in Border Dispute With Tijuana FM's? Emerson, Rupert. Malaysia. Singapore: University of Malaya Broadcasting, [August 14, 1972], p. 33. Press, [1969] . The border shoot out in broadcasting terms as the U.S. tries to reach an accord with our Mexican Henderson, H., and F. Goodship. Malayia: A National Radio neighbors to the South. and TelevisionTrainingCenter.Paris: UNESCO, (1969], p.72. U.S., Mexico Sign That Deal for San Diego But Without the Small Print. Broadcasting, [Novemb r 13, 1972] , p. Henderson, John W. Area Handbook for Malaysia. Washing- 28. ton, D.C.: Government Printing Office, [1970]. Mexico and the U.S. have long had hassles about_ This book is one of a series of handbooks designed interference on each others' frequencies and those to be useful to military and other personnel who big 100KW transmitters across the border. This need basic facts about social, economic, political article deals with a treaty to end all of that ... at and military institutions and practices of Malaysia. least on one frequency. Mexican TV Networks Set Joint Venture. Advertising Age, problems that their inhabitants will inevitably face [January 29,19731, p. 64. when and if the islands' status is changed from a quasi-colonial to a sovereign one. XETV Turned Down. Broadcasting, [April 30,19731, p. 45. Henderson, John W. Area Handbook for Oceania. Washing- Border Fight Flares Anew. Broadcasting, [March 26,19731, ton, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [19711. pp. 82-83. This book is one of a series of handbooks designed The never ending battle between the U.S. and to be useful to military and other personnel who Mexico over frequencies and power continues to be need basic facts about social, economic, political waged. Anotherhasslebrews betweenthe andmilitaryinstitutions and practices of New Americans and our neighbors to the South. Caledonia.

Mexico Tightens Regulations on TV Programs. Advertising Periodicals Age, [April 30,19731 , p. 68. New Broadcasting Stationfor Noumea.PacificIslands Monthly, Vol. 29, No. 7, [February 19591, p.79. Short item about the radio stationa.t Noumea changing from short-wave to the regular broadcast NAURU band with reception as far as Auckland.

Book Radio Noumea 'Might Suffer Interference.' Pacific Islands Viviani, Nancy. Nauru. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, Monthly, Vol. 31, No. 5, [December 19601, p. 128. [1970). Three paragraphs about possible interference of Periodicals Radio Noumea in New Caledonia by a new New 'Good Morning,Thisis RadioNauru'.PacificIslands Zealand Broadcasting Service transmitter. Monthly, Vol. 39, No. 8, [August 19681,13.32. One-column about the opening of Radio Nauru France Gets A Move On (No One Knows Why) With Noumea's Television. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 36, which broadcasts in Enigish and Nauruan and has No.7, [July 19651, p.51. shows originating in Nauru and relays from Radio Australia. Article is about the French government building a television station in Noumea. Includes information President of Nauru Sees Queen. The Times, (London), [May about why they are anxious to complete it and the 23,19701, p. 4. resistance they face.

BBC Not Welcome in Nauru. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. Australian TV Beats the Local Variety to Noumea's Sets. 42, No. 2, [February 19711, p..,40. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 36, No. 11, [November 19651, p. 40. Article about a BBC current affairs reporter and his being refused entry permits to Shortitemabouttelevisionbroadcastsfrom. Nauru to film the third anniversary of Nauru's in- Australia being received by viewers in Noumea. dependence and also scenes from everyday life on the island. Caledonian Politician Goes on Television - For The First Time. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 41, No. 4, [April Nauru Aids Iv.ighbors in Pacific. San Francisco Examiner, 1970), p. 103. [October 31,19721, p.1 '2 One column about the Caledonian Deputy to the French National Assembly being allowed to speak on Noumea television. Previously Caledonian pol- NEPAL iticians had been deniedthe use of television becal.1. ^ they weren't members of national parties Books constituted in metropolitan France. Harris, George L. Area Handbook for Nepal, Bhutan and Sikkim. Washington D.C.: U. S. Government Printing HaveYou Picked Up Radio Noumea? PacificIslands Office, [19731. Monthly, Vol. 41, No. 5, [May 19701, p. 38. This book is one of a series of handbooks designed Short Item about Radio Noumea expanding its to be useful to military and other personnel who broadcastcoveragebytransmittingshort-wave need basic facts about social, economic, political from St. Marie Island. Includes broadcast hours and military institutions and practices of Nepal. and frequencies. Periodicals TV Station Planned, Kathmandu Valley. New York Times, [May 24,19631, p. 6:5. NEW HEBRIDES

Tibet-Nepal New Radio Link in Operation. New York Times, Books [September 30,19631, p. 43:3. Johnson, Martin E. Cannibal-land: Adventures With a Camera in the New Hebrides. Houghton-Mifflin, [19221.

NEW CALCDONIA Harrisson, Thomas H. Savage Civilization. Knopf, [19371.

Books Belshaw, Cyril S. Changing Melanesia. Oxford University Thompson, Virginia and Richard Adloff. The French Pacific Press, 11954). Islands: Ffench Polynesia and New Caledonia. Berkeley: University of California Press, [19711. Smith, Mary Benton. Islands of the South Pacific. Menlo The aim of this book is to examine the phenomena Park, Calif.: Lane Press, [1966). responsiblefortheFrenchIsland'spresent transitionalsituation.Itwillalsoindicatethe

- 153 128 Periodicals Stringer, Gilbert H. The Establishment of Private TV Trans- Annual Report. New Hebrides British National Service Infor- lators in New Zealand. EBU Review, 96, Part B, [March mation Department[19711. 19661, p.24.

Islands Await Americans. (map, illustrations), New York Commercial Operation Sought in New Zealand. Broadcasting, Times, [March 20,19711. [February 17,19671.

Description of Attractions. New York Times, [June 21, Stringer, Gilbert H., et. al. The New Zealand Broadcasting 19701, X:25. Corporation. EBU Review, [Janaury 1964], p. 18.

Travel. How Independent is New Zealand's Broadcasting Corpora- tion. Journalism Quarterly, [Spring 19691, p. 105 . John Frum Movement. (map), New York Times, [April 19, 1970]. New Zealand's TV Policies Draw Blast by Opposition Chief. Advertising Age, [September 8,19691, p. 78. French-British Dual Administration. (map, illustrations), New York Times, [April 11,19701. Toogood, Alex. New Zealand Broadcasting. A Monopoly in Action.Journal of Broadcasting, XIV (1),[Winter J. Donald Describes Art. (map, illustrations), New York 1969-70]. Times, [May 16,19711, X:7. Benchley, Peter. New Zealand's Bountiful South Island. Travel. National Geographic, [January 19721.

Tax Benefits Bring Companies. (map), New York Times, New Zealand PM Will Keep TV in Government Hands. Adver- [May 10,1971]. tising Age, [December 11,19721.

1972 Economic Review. New York Times, [January, 19731. New Zealand Government Blocks TV Channel Liscensing Move. Advertising Age, [April 2,19731, p. 25.

NEW ZEALAND New Zealand TV Boosts Local Fare. Advertising Age, [June 25,19731, p. 24. Becks The Broadcasting Future For New Zealand. Report of the Kleiner, Dick. New Zealand, Happiness is Being Behind. San committee on broadcasting. Presented to the House of Francisco Examiner and Chronicle, [March 3,19741, p. Representatives by leave. Wellington, [July 31,19731. 5. A new system of control and operation of broad- casting (including television) in New Zealand under Travel. publicly owned but competitive channels. The committee consisted of Professor Kenneth Adam, C.B.E., of London; Professor Robert McDonald NICARAGUA Chapman, Aukland; Dr. John Lochiel Robson, C.B.E., Wellington; and Dorothea Frances Turner, Book Wellington. Me yer,HarveyK.HistoricalDictionaryof Nicaragua. Metuchen, N.1.: The Scarecrow Press Inc., [19721. Public Law. Act to make better provision for the carrying on A compiled study of historical names and activities of radio and television broadcasting services; to in Nicaragua. the Broadcasting Council of New Zealand. Radio New Zealand, Television Service One, and Television Two; to Periodicals define the functions and powers of those bodies; and to Nicaraguan President Broadcasts Health Plea. New York provide for certain other matters in relation to radio and Times, [November 13,1936], p. 2. television broadcasting. No. 116, New Zealand, [1973] . Nicaragua Gets First TV Station. New York Times, [July 7, iudicals 1956], p. 51. Radio-NZ Gives Poor Service. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 27, No. 1, [August 1956] , p. 20. Radio and TV 'Muzzle.' Hispanic American Report, XIII, No. Eight-paragrapharticlepointing out that New 10, [December 1960] , p. 686. Zealand Broadcasting Service shortwave programs intended for New Zealand territories are poorly NicaraguansPrefer Japanese Radios.Foreign Commerce received. Low power and low budget. Stresses the Weekly, [April 3,1961], p. 35. need for improved news programs. Alisky, Marvin. The End of Nicaragua's Radio Freedom. New Zealand 'Calls the Cook?. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. Journal of BroadeastingdFall 1961] , pp. 311-314. 30, No. 5, [December 1959] , p. 43. Riots Provoked by CensorshipBill.Hispanic American One paragraph about a new Radio New Zealand Report, XV, No. 7, [September 1962], p.599. program conducted in the Maori language. Literacy Campaign Begun. Hispanic American Report, XVII, TV Importers Receive A Short Circuit.PacificIslands No. 2, [April 1964] , p. 123. Monthly, Vol. 31, No. 2, [September 1960] , p. 123. Short item about New Zealand raising the duty on Reforms Asked for Judiciary and Radio Code. Hispanic television sets brought by residents from Fiji where American Report, XVII, No. 3, [May 1964], p. 218. they are much less expensive; also from August, Auckland area residents will have to pay an annual television license fee.

4 NORFOLK ISLAND New York Times, Section 6, [April 13,1967]p. 18.

Periodicals Third Year of Television. EBU Review, No. 103, Part B, Norfolk Island's Radio Station Under Flre. Pacific Islands [May 1967], p.64. Monthly, Vol. 33, No. 1, [August 1962], p. 131. Technical Development of Radio Pakistan.Tele- Dispute betweentheNorfolkIslandAdmin- communications Journal, [ July 1967] , p.240. istration and the NorfolkIslandCouncil over extending the broadcast service of the Admin- New York Times. [March 7,1971] , p. 3:6. istration's radio station. Yahya Kyan warns against secession in radio broad- First Television Picked Up on Norfolk Island. Pacific Islands cast to nation. Monthly, Vol. 35, No. 1, [January 1964]p. 40. New York Times. [March 27,1971] , p. 1:8. Short item about a man picking up television channtis from Australia on Norfolk Island with the Pakistanradio monitored inIndia reports that only television on the island. Sheik Mujibur Rahman was arrested only hours after he proclaimed East Pakistan independent. Pakistan radio reports 24 hour curfew in Dacca was NIUE lifted for a 9 hour period indicating that the army was in control of the city. Periodicals There's A Bright New Light Life on Niue. Pacific Islands New York Times. [March 27,1971]p. 1:8. Monthly, Vol. 39, No. 4, [April 1968] , p. 61. Radio stationbroadcastsproclamation of an Three paragraphs about the government on Niue independent people's republic. Most sources of buying 300 Japanese radios to sell to the island's communication with E. Paksitan broken off with inhabitants so they can listen to the new radio reports of uprising coming mainly from India news station. dispatches.

Nlue's Only Telly Fan. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 42, No. New York Times. [March 28,1971]p. 1:8. 9, [September 1971] , pp. 43-45. Clandestine radio says General Khan assassinated. Short item about the owner of the only television Official Pakistan radio says army in full control of on Niue and his reception from Hawaii and Pago E. Pakistan, Mujibur denies in broadcast he was Page. arrested.

New York Times. [March 28,1971], p. 1:7. OKINAWA New York Times correspondent S. H. Schanberg one of 35 foreign newsmen expelled from East Periodicals Pakistan, describes first outbreak of fighting in KSBK Broadcasts only in English for Americans, KSAR Dacca. Broadcasts in Japanese. New York Times, [September 3, 1955],p.31. New York Times. [March 28,19711 , p. 3:5. Far Eastern Broadcasting. Protestant Missionary Company PakistanproteststoIndia about interference. Builds 100 Kw Radio Transmitter, Okinawa. Able to ChargesIndiannewsreportsof fightingare Reach All of China and Part of USSR. New York Times, exaggerated and designed tmalign Pakistan. [August 24,1959] p. 18. New York Times. [March 28,1971] , p. 3:4. Silencing of Radio Stations Protested. hispanic American Militaryauthorities expel! 25 foreign newsmen Report, XIII, No. 8, [October 1960], p. 515. after confining them to hotelin Dacca for 48 hours. Soldiers threaten to shoot newsmen if they left. Correspondents searched and their notes, films PAKISTAN and tiles confiscated.

Books New York Times. [March 29,1971]p. 1:8. Pakistan Yearbook. Dacca: Government of Pakistan Printing, [1970]. Government continuesstrictcensorship.A.P. reporter states armyinfull control of Dacca. Zaman, Rafe-uz, ed. Pakistan Yearbook 1971. Karachi, Pakistan radio reports lifeis returning to normal. Dacao: National Publishing House, LTD, [1971]. Clandestine radio set up by rebels say liberation army is moving towards Dacca. This compiled study is of Pakistan, its land, people, government, transportation and much more. New York Times. [March 29,1971]p. 1:5. Pakistan Yearbook 1970. Government of Pakistan Printing, Illustration of televised scene of fighting in Dacca. [1970]. Film smuggled out of East Pakistan by ABC News.

Central Statistical Office, ed. 25 Years of Pakistan in Statist- New York Times. [March 30, 1971 ]p. 1:1. ics 1947-1972. Karachi' The Manager of Publications, Two English-language newspapersinDacca [1972]. reportedly resume publication.

Periodicals New York Times. [March 31,1971]p. 2:6. Butt, Ashgar. Radio Pakistan Today. EBU Review, No. 81, Part B, [September 1963] p. 28. TV news shows General Khanmeetingwith officials.

-155-130 New York Times. [April 15,1971] , p. 4:7. Baluchistan, argue that these forces should not be StationcallingitselfFree Bangla Desh Radio used to supress civil liberties and not help ruling broad castsmessages of secessionist-proclaimed party remain in power. government of EastPakistan. Transmitters apparently operated by staff of radio station in 5000 Years of Art and Culture. UNESCO Courrier, [December 1973], 20:4-40. Chittagong, who fled with equipment on March 24.

New York Times. [May 7, 1971], p. 14:4. SixforeigncorrespondentsallowedintoEast PANAMA Pakistan for tour with official escorts. Books New York Times. [January 11, 1972] , p. 13:4. Weil, Thomas E. Area Handbook for Panama. American Government report says foreign publications will University, Washington, D.C. [1972). be allowed in Pakistan again. . - Weil, Thomas E. Area Handbook for Panama. Washington New York Times. [January 14, 1972], p. 8:5. D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [1972). Pakistan Information Minister Pizada announces This book is one of a.series of handbooks designed end of censorship in Pakistan. Lifts ban on foreign to be useful to military and other personnel who newspapers and magazines. Says restrictive laws need basic facts about social, economic, political will be repealed soon and in meantime press is free and military institutions and practices of Malaysia. to write what it pleases. Periodicals New York Times. [January 18, 1972] , p. 16:3. William,Paul. PanamanianTelevision.N.A.E.B. Journal, 21(3), [May-June 1962), pp. 79-83. Bhutto says Pakistan will maintain ties with Great Britain and urges Pakistan government radio and ABC Aids New TV Station in Panama City. Broadcasting, TV not to show hard feelings towards Britain in [July 24,1961]. their broadcasts.

New York Times. [February 29, 1972], p. 2:4. PAPUA NEW GUINEA Pakistan government holds A. editor of Books newspaper Dawn, incommunicado on charges of McCarthy, J.K. New Guinea, Our Nearest Neighbor. Mel- violation of martial law concerning discrediting bourne: F. W. Oheshire, Cheshire, [1968] , p. 161. government, President, or armed forces.Inter- national Press Institute letter to government holds Hastings,Peter. New Guinea, Problems andProspects. that Gauhan's past career as government official is -Melbourne Cheshire for the Australian Institute of Inter- not Justification for his current detention as a national Affairs [19691, Bibliography, maps, tables, p. journalist.Pakistan newsmen are reported con- 307-311. cernedthat PakistanPressInstitute,the only non-official news agency,isunder government Hastings, Peter. (ed.), Papua-New Guinea Prosperio's Other pressure. Many say significant political develop- Island. Sidney: Angus and Robertson, [1971] . ments are being barred from public. Government recently closed Punjab, English language weekly, Includes bibliographical references. Pizada outlines Government complaints against press and warns that press freedom cannot take Henderson, John w. Area Handbook for Oceania. Washington precedence over nation's survival. D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [19711. This book is one of a series of handbooks designed New York Times. [March 27,1972], p. 10:2. to be useful to military and other personnel who Pakistan returns news film and documents con- need basic facts about social, economic, political fiscated from foreign newsmen when they were and militaryinstitutions andpractices of expelled from Pakistan. Papua - -New Guinea.

New York Times. [April 6, 1972] , p. 31:2. Ryan, Peter. ed. Encyclopedia of Papua and New Guinea. Vol. 1, 2, 3,: Carlton, Victoria: Melbourne University Pakistan'sPunjab Province martial law admin- Press, [1972). istration bans April 5 publication of three Lahore publications and holds that the publications have Periodicals persistentlyindulgedinobjectionablewriting Few Natives Can Enjoy New Guinea Native Radio Sessions. calculated to harm national interest. Arrest orders Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 27, No. 10, [May 1957), are issued for publication's editors, publishers and pp. 38-39. printers. Study comments that few natives can have radio New York Times. [ January 15, 1973], p. 5:6. program for lack of electricity to radio. Govern- ment spending agooddealof money on Pakistani right wing editor of newspaper Chatan programming and so should go whole route to pro- was released from prison after five months of . vide simple receivers to villages and make others f.itrntionin which he staged a 26 day hunger available at minima: ,vat. strike. They Want Their News More Often. Pacific Islands Monthly, New York Times. [June 24, 1973] , p. 15:1. Vol. 29, No. 2. [September 1958), p. 61-63. Pakistani governmentplanstointroducebill Article on controversy over whether the ABC in making and sort of interference and undesirable Port Moresby should broadcast a 12-Noon news criticism of military punishable by up to 14 years bulletin. Two columns. (Arguments over Papua in prison. Opposition party leaders and press, who New Guinea News Broadcasts). havecriticizeddeployment of armyunitsin

156 -1 34, Suggested Local Broadcast For New Guinea D.C.'s, Pacific New Guinea and whether the fact that Niuginrs Islands Monthly, Vol. 30, No. 1, [August 19591, p. 125. only newspaper, the Papua New Guinea Post-Courier, had been barred from the House of Short item about the District Commissioner of the Assembly's Press gallery was a threat to freedom of Tolais people advocating local radio broadcasts to the press. The author also comments on govern- help improve relations. ment control of the radio system.

Raboul - At Last Gets Its Own Radio Station. Pacific Papua - New Guinea RadioPriorities.PacificIslands Islands Monthly, Vol. 32, No. 3, [October 19611, pp. Monthly, Vol.41, No. 5, [May 19701, p. 147. 116-117. Alistof townsinNew Guinea wherethe One column about a new radio station in Raboul; Administration feels radio stations should be set broadcasting in Tolai, English and Pidgin. up; in order of priority. _ - - Big Papua - New Guinea Expansion In Broadcasting Services. They Want Media For the Message. Pacific Islands Monthly, Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 32, No. 11, [June 19621, Vol. 41, No. 11, [November 19701, p. 36. p. 140. Criticismbythe Christian Communities Com- Plans of the Administration of Papua-New Guinea mission of Papua New Guinea of churches in the and the Australian Broadcasting Commission to area for not making good use of communication expand their broadcast services to cover the entire facilitiesandnot encouraging thetraining of territory and produce programs in the vernacular. natives in their use.

Papua-New Guinea On Threshold of Dramatic New Radio Technical Coveragein Papua - New Guinea. Australian Development. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 33, No. 7, Broadcasting Commission, [March 19721. [February 19631, pp. 33,35,37,39. A long article about the improvements made in ABC Programming in Papua-New Guinea. Australian Broad- equipment and programming to the radio systems casting Commission, [March 19/21. in New Guinea and the acceptance of radio by the different native tribes. Fight for independent Broackusting in Papua - New Guinea, Pacific Islands Monthly,, Vol. 43, No. 5, [Mhy 19721, Radio Raboul Gives Them What They Want. Pacific Islands pp. 49-51. Monthly, Vol. 33, No. 10, [May 1963), pp. 23-25. Short broadcasting in Papua - Two columns about Radio Raboul which broad- New Guinea followed by information concerning a casts music and news in Mogen and Tolais. report by a "study group" set up by the Australian government to investigate establishing a Papua - ABC Studios on Schedule. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 34, New Guinea Broadcasting Commission. No. 5, [December 19631, p. 20, Sandra Carney, Broadcast Communication in Papua - New One paragraph about the new ABC Studio at Port Guinea: Medium for Change. Research paper, Problems Moresby nearing completion. in the Pacific, University of Hawaii, [May 19721.

Territory Should Look IntoTelevision.PacificIslands Modem Tok Tok. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 44, No. 2, Monthly, Vol. 36, No. 1, [January 19651, p. 48. [February 19731, p. 131. Short item about the recommendation of the One paragraph about the installation of a radio World Bank that television stations be established station at Kundeaiva, Chinbu, New Guinea, which in Papua - New Guinea. willbroadcast programs inpidgin andinthe vernacular. ABC Uncertainty Over Role /n New Guinea. Pacif:c Islands Monthly, Vol. 36, No 3, [iviarcn 19651, pp. 26-27. Two columns about the ABC having to decide PERU whether to stayin Papua - New Guinea and expand their services or to pull out and let the Books Administration's smallradio system take over Owens, Ronald J. Peru. London: Oxford University Press, broadcasting services. [19631.

Findings On Papua New Guinea Television Due Soon. Pacific Pike, Frederick B. The Modern History of Peru. New York: Islands Monthly, Vol. 37, No. 1, [January 19661, p. 20. Frederick A. Praeger, [19671. Three paragraphs about the Commission of Inquiry Dew, Edward. Politics in the Altiplano: The dynamics of into television in Papua - New Guinea. change in rural Peru. Austin: University of Texas Press, [19691. New Guinea Aghast At the Cost of Educational Television. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 37, No. 4, [April 19661. This book delves into the changing Peru in all pp. 17,19,21. facets of Peruvian life. Emphasis is on political developments over the decades. Results of the investigation into whether television would be feasible for Papua New Guinea; the sur- Green, Timothy. The Universal Eye. New York: Stein and prise of government officials over how much a tele- Day, [19721. visionsystemwouldcostandPacificIslands report. The article Monthly'scriticism of the Periodicals includes the major points of the report. Peru Bans Alien Broadcasters. New York Times, [August 27, 19511, p. 37 Some Thoughts on the Freedom of New Guinea's Press (and 40,No.10, radio)PacificIslandsMonthly, Vol. Peruvian Market for TV Sets Grows Fast. Foreign Commerce [October 19691, pp. 41-43. Weekly. [May 4,19591, p. 35 Editorial discusses freedom of the press in Papua -

-157132 Alisky, Marvin. Broadcasting in Peru. Journal of Broad- Markay, Sanford. Malaysian TV, Now in its Third Year, Hasa casting, [Spring 1959] , pp. 118-127. Dialect Problem. Variety, [June 23, 19651, pp. 53-54.

Peru Gets Two New TV Chains; Lima Adds Two Stations. Ool, Gordon. TV in Malaysia. Variety, [March 29, 1967j, p. Advertising Age. [April 16, 19621, p. 93 54.

Rating's Service Opening in Lima isPeru's First. Broad- Lawler, L. J. Singapore ETV Seminar EEB /March 1967. Edu- casting, [April 1 19631, p. 122. cational EV International, Vol. 1, No. 2, [June 1967], p.105. Spanish by Radio in South America. Times Educational Supplement. [April 30 1965], p. 1296. Smith, Terrence. Singapore Turning Vast British Base Into Commercial Shipyard, New York Times, [October 24, Maidenberg, H. J. Peruvians Decree State Control For All TV 1968], p.3. and Radio Stations. New York Times, [November 11, 1971],p.11. Hancock, Alan, ETV in Singapore. Educational TV Inter- national, Vol. 1, No. 1, [June 19671, p. 97. Why Peru Seized TV. New York Times, [November 14, 1971], Sec. III, p. 11. Television Around the World Television Age. International Issue. [January 1,1.9681, p. 32.

China Using Exports To Sway Singapore. New York Times, PHILIPPINES [ January 21, 19681, p. 6.

Tour Book of the Philippines. American Automibile Associa- Concern Voiced Over Two Still Held In China. New York tion. Washington, D.C., National Travel Department, Times, [April 4, 1969] , p. 6. [19711. Singapore Pressing Chinese Red's Bank. New York Times, Taylor, Richard. Philippines, an 'Ideal' Radio Nation. Journal [May 21, 19691, p. 8. of Commerce, [September 12, 1966], p. 12A. Singapore Clashes With Peking's Bank. New York Times, Philippines Participation inIntelstat. Telecommunications [May 26, 19691, p. 67. Journal. [August 1967] , p.294. Singapore Marks Foimding of City. New York Times, Lent, J. Television in the Philippines. Television Quarterly, [August .0, 190j p. 11. [Fall 1967], pp. 92-101. Complacency Worries Singapore. New York Times, [January Burgett, F. Anthony, Martial Law and the New Philippines. 19, 1970],4). 66. Pacific, Vol. 3, No. 1, (Quarterly), [1972].. Singapore Housing Burgeons. New York Times, [ January 19, Bank of Americas $4.9 Million for New Bank in Philippines. 1970] , p. 63. San Francisco Chronicle, [March 26, 1974], p. 54. David Rockefeller Urges U.S. Contacts With China. New York Times, [March 10, 19701, p. 12. PITCAIRN ISLAND Singapore Sees 97% Growth. New York Times, [August 9, New Radio Station for Pitcairn. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 19701, p. 34. 31, No. 1, [August 1960], p. 118. Short item about the installation of a 250-watt Singapore Shows New Confidence. New York Times, [August transmitter on Pitcairn Island to replace a simple 10, 1970] . p. 8. 50watt marine-type system. Stewart, Ian. Asia Slowly Awakening to Needed Pollution Control. New York Times, [January 4, 1971] Radio Broadcasts? Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 36, No. 12, , p. 2. [December 1965]. Teachers Quitting Singapore University. New York Times, From an article entitled "Pitcairn Has Had Many [January 5, 1971] , p. 8. Ups and Downs," a few paragraphs about the first radio station on Pitcairn Island. Enclave of Low Prices. New York Times, [January, 18, 1971], p. 52. Radio Station Plan. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 39, No. 4, [April 19681, p.85. Singapore Leader Duels With Press. New York Times, [May From an article entitled "Pitcairn island feels the 12, 19711, p. 5. tread.of V.I.P. feet", a short item about a former resident ofPitcairnIslandreturning from Los Singapore Mimes Publisher Accused of Red Link, Espionage. Angeles with plans for opening a radio station on New York Times, May 16, 1971] , p. 3. Pitcairn Island. Paper In Singapore Ceases Publication; Red Link Charged. New York Times, [May 17, 1971], p. 2. SINGAPORE Opposition Paper In Singapore Is Closed On Government Order. New York Times, [May 29, 1971], p. 5. TV's Inpact on For East. Variety, [October 30, 1957] , p. 33. Singapore Expels American Newsmen. New York Times, Culture Ministry Cuts Amount of Western Music Broadcast [June 4, 19711, p. 3. on Radio. The New York Times, [June 10, 1959j , 9:6. Fellows, Lawrence. Singapore Leader In Helsinki to Explain Singapore Offers Opportunity for U.S.Television.Inter- .Policies at Press Parley. New York Times,[J une 8, national Commerce, [August 27, 19621, 68:49. 1971], p. 5.

158 - 1(33 Fellows, Lawrence. Prime Minister Lee Says He Curbs Press Thailand Year Book. Thailand: Temple Publicity Services, to Preserve Peace In Singapore. New York Times, [June [19701. 10, 19711,p. 6. Henderson, John W. Area Handbook for Thailand. Washing- Singapore Markets Labor. New York Times, [January 24, ton, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [1971]. 1972], p.54. This book is one of a series of handbooks designed to be useful to military and other personnel who Sterba, James. Everything Looking Up In Singapore. New need basic facts about social, economic, political York Times, [May 2, 1972], p. 2. and military institutions and practices of Thailand.

Dave Brubeck Skips Singapore on Current Tour; Hair too Periodicals Long!. New York Times, [September 14, 1972], ih 53. TV System Discussed. New York Times, [October 31, 1959], p. 47. Singapore LeaderThreatensPress.New York Times, [November 26, 1972], p. 11. Mitchell, John D. Thailand's Unexamined Media. Journalism Quarterly. 42(1), [Winter 1965], pp. 87-97.

Foisie, Jack. Thailand Radio, TV in Upheaval. Los Angeles BRITISH SOLOMON ISLANDS Times, [December 14, 1966].

BSIP Broadcasting Improvements. Pacific Islands Monthly, Siam by theSea.Saturday Review[March8, 1969], Vol. 26, No. 7, [February 1956]p. 95. 52:86-88. Honiara broadcast station now has SW outlet on 5960 kc using call V002-operating in parallel with New York Times. [August 8 , 1970]p. 25:7. VQO on 1030 kc. New transmitter has 100 w BBC program on radio by historianI. Grimble input. Gives schedule. Three short paragraphs. depicts Mrs. A. Leonowen, made famous in book Ann and the King of Siam and the musical "The The Voice of the Solomons. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 26, King and I", as a shrill woman filled with religious No. 11, [June 1956], p. 119. prejudice and pretensions. A four, short paragraphitemdealingwith requested grant for construction of a government New York Times, [September 6, 1970]p. 11:1 radio broadcasting facility in BSIP. On ly 4of 33nation'snewspapersreported Agnew's visitto , remainder joinedin More Broadcasts from BSIP. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 29, blackout to protest pending laws regulating press. No. 7, [February 1959], p. 63. Government warns on equalretaliation,issues Two-paragraph item aboutHoniara's new series of curbs on radio and TV stations that it broadcasting equipment and longer broadcasting runs. Curbs include ban on news on military bases hours. and troop movements, student unrest, and reports disagreeing with government policy. Pending press More and Better Radio in the Solomons. Pacific Islands bill detailed. Authorizes government to close the Monthly, Vol. 31, No. 10, [May 1961], pp. 129 and newspaper seize any offending publication and 130. confiscate plant that printed material. Short item aboutthe Solomon Islands Broad- Thailand. Focus. A [November 1970], castingServiceextending broadcasttimeand 21:1-9. improving reception for neighboring territories. A history of Thailand.

THAILAND Meyer,RichardJ.,Educational Broadcastingin Thailand: A Microcosm of Asia.Educational Books Broadcasting Review, [February 1971] , Vol. 5, Cady, John Frank. Thailand, Burma, Laos, and Cambodia. No. 13, pp. 30-34. EnglewoodCliffs,NewJersey:Prentice-Hall,Inc., [1966]. New York Times [April 1, 1971], p.5:1 Bangkok newspaperreportsgovernment, asa Nuechterlein, Donald E. Thailand and the Struggle for South- friendlygesturetowardsPeking,hasordered east Asia. Ithaca, New York: Cornell University Press, disarming of several thousand Nationalist irregulars [1965]. in remote mountains of Thailand and closing of radio station operated at Ciliary Rai by Chinese Minetrukinetra, Bacha, et al. Mass Communication Resources Nationaist team. in Thailand. Bangkok: Thammasat University, [1965]. New York Times [May 15, 1971], p. 36:1. Chakrabongse,Chula,HisRoyal Highness,Prince of Thailand. Lords of Life: A History of the Kings of Government orders radio stationto cease pro- Thailand. London: Alvin Redman Limited, [1967]. paganda attacks on Communist China as they seek to improve relations between countries. Okkenhaug, A. and G. F. Rowland. Thailand: Educational Radio and Television. Paris: UNESCO, [1968]. New York Times [June 8, 1971], p. 7:2. No pp ronBunyarit, Kampol Watharapon and Thailand Yearbook, 1968-69. Bangkok: Temple Publicity Prasarn Meefungsat, leading Bangkok journalists, Services, [1968]. arrested on charges of having insulted Minister Khoman. Their two newspapers have criticized Thailand Yearbook 1969-70. Bangkok: Temple Publicity Khoman for charging that Thai dailies have been Services, [1970]. bribed by foreigners to attack governments foreign policy.

5p Near Bangkok, New Ancient City. Sunset. [December 19721, Short item about European personnel arriving to 149:40. operate the new Tonga broadcast station and a plan of the Tongan Government to import tran- New York Times [June 23,1973], p. 4:4. sistor radios in bulk to sell to the people at a low Nine universitystudents expelled for satirizing price. Premier Kittikachornand DeputyPremier Churusathien in student magazine about the two Tonga Is Now on the Air. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 31, men being over mandatory retiring age. Explusions No. 8, [March 19611, p. 117. bring thousands of students into streets to protest. Short item about broadcasts from the new radio Forces reinstatement of students after they make a station at Nukualofa which began February 22 in formal apology to the Premier. Tongan and English. New York Times [August 8,1973), p. 8:1. Tonga Radio. Has 'Excellent' Cover. Pacific Islands Monthly, Article on political, social, economic, agricultural, Vol. 31, No. 9, [April 19611, p. 65. labor and educational situation in Thailand. Short item about the official opening of Tonga's New York Times [November 18,19731, p. 5:1. new broadcaststationandinformation about coverage and programming. Press and politicians indulge in free commentary. Military attitude, as made evident by television Power of Advert /singProved inTonga.PacificIslands appearance of General Sivara, is that military will Monthly, Vol. 31, No. 12, [July 19611, p. 134. never again be involved in politics. Short item about the result of advertisements on Tong radio.

TONGA Schools Broadcast From ZCO Tonga.PacificIslands Monthly, Vol. 32, No. 6, [January 1962], p. 113. Book Henderson, John W. Area Handbook for Oceania. Washing- Two paragraphs about plans for educational broad- ton, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [19711. casts by the Tongan Broadcasting Commission. This book is one of a series of handbooks designed Press Freedom Could Lead to Anarchy.PacificIslands to be useful to military and other personnel who Monthly, Vol. 40, No. 10, [October 1969], p. 47 and need basic facts about social, economic, political 48, and military institutions and practices of Tonga. Members of Tonga'sparliamentresentbeing Periodicals criticized by the government subsidized Chronicle Thomas C. Lynn, Letter from Tonga. Honolulu Star-Bulletin, which is the only newspaper in Tonga. The paper is [December 19,1970]p. B-1. edited by a Peace Corps volunteer and does not reflect the official government view point. In the Broadcasting Service for Tonga. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. article a member of parliament wants government 37, No. 12, [July 19571, p.59. censors appointed to work both at the Chronicle and at Tonga's radio station. Two-paragraph report on revival of interest in the idea of establishing a radio broadcasting station in Tonga. MICRONESIA TRUST TERRITORY Broadcasting Station for Tonga. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 28, No. 8, [March 19581, p. 131. Book The article concerns the decision of the Tongan Henderson, John W. Area Handbook for Oceania. Washing- Government to build a radio station operating in ton, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, [1971]. the broadcast band by 1959. This book is one of a series of handbooks designed to be useful to military and other personnel who Work Starts Soon on Tonga Radio. Pacific Islands Monthly, need basic facts about soda:, economic, political Vol. 29, No. 1, [August 19581, p. 139. andmilitaryinstitutions andpracticesof Short item on the construction of a Tongan radio Micronisia Trust. station. Periodicals Broadcasts Soon. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 30, No. 10, Kahn, E.J. Reporter at Large. New Yorker, [December 19711, [May 19601, pp. 47-48. pp. 98-115. Shortarticleabout the soon to be completed Microneisian Status Talks Collapse Over the Pot of Gold ut broadcast station on Tonga. Rainbow's End.PacificIslandsMonthly,[January 19741, p. 21. A GiftforTonga'sBroadcast Station.PacificIslands Monthly, Vol. 30, No. 11, [June 19601, p. 131. Problems of running Micronesia after Americans relinquishthe trusteeship job. Micronesia wants One paragraph about the British giving Tonga tran- payment to give U.S. sole authority over defense of scription equipment and records. Micronesia or wants to attract investment, trade relationships, etc. with other countries. Japan in Tonga Broadcasting Soon Plus Radio Aids. Pacific Islands mind. Monthly, Vol. 31, No. 2, [September 1960], p. 128. Short item about the nearing completion of the Landis Key to Micronesian Talks. Pacific Islands Monthly, Tonga Broadcast Station. [November 1973], p. 27.

TongaWill Operate a Broadcasting Station Soon. Pacific Micronisia: Hope, But. Honolulu Advertiser, [May 9, 1974]. Islands Monthly, Vol. 31, No. 7, [February 19611. p. 127.

160135 U.S.S.R. Emery, Walter B. Broadcasting in the USSR: 100 Years After Lenin's Birth.Educational Broadcasting Review, IV, Books [August 19701, pp. 33-38. Durham, F. Gayle. Radio and Television in the Soviet Union. Cambridge: The CenterforInternationalStudies, Tek 'ision Growth. Current Digest of the Soviet Press, XXII, M.I.T., [19651. No. 47, [December 22, 19701, pp. 82-83.

Dizard, Wilson P.Television: A World View. Syracuse: Television Schedule inKirgizia.SovietEducation,X111, Syracuse University Press, [19661. [December 19701, pp. 82-83.

Pau lu, Bruton, Radio and Television-Broadcasting on the Rogers, Rosemarie. The Soviet Mass Media in the Sixties. European Continent. Minneapolis:Universityof JournalofBroadcasting, XV,[Spring1971] ,pp. Minnesota Press, [1967]. 127-146.

Emery, Walter B. National and International Systems of Kitano, Eizo, (News Editor, Mainichi Broadcasting System Broadcasting. East Lansing: Michigan State University Osaka). Newspapers and TV in the Soviet Union. ASWA Press, [19691. News letter, No. 2, [August, 19711, pp. 8-9. Soviet Radio-TV State Commission peaceful Hopkins, Mark W. Mass Media in the Soviet Union. New co-existance with no competition. TV increases use York: Western Publishing Company, Inc., [19701. of newspapers stimumated by TV. Peoples An indepth study of the Soviet Union's mass media interest in information and news is aroused by TV with sections on radio and television broadcasting. andcreates new readershipfornewspapers. Americans stay at home Watch TV Soviets go Periodicals out to mingle spend less hours at home. TV must Moscow InterferesWith ABC Short-Wave.Pacific Islands servepeople usefuliness must come firstin Monthly, Vol. 29, No. 6, [January 19591, p. 63. socialist society. TV will improve in the USSR. Soviet people do not change easily Russian con- Twoparagraphs about interference by a broadcast fidenceintheir newspapersisunshakable. The of Radio Moscow inEnglishto an Australian course TV and Soviet Press take will depend on short-wave news program. National Policy.

Ziebarth,E.W.Electronic Media intheSovietUnion. Tebbe!, John. Inside Soviet Television. Saturday Review, Quarterly Journal of Speech, VL [October 19591, pp. [January 8, 19721, pp. 48-49. 275-281. Laqueur, Walter Z. What the Russians See on TV. Reporter, Russia: Fear of the Waves. Economist, [August 19, 19721, p. [October 29, 19591, pp. 25-26. 39.

Tuber, Richard. A Survey of Programming of the Central U.S. Dissents, USSR Does Turnabout as U.N. Passes Resolu- Studios of Television, Moscow, USSR. Journal of Broad- tion on Satellites. Broadcasting [November 20, 19721, casting, IV [Fall 19601, pp. 315-325. p. 48.

Mannes, Marya. A Word From Our Sponsor The Kremlin. Fierlinger,P. My 12Years of Making TV Commercials New York Times Magazine, [March 5, 19611. Behind the Iron Curtain. Advertising Age, [May 21, 19731, pp. 55-56. What Ivan Watches. Newsweek, [March 6, 1961] , p. 98. NBC and Russia to Swap Programs and Personnel. Broad- Williams, Frederick, The Soviet Philosophy of Broadcasting. casting, [June 4, 19731, p.44. Journal of Broadcasting, VI [Winter 1961- 19621, pp. A unique idea is presented, formulated and put 3-10. into effect. The U.S. and Russia will attempt an exchange of programs andpersonnelforthe Sakontikov, N. The Experience of Central Television of the mutualbenefitof both countries. The planis USSR in the Field of Political Broadcasts. Radio and examined in this article. Television, (OIRT), III, [November 19621, pp. 3-6.

Dizard, Wilson P. Television in the USSR. Problems of Com- UNITED STATES munism, XII, [November-December 19631, pp. 38-45. Books Xenofontov, V. Broadcasts for Children in the Soviet Tele- Cantor, Muriel G. The TV Producer: His Work vision.Radio and Television, (DIRT), V, [November andHisAudience. New York:BasicBooks,Inc., 19641, pp. 7-12. [19711. Opiate of the Masses. Newsweek, [March 8, 19651, p. 83. This book profiles some of the most powerful producers in Hollywood and the United States. S mi rn ova ,Margarita.TelevisionChildren.SovietLife, [December 19651, pp. 24-25. Bogart, Leo. The Age of Television. New York: F. Ungar Publishing Company, [19721. Lower, Elmer W.Television,SovietStyle.Television A study of viewing habits and the impact of tele- Quarterly VI [Winter 19671, pp. 29-33. vision on American life.

Nordenstreng, Kaarle. Broadcasting inthe Soviet Union. Epstein, Edward Jay. News From Nowhere: Television and European Broadcasting UnionReview,CXIII, the News. New York: Random House, Inc., 119731. [September 19691, pp. 19-22. A study on American news broadcasting from Rybakov, V. The Televised Lesson. Current Digest of the reporters to producers to the public. Soviet Press, XXII, No. 29, [August 18, 19701, pp. 30-31. Periodicals Szulc, Tad. Many U.S. Civilian Roles In Asia May Go To Briton Touring U.S. to Urge Clean-up of TV. Broadcasting, Military. New York Times, [ June 10,1970], p. 1. [December 11,1972], o. 8. Schwarsz, Daniel. The Irrelevant Campus. New York Times, Local Radio;, Cheap at the Price. Economist, [December 30, [ June 16,1970], p. 16:4. 1972], pp. 19-20. The Economist delves into a subject that most Emerson, Gloria. Vietnam Hamlet a Sanitary Model. New small town American brcadcasters find familiar.... Yiirk Times, [October 12, 1970],p. 14. the inexpensive way to go, with maximum effec- The Tube Takes Hold. Time, [November 30,19701. tiveness, is to the local, hometown radio outlet. As TV prices soar, the local radio station offers the Thieu Reforms. New York Times, [November 5,1971], p. 5. buyer good advertising at a cheap rate. Butterfield, Fox. Saigon Millionaires a Handful, But They Puerto Rican Stations Press For Approval of Two Language TV. Broadcasting, [November 12,1973], p. 43. Are Powerful. New York Times, [November 6,1971 1, p. 24.

NORTH VIETNAM Peterson, lver. Thieu, In Address To Nation, Orders Eco- nomic Reform. New York Times, [November 15, Books 19711, p. 1. Democratic Republic of Viet Nam. Hanoi: Foreign Language Publishing House, [1960.] Peterson, Iver. Saigon Asking Support For Reforms. New York Times, [November 16,1971 1. p. 12. CapsuleFactsforthe Armed Forces:North Vietnam. Washington, D.C.:U.S. Government Printing Office, Peterson, Iver. Saigon's Food Prices Rise 50% After Devalua- (Department of Defense), [1970.] tion. New York Times, [November 17,1971], p. 5. Fifteen Vietnemese Senators Assail Thieu's Economic Plan. SOUTH VIETNAM New York Times, [November 19,19711, p. 6.

Book Shuster, Alvin. G. /.'s Leave As Saigon's Problems Grow. New Phan, Binh Chi. A Critical Study of Television in South York Times, [November 20,19711, p. 1. Vietnam and its Potential Role in Education. New York: Ithaca, [1970J Saigon Announces Strict Price Curbs. New York Times, [November 20,19711 , p. 6. The main objective of this study is to develop a historical and analytical study of the development Butterfield, Fox. Saigon, Fearing Reduced Aid May Cut oftelevisioninSouthVietnam.Itwillalso Army. New York Times, [December 4,19711, p. 2. examines televisions potential rolein education after the present war. Emerson, Gloria. Saigon Residents Finding The Price Squeeze Worse Than Ever. New York Times, [December 11, Periodicals 1971 1, p. 7. ... And in South Vietnam. Senior Scholastic, [March 18, 19664 Treaster, Joseph. In Danang, Belts Tighten As Americans Head Home. New York Times, [February 20,19721, p.

The Voice. Newsweek. [ June 3,19681. 1

South Vietnam, Television Age, [ February 10,19691. Thieu Gives Amnesty to 162. New York Times, [March 30, 19721, p. 30. Bayless, OvidL.The Armed Forces Vietnam Network. Journal of Broadcasting, [Spring 19691. Browne, Malcolm. Deep Recession Grips Saigon. New York Times, [ June 4,19721, p. 1. Phan, Binh Chi. A Critical Study of Television in South Vietnam and itsPotentialRoleinEducation. Un- published Masters Thesis, San Francisco State College, WESTERN SAMOA [1970]. Book Halloran, Richard. Economic Impact of Vietnamization Plan Davidson, J. W. Samoa mo Samoa. Melbourne: Oxford Un- is Debuted. New York Times, [ January 27,19701 , p. 4. iversity Press, [1967].

Hudierne, Robert. How the Learn About the War. New Periodicals York Times, [April 12,19701 , p.28:6. Rankin, R. F. How the Broadcast Lesson Overcame Teccher Shortage. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 26, No. 9, [April Emerson, Gloria. Artists In South Vietnam Are Still Able to 19561, pp. 89-91,93. Wield a Critical Brush. New York Times, [April 29, Educational radio in W. Samoa after six years 19701, p. 10. found estonishingly effective, with proper tech- nique. Designed to make up for lack of trained Durdin, Tillman.IndochinaLeftist Pledge Mutual Help teachers andtextbooks.Describesstaffing, Against U.S. New York Times, [April 28, 19701 , p. 1. curriculum, conduct of program, factors that make Army TV War Film Is Reported Staged. New York Times, it successful. [May 23, 19701 , p. 44. Samoan Listeners Also Cheat. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 30, No. 3, [October 19591, p. 117. Academic Experts In U.S. On Vietnam Almost Non-Existent. New York Times, [June 8,1970], p. 1. Short item about Samoans not paying their radio license fees.

-1s2 West Samoan Station Gets More Power.Pacific Islands Henderson, John W, Barth, Helen A.; Hermann, Judith M.; Monthly, Vol. 32, No. 1, [August 1961]. Moeller, Philis W.; Soriano, Francisco S.; Weaver, John Short item about a new transmitter at Afiamalu. 0. Area Handbook for OceaniaWashington D.C.,Amelican University, [19711. Western Samoa Cautious Over Neighbor's TV. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 35, No. 12, [December 1964], pp. 51,53. Television Factbook 1973-1974. Edition/No. 43 Vol. 2, Washington D.C.: Television Digest Inc., [19731. Discusses Western Samoan interest in the new ETV This book isan authoritative reference for the systeminAmerican Samoa and includes some advertising television and electronic industries. problems which exist for Western Samoa in the use of ETV. With broadcasting reference to: Race is on for First Samoan TV Sets. Pacific Islands Monthly, American Samoa, Australia, Cambodia, Canada, Vol. 36, No. 1, [January 1965], p. 17.. Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, El Salvador, French Short item about good television reception in Apia Polynesia, Guam, Guatemala,Honduras, Hong from American Samoa and the controversy over Kong, India, Indonesia, Japan, Korea, Malaysia, how much duty has to be paid on television sets. Mexico, Micronesia Trust, New Caledonia, New Guinea, New Zealand, Nicaragua, Okinawa, Pakistan,Philippines, Panama, Peru, Singapore, GENERAL Thailand, United States, U.S.S.R.

Books Tudor, Judy, ed. Pacific Islands Year Book. Sydney: Pacific Osborne, Charles, ed. Australia, New Zealand, and the South Publications, 11th ed. [19721. Pacific, a Handbook. New York: Praeger Publishers, [1970]. Reuhen, Olaf, and Robert Shadbolt..Isles of the South Pacific, Washington, D.C.: National Geographies Special Area Handbook for Oceania. Foreign Area Studies, The Publications Division [19681. American University, [1971). For sale by the Super- intendent of Documents, $4.00. Statistics on Radio and Television. New York and Paris: UNESCO, [1964]. Barney, Ralph Dale. The Mass Media, Their Environment and ProspectsinWesternPolynesia. Doctoral dissertion, Taishoff, Sol, ed. Broadcasting '72 Yearbook. Washington, University of Missouri, [19711. D.C.: Broadcasting Publications, Inc., [19721. Western Polynesia consists of four major island With broadcasting reference to: groups: Western Samoa, independent since 1962: Australia, Canada, Colombia, Japan, Korea, New Fiji, which contains a sharp cultural-racial division Zealand, Pakistan, Philippines, Singapore, U.S.S.R. andattainedindependent dominion status October, 1970; American Samoa, administered by World Communications Press, Radio, Television, and Film. the United States; and the independent Kingdom Paris: UNESCO, [1964-19701. of Tonga, thesinglesurvivingmonarchyin Polynesia. WorldRadio-TV Handbook Holdovre,Denmark: World Radio-TV Handbook Company, Ltd. [19721. Broadcasting Stations of the World. U.S. Foreign Broadcast Information Service, Washington, D.C.: U.S. Govern- Periodicals ment Printing Office, Vols. 1-4, [19711. Now They Can Learn Japanese By Radio. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 30, No. 9, [April 19601, pp. 126 and Cockcraft, John. Isles of the South Pacific. Sydney: Angus 127. and Robentson, Ltd. [19681. Short item about twice weekly Japanese lessons broadcast by Radio Japan for English speaking Gertner, Richard. 1972 International Television Almanac. listeners in the South Pacific. New York: Quigley Publications, [1972]. With broadcasting reference to: Increased Interest inPacific Broadcasting.PacificIslands Monthly, Vol. 31, No. 2, [September 19601. Australia, Cambodia, Hong Kong, India, Indonesia, Japan, Malaysia/Singapore, Mexico, New One paragraph about the intentions of Tonga, Fiji Caledonia, New Zealand, Okinawa, Pakistan, Peru, and Western Samoa to improve their broadcast Philippines,American Samoa, SouthKorea, systems. Thailand, North Viet Nam, South Viet Nam. Problems of Film Censorship and Radio Broadcasting Pacific The Far East and Australiasia 1971.London: Eruopa Publica- Islands Monthly, Vol. 31, No. 7, [February 19611, p. tions Limited, [19711. 80. A Survey and Directory of Asia and the Pacific. Discusses film censorship and what kinds of radio broadcasts can be made directed at the native pop- The International Year Book and Statesmen's Who's Who. ulation;includespr.:131=s of producing radio London: Burke's Peerage Limited, [19721. programs and information about what natives like A compiled study on all the countries of the world to listen to. witha who's who of important people of the world. RadioEntertainment and Advertising. PacificIslands Monthly, Vol. 32, No. 10, [May 19621, p. 25. Broadcasting reference to: Letter to the editor by a radio listener who resents Australia, Canada, Ceylon, Colombia, Costa Rica, paying a license fee and also having to listen to Ecuador, El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, India, advertising. Pacific Island Monthly comments on Japan,Laos, Mexico, New Zealand, Nicaragua, the letter. Pakistan, North Viet Nam.

163 -133 Radio Australia's Indonesian Bias Pacific Islands Monthly, New Era in Trans-Pacific Telecommunications. Pacific Islands Vol. 33, No. 1, [August 1962], p. 25. Monthly, Vol. 33, No. 5, [December 1962], p. 8. Shortarticleabout complaints made bythe Three columns about the completion of the second Dutch-Australian Weekly that the ABC broadcasts link of the Commonwealth Pacific Cable con- news biased in favor of the Indonesian side of the necting Fiji, New Zealand and Australia. West New Guinea dispute. Many PlacesBenefit from New Cable.PacificIslands Lynch, Russ,U.S.RoleinAsian Bankis'Fantastic,' Monthly, Vol. 33, No. 6, [ January 1963], p. 125. Honolulu Star-Bulletin, [May 16,1974]. The official opening of the Suva-Auckland Link of the Commonwealth Pacific Cable.

SATELLITES Live by Satellite from Peking. Broadcasting, [February 14, 1972], pp. 45-46. Periodicals They've Heard It In Papua, Too. Pacific Islands Monthly, Soviets Want U.N. As Satellite Forum. Broadcasting, [August Vol. 28, No. 8, [March 1958], p. 127. 14,1972], p. 38. Two-paragraph item about signals from a U.S. satellitebeing receivedinNew Guinea and Lessons Swap by Satellite. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 43, Australia. No. 9, [September 1972] , p. 26. Information about Pan Pacific Education and Com- The South Pacific Will Aid Project Mercury. Pacific Islands munication Experiments by Satellite. Monthly, Vol. 30, No. 6, [ January 1960], pp. 61-63. Two columns about sites in the Pacific chosen as Stanton Opposes World Censorship of Incoming TV tracking stations for Project Mercury. Satellites. Broadcasting, [October 9, 1972], p. 32-33.

A Wire Across the Pacific. Pacific Islands Monthly, Vol. 31, U.S. Satellite Stance Called Altruistic at U.N. Broadcasting, No. 7, [February 1961], p. 122. [January 15,1973], p. 31. Short item about the tirst stage of the Australia to U.S. Tries to Stall U.N. Satellite Group. Broadcasting, [June Canada cable being laid from Australia to New 18,1973), p. 12. Zealand. Thecablewillhave 80telephone channels, public telegraph, phototelegraph, circuits and leased private circuits for broadcast programme channels.

164 - 9 PART VI

CONFERENCE STAFF AND PARTICIPANTS LEE RICH

-11161111.1111Mar

LEE RICH President, Lorimar Productions Los Angeles, California

LeeRich,presidentof Lorimar Productions and Another result was the six Emmys the program won executive producerofthe Emmy winning series after itsfirst year on the air. These were for Best "The Waltons", brings a rare set of perspectives to DramaticSeries;Best Actor toRichard Thomas; his work of creating entertainment for television Best ActresstoMichaelLearned who plays the viewers and movie goers. mother; Best Supporting Actress to Ellen Corby as the grandmother; BestIndividualScript to John These perspectives include his years as a producer; MnGreevey; and Best Film Editing to Gene Fowler, years as an advertising agency executive, responsible Marjorie Fowler, and Anthony Wollner. for the investment of millions of dollars in programs to match sponsor needs; the selection of those pro- Rich has, apart from this success, an impressive track grams; and perhaps above all, the innate sense of good record. His production of "The Man", starring New taste which endows his productions with quality. York Drama Critics Award winner James Earl Jones, originally scheduled as an ABC Movie of the Week, "The Waltons"is an example of Rich's tastes in what makes for distinguished programs. "The Wal- so impressed the network's officials and Paramount tons" derives from the outstanding 1971 Christmas Pictures executives, thatit went into theatrical ex- Special "The Homecoming", based on the works hibition before airing on television. of Earl Hamner. Rich's production gained a notable and rare accolade from CBS-TV who asked Rich to Richbelievesthatindependent production com- proceedapaceinadapting Hamner's works into panies willplay an increasingly important part in series form. "The Waltons" is the result. television programming.

-167 141 THE BANQUET SPEECH

Mr. Lee Rich

Speaker

I've been asked to talk to you tonight concerning my conviction that television does not have to be a dehumanizing experience. That in fact the nature of tele- vision programming can be an uplifting one to the human spirit. It certainly must sound naive to stand here in front of you, with the knowledge that you are all aware of the material that was available to viewers last season and the season

before, and make a statement of this kind. I think if this was three years ago I myself would have laughed if anyone had said that...but it isn't three years itis three seasons we're talking about. Specifically, I'm talking about three sea- sons of a show called"The Waltons" ... I'm sure you all recognize the fact that shows like "All In The Family", "Maude", ".1 he MaryI yler Moore Show", and "MASH" have changed the face of television situation comedy. It is unlikely that we'll ever go back to foolish inappropriate shows that inaccurately portray life in

this country today. By the same token "The Waltons" has, I think, changed the face of the hour dramatic show. Though itis not a show about today, it is a show about what's missing from life today...and it makes the viewer remember and want better things.It reminds him that children used to want an education more than anything, and that it's possible that they might again; that books can be more important than guns to a family and that love between people is what matters. I feel that Lorimar Productions has made a gigantic step in bringing this new aspect of television drama to the audience, and I'm glad we could do it. We couldn't have done it without the special talents of a man named Earl Hamner.

And really what Iwant to say to you tonight is something whichI think is best said in his words. He can't be here to say it himself, so I'm taking the liberty of reading his words to you I think they sayitall. As I thank him for "The Waltons" he begins by thanking the people he considers the real creators of "The Waltons" his mother and father, and he goes on from there to say, and I quote

"When I was growing up we were in a depression. We were poor, but nobody ever bothered to tell us that. All we knew was that we suffered an absence of money. But that didn't bother us. We were too occupied with the day-to-day events. And to a skinny, awkward, funny looking, red-headed kid who secretly yearned to be a writer, each of those days seemed filled with wonder ... and they still do.

"I remember that the end of winter would come late there in the Blue Ridge. First the Icicles would melt along the eaves of the house and gradually the layers of snow on the north end of the barn would disappear. Then March time to climb Witts Hill with kites made of brown wrapping paper and flown on string which had been collected for that purpose all winter long, then the blossoming of the dogwood and rudbud and forsythia which told us that Spring had come again.

-169- 142 "Summer would arrive and with it crickets and bluebirds and dozens of cous- ins from Richmond and Petersburg, up for a visit. We would catch fireflies in the twilight and after darkness would fall we would sit on the front porch and listen to ghost stories told by our grandparents. Sometimes we would drive over to Uncle Benny Tapscott's farm in Buckingham County and go down to his springhouse and bring back chilled watermellons and eat them, spitting

the seeds on the ground. And every night there was something to listen to on the radio and the whole family would gather to,share "One Man's Family" and the comforting philosophy of Father Barbor, or Charlie McCarthy ribbing , or Gene Autry singing "I'm Back In the Saddle Again", or Will Roger's sensible comments, or President Roosevelt's reassuring an apprehensive nation that we had nothing to fear but fear itself.

"With the coming of fall we would learn to wear shoes again. We would gath- er chinquapins and black walnuts and bring them home in bushel/ baskets. And when the frost killed the vines we would gather the last of the green tomatoes from the garden and the following day my mother's kitchen would be filled with the pungent aroma of green tomato relish.

"Finally, the long silent winter would be upon us again. Under my parents supervision,all eight of us children would gather around the long wooden kitchen table and do our homework until one-by-one we drifted off to bed, and there with the house in darkness, we would call goodnight to each other, then sleep in the knowledge that we were safe, home, secure. "A few people have said to me that "The Waltons" are too good to be believed. It is true that I have tempered the characters to some small degree. My mother is a staunch Baptist and is opposed to all those things my father thought made life worth living especially playing cards, dancing, swearing, hunting and fishing on Sunday, and above all stopping by the home of two elegant lady neighbors, whose real names were Miss Emma and Miss Etta Staples and sampling a superior concoction which they referred to as"the receipe". They are gone now, those ladies, but I hope that their here-after is in some place where certain festivals requires their special services.

"My father, on the other hand, was considerably more salty than the char- acter played by Ralph Waite on "The Waltons". His speech was colorful, but a lot of the color came from the fact that he was a virtuoso at profanity. I remember once the Baptist preacher came to call. My mother had asked my father to try not to swear in front of Preacher Hicks. He didn't. But he didn't speak either. He just nodded and smiled for the whole two hours.

"Those Depression Years that I remember vividly were only about forty years ago, but they seem a thousand light years away. In the intervening years there has been a world war, the death of kings, the assassination of any num- ber of good men, another undeclared war, the conquest of space, the libera- tion of just about everybody, and most recently the obscenities of Watergate. We are in agony as a people. We desperately want to believe that our heritage is a proud one and that we can survive the present disillusionment and doubt and anxiety. We have discarded the old values and we have found nothing to take their place. God knows we have tried. Among the things we have tried Is hypnosis; scientology; astrology, demonology; Vitamina A, B, C, & D; mari- juana; heroin; Katherine. Kulman; Billy Graham; Dear Abby; swinging; com- munes; booze; hallucinogenic agents; meditation; group encounters; computer dating; and most recently, the expulsion of evil through exorcism.

"How pathetic all this flailing around seems. We have lost sight of the fact that we are fragile creatures. We are mortal and that is sad knowledge. We are lonely. We are human and all the fears that inhabited us millions of years ago

170 - 143 when we sat around fires in caves, are still there to be dealt with. Night has fallen ... we are alone and afraid ... and we need security.

"That is one of the principle reasons why I believe "The Waltons" have struck such a deep response in the viewing public. They are sick of vulgarity and violence, of suggestive dialogue and situations. They are weary of so-called sensational subject matter, such as we often get into when we attempt to be relevant. They are sick of shallow plots, one-dimensional characters, and the pap and the pulp they are offered in such abundance. They are sick ofthe negative view of life. They are hungry for affirmation of what life has taught them Is viable, vital, and affirmative.

"Those are the values we celebrate and affirm on "The Waltons". In giving recognition and honor to those values, I believe that we are not only bringing our audience entertainment, but some hope that if we once endured adepres- sion, then it is possible that we might endure and survive this present test of the fabric of this Justly proud country.

"We believe in these values. They have sustained us as a country for nearly two hundred years. They can sustain us again".

- 171 . 144 CONFERENCE PARTICIPANTS

Lloyd Ackerman Student SFSU Jeffrey Calloway Student, SFSU Michelle Acosta Student SFSU Alvin Capino Philippine Broadcasting Corp. Yolanda Adra Student, SFSU Rene Cardenas, Executive Director Maria Alcorcha Student SFSU Bilingual Children's Television Albert Alioto Student, SFSU Timothy Carman Student, SFSU Van Amburg William Carragher Student, SFSU KGO-TV, San Francisco Student, SFSU Buzz Anderson Faculty, SFSU Peter Casey Kenneth Castain Student, SFSU Ed Anderson Student, SFSU Marie Lee Cato Student, SFSU Joel Aruta Philippine Broadcasting Corp. Andrew Cedarblade Student, SFSU Jamie Asensio Peter Chang Extension Student, SFSU Philippine Broadcasting Corp. Cynthia Chin Student, SFSU Charles Austin Student SFSU Michael Ching Student, SFSU George Avalos Student SFSU Thomas Chou, President William Avery Graduate, SFSU Phil Choy Student,SFSU Student,SFSU Alan Baker Chris Clementson KCET-TV, Los Angeles Daniel Coffman Student,SFSU Daniel Bardon Studen4 SFSU Nancy Cohen Student,SFSU John Barsotti Instructor, SFSU Niesha Cohen Student,SFSU Kenneth Bell Student, SFSU Sharon Cohen Student,SFSU Bruce Belotz Student, SFSU Steven E. Cohn Student,SFSU Todd Benjamin Student, SFSU Roy Cole Student,SFSU Eugene Bertermann Darryl Compton Staff,SFSU Far East Broadcasting Co. Iris Cooke Student,SFSU Dznny Biando Studen4 SFSU Michael Corwin Student,SFSU Chuck Biechlin Russell Coughlin, General Manager KGO-TV, San Francisco KGO-TV, San Francisco Peter Borromeo Student SFSU Pierre Coursey Student, SFSU Gregory Brennan Student SFSU Karen Crenshaw Student, SFSU Wallace Brooks Studen4 SFSU John Brown Student Sf..vJ Belva Davis Vince Brown KPIX-TV, San Francisco Continental Cable Peggy Day Student, SFSU Lloyd Bryan Student, SFSU Steve Dejung Student, SFSU Lawrence Burton Student, SFSU

- 173 - Barbara Deloney Student, SFSU John Galbraith Faculty, SFSU John Dick Katherine Gerwig Student, SFSU KEAR Radio, San Francisco Linda Giannecchini Instructor, SFSU Sylvia Dickens Student, SFSU Eugene Gibson Student, SFSU Scott E. Dobbins Student. SFSU Brian Gilbert Student, SFSU Roger Doudna Faculty, SFSU Barrett Giorgis Raymond N. Doyle, Associate Dean San Francisco Signal Corp. School of Creative Arts, SFSU Gary Goldenfeld Student, SFSU William Doyle Student, SFSU Tony Goldman Student, SFSU Benjamin P. Draper, Conference Chairman Frank Gonsalez Student, SFSU 24th Annual Broadcast Industry Conference Celeste Gottlieb Student, SFSU Mike Duermyer Studen4 SFSU Peter Graumann Student, SFSU Irene Green Student, SFSU John Edmister Studen4 SFSU Aaron Edwards KSFO Radio, San Francisco Taylor Hackford KCET-TV, Los Angeles Steven Epstein Student, SFSU Gene Hambleton John Estes Student, SFSU Western Communications Christian Haseleu Graduate Asst., SFSU Deborah Fanning Student, SFSU Laurence Naughton Student, SFSU Joseph Fegan Graduate Student, SFSU Victoria Hazlewood Student, SFSU jean Feilmoser_Studen4 CSU-Long Beach Jerry Higgins Staff, SFSU Diane Feinstein, President Maurice Hing Student, SFSU San Francisco Board of Supervisors Dennis Bruce Ho Student, SFSU William A. Fink Jonathan Holden Student, SFSU CONRAC Corporation Sam Horn Staff, SFSU Wesley A. Fleming Graduate Student, SFSU Leslie Honig Student, SFSU Melissa Foster Student, SFSU William Horty John Foz Student, SFSU Buckeye Cablevision Leonard Frank Studen4 SFSU Arthur Hough Faculty, SFSU Mary Lou Frank Student, SFSU Jim Houghton Staff, SFSU Charles 0. Franks Student, SFSU Nancy Hoyt Student, SFSU David Frazer Studen4 SFSU Charles Hurth Student, SFSU Michael Franch Student, SFSU Stuart Hyde, Chairman Mark Fulmen Broadcast Communication Arts Dept., SFSU KRON-TV, San Francisco Julia Fong Student, SFSU

- 174 - 1 4 6 Tye Idonas Student, SFSU Lucia Libretti Student, SFSU Edward Ingram Student, SFSU Jenny Lin Student, SFSU James Inscore Student, SFSU Barbara Linton Faculty, SFSU Richard Isaacs Student, SFSU Peter Lipton Student, SFSU Albert Lord III Student, SFSU Stephanie Jackson Student, SFSU Franklin Lowe Student, SFSU Sharon Johnson Student, SFSU Carolyn Lue Student, SFSU Betty Jorgensen Staff, SFSU Kathi Lupson Student, SFSU

John Kangai Student, SFSU Joan Mackrell Student, SFSU David Kannas Student, SFSU Sandel Malmstron Student, SFSU Douglas Kapovich Student, SFSU Craig Markinson Student, SFSU Greg Keller Student, SFSU James Marolf Student, SFSU Jeanne Keller Student, Stanford Univ. Nellie Marquez Student, SFSU Kevin Keeshan Student, SFSU Richard Marsh Faculty, SFSU Noreen Khana Graduate Student, Stanford Univ. Gary Martin Student, SFSU Theresa Ann Kirscher Student, SFSU Bernard Mayes KQED-TV, San Francisco Richard J. Knecht University of Toledo, Ohio Donald McArthur Student, SFSU John Korty James McCarthy Student, SFSU Korty Films Paul McCarthy Student, SFSU Leo Kulka Instructor, SFSU Allen R. McClain Student, SFSU Christine McGee Student, SFSU fred LaCosse Dan McGough Staff, SFSU KRON-TV, San Francisco J. Fenton McKenna, Dean James Lamson Student, SFSU School of Creative Arts, SFSU Gerri Lange Faculty, SFSU Joan McKenna, President and KGO-TV, San Francisco Quantum Communications Maggie Law Graduate Student, SFSU Patricia Meier Student, SFSU Albert Ledoux Student, SFSU Jan Merrill Student, SFSU Richard Lee Student, SFSU Quinn Millar Faculty, SFSU Samuel Lee Janet Lee Miller, Cochairman Broadcasting Corporation of China 24th Annual Broadcast Industry Conference Stuart Lefkowitz Student, SFSU Frank Moakley Faculty, SFSU John A. Lent Associate Professor Student, SFSU Temple University, Philadelphia Gloria Moraga Student, SFSU Herb Levy Hary Morgan Faculty, SFSU KRON-TV, San Francisco and KGO Radio,' San Francisco

- 175 - 4 Grace Niska Student, SFSU Henry Rubin Student, SFSU Patricia Noel Student, SFSU Joe Russell Student, SFSU Larry Russell Faculty, SFSU Lori Lee Oliver SFSU Paul Ryan KRON-TV, San Francisco Walter Olson Student, SFSU George Osterkamp KPIX-TV, San Francisco David Sacks Universal Television Michael Sales Graduate Asst., SFSU Forrest Patten Student, SFSU William Sanders, Professor Hugh Pennebaker Staff, SFSU Weber State College, Ogden Student, SFSU Dave Pera Kathleen Sarconi Student, SFSU Larry Perret Faculty, SFSU James Scalem Michael Peterson Student, SFSU KQED-TV, San Francisco Morgen Peterson Staff, SFSU Rhoda Kim Schiller - Student, SFSU Diane Pock Student, SFSU Len Schlosser Alfonso Ponce-Enrile KPIX-TV, San Francisco Philippine. Broadcasting Corp. Yolanda Scott Student, SFSU Rich Ponizo Student, SFSU Delphia Scrogin Student, SFSU Susan Pratt Student, SFSU Barbara Seymour Student, SFSU David Priest Studen4 SFSU Kamlesh Shankar Student, SFSU John Pugh Graduate Assistant, SFSU Allan Silva SFSU Howard Silver Student, SFSU Lee M. Rich, President Barry L. Simmons Lorimar Productions KCBS Radio, San Francisco Janice Richard Student, SFSU Jeffery Sloan Student, SFSU Richard Robertson Carter B. Smith KRON-I V,an Francisco KNBR Radio, San Francisco Thomas Robinson Student, SFSU Charles Smith Faculty, SFSU Shirley Rodriquez Student, SFSU Douglas Smith Student, SFSU John Roina Paul C. Smith Faculty, SFSU KSFO Radio, San Francisco Walter Smith Student, SFSU Paul F. Romberg, President Paul Snodgrass Student, SFSU San Francisco State University Angela Spells Student, SFSU Ernesto Rosales George Steiner Faculty, SFSU Philippine Broadcasting Corp. Ronald Stephenson Student, SFSU Alan Ross Student, SFSU Sherry Stern Student, SFSU Michael Rosso Student, SFSU

- 176 - d Russell Stone Student, SFSU Jordan E. Weinstein Student, SFSU Brent Stranathan Student, SFSU Bradford Welles Student, SFSU Jim Strickling Graduate Asst., SFSU William Wente Faculty, SFSU Howard Sturm Madeline Werner Student, SFSU KNBC, Los Angeles Lee Whiting Mujahidun Sumchai Student, SFSU KKHI Radio, San Francisco Betty Williams Student, SFSU Richard Tabier Student, SFSU Jonathan Willis Student, SFSU James Taylor Student, SFSU Ross Wilson Student, SFSU Scott Taylor Student, SFSU Robert Winard Student, SFSU Jan Teller Student, SFSU Julia Winston Student, SFSU Jerry Tenehbaum Student, SFSU Terry Wise Student, SFSU Lawrence Thomas Student, SFSU David Wiseman Staff, SFSU Rosemary Tobin Student, SFSU Manfred Wolfram Faculty, SFSU Hsiang-Yoad Tsou Ext. Student, SFSU Sally Tucker Student, SFSU Jan Yanehrio KFRC Radio, San Francisco Richard Tugend Student, SFSU

Svanhild Vage Student, SFSU Frank Zamacona Student, SFSU Ian Zellick Richard Vaill Student, SFSU KTVU-TV, San Francisco Robert Vainowski KCBS Radio, San Francisco Herbert Zettl Faculty, SFSU Derk Zimmerman KBHK-TV, can Francisco Erik Wampler Student, Sr SU Keith Zimmerman Student, SFSU Vincent Waskell Faculty, SFSU Kent Zimmerman Student, SFSU Brian Weiner Staff; SFSU Eric Zobler Student, SFSU

149 -177- SUPPLEMENTAL PARTICIPANTS

David Abbey Bob Foster Katz Agency San Mateo Times Trinidad Alconcel, Esq. Doug Fox KWTV, Oklahoma City Consul General for the Philippines John Almen Gregory Frazier Graduate Student, SFSU Ampex Corporatio.i John Armstrong M.A. Candidate, SFSU Carlos Galan Student, SFSU Maria Arnador Student, SFSU Dick Gallegly John ArnottStudent, SFSU Quinn Martin Productions Don Azars Donald L. Garrity KGO-TV, San Francisco Vice President for Academic Affairs, SFSU

Bernice Behrens US Department of State Vita ly Belobodko, Reporter Brian Hauck Student, SFSU Soviet Television & Radio Joanne Hendricks Staff, SFSU Mike Biele, Instructor Harrison Holland Lynbrook High School Director of the Japan Chair, SFSU Nina Blake John Holmes Student, SFSU Television Academy S. M. Hope, Esq. Catherine Brent UC, Berkeley Counsul General for New Zealand Jesse Brown Student, SFSU Bob Huestis KQED-TV, San Francisco Dwayne Hunn Student, SFSU Georgia Calowell Student, SFSU Joe Hunt, Film Maker Alma Carroll Off-camera Nick Ray Productions Constantino Casabuenan, Esq. Joe Hunter Student, SFSU Consul General of Columbia James Hwang Student, SFSU Riley Chavis Student, SFSU John Y. Hwang, President Diane Darrell Off-camera China Broadcasting Corp.

Michael Dowling Robert L. Johns Graduate Student, SFSU Mrs. Barbara Draper Ed La France Deborah Draper KURE Radio, Santa Rosa Douglas Draper Stan Lichtenstein Jim Eason KGSC-TV, San lose KGO Radio, San Francisco Mrs. Frances Lichtenberg

-179 - F

Joshikazu Maeda, Esq. David Sacks, Vice Pr.esident Consul General for Japan Universal Television

William Mason William Sang Graduate Student, SFSU Assoc. Vice President, Acad. Plan., SFSU Frank Schneider Bernard Mayes University Librarian, SFSU KQED-TV, San Francisco Don W. Scobel Director, Public Affairs, SFSU John McCarthy Student, Foothill Col. Bill McDermott Student, SFSU Dave Sholin KFRC Radio, San Francisco David McKee Student, SFSU Clarence Miller Kent Skou Studenr, SFSU Assoc. Dean, Sch. of Creative Arts, SFSU Frederick Stern Graduate Student, SFSU Doug Montgomery KCSM-TV, San Jose Ms. Mary Stoops Mike Morgan KGO-TV, San Francisco Jan Mossofian Graduate Applicant, SFSU Guy Vaughn TV Signal Corporation Jennifer Noble Student, SFSU Yen-Kai Wang, Coordinator Chinese Television Service John Petrie, Operations Manager KBHK-TV, San Francisco Mary Washington Student, SFSU Student, SFSU Dana Porras Allen Wolfe Student, SFSU

Luis Ramos, Esq. Chan Yoon, Esq. Consul General for Peru Consul General for Korea John Robert Film 'Production

Joe Russell Student, SFSU Alexander Zinchuk, Esq. Consul General for the U.S.S.R.

-180- 15 THE CONFERENCE STAFF

REGISTRAR:Mr. Laurence Haughton, Mr. Peter Lipton, Mr. Ed Anderson

UNIVERSITY ADMINISTRATION:Dr. Paul F. Romberg, President. Mr. Don W. Scoble, Director of Public Affairs; Dr. Donald L. Garrity, Vice-President of Academic Affairs; Dr. Harrison Holland, Director, Program for Study of U.S.-Japan Relations; Dr. Harry Freeman, Foreign Student Advisor; Mr. Gary Hammerstrom, Coordinator, International Relations Program; Mr. William J. Mason, Assistant Vice-President of Academic Affairs; Mr. Peter DeWees, Extension Division.

SCHOOL OF CREATIVE ARTS:Dr. J. Fenton McKenna, Dean; Di. Clarence A. Miller and Mr. Raymond Doyle, Associate Deans; Mr. David Wiseman, Director of Operations.

FACULTY, BROADCAST COMMUNICATION ARTS DEPARTMENT:Dr. Stuart W. Hyde, Chairman; Professor Buzz Anderson, Dr. Roger Doudna, Dr. Benjamin P. Draper, Professor John A. Galbraith, Dr. Arthur Hough, Professor Leo Kulka, Professor Gerri Lange, Professor Barbara Linton, Dr. Richard Marsh, Professor Quinn Millar, Professor Janet Lee Miller, Dr. Frank Moakley, Professor Hary Morgan, Professor Sandra Lee Richards, Professor Larry A. Russell, Professor Charles H. Smith, Professor Paul C. Smith, Dr. George Steiner, Professor Vincent Waskell, Dr. William C. Wente, Professor Manfred Wolfram, and Dr. Herbert Zettl.

STAFF, SCHOOL OF CREATIVE ARTS:Mr. Darryl Compton, Mr. Jerry Higgins, Mr. Sam Hom, Mr. James Houghton, Mrs. Betty Jorgensen, Mr. Daniel McGough, Mr. Warren Pappas, Mr. Hugh Pennebaker, Mr. James Provence, Mr. Brian Weiner, and Mr. David Wiseman.

EVENTS AND SESSIONS:Professor Buzz Anderson, Dean Raymond Doyle, Dr. Stuart Hyde, Mrs. Betty Jorgensen, Professor Barbara Linton, Professor Quinn Millar, Professor Janet Lee Miller, Professor Hary Morgan, Professor Larry A. Russell, Professor Paul C. Smith, Dr. George Steiner, Professor Vincent Waskell, Dr. William C. Wente, and Dr. Herbert Zettl.

AWARDS COMMITTEE:Ms. Michele Acosta, Ms. Yolanda Adra, Dr. Benjamin P. Draper, Miss Lid Giannecchini, Dr. Stuart Hyde, Professor Janet Lee Miller, Professor Paul C. Smith, and Dr. William C. Wente.

RECEPTION COMMITTEE:Mrs. Betty Jorgensen, Mr. Ed Anderson, Mr. Brian Hauck, Mr. Bruce Belotz, Mr. Joe Hunter, Ms. Lucia Libretti, Mr. Dave Pera, Mr. Jeff Sloan, The Faculty and their wives.

PUBLICITY:Mr. Ed LaFrance, Mr. Kent Skov.

CATERERS:Mr. Maurice Lasnier, Assistant Director of Catering; Hyatt Regency, San Francisco; Empress of China; Knights Catering; American Hot Coffee; Hunt's Quality Donuts; Magic Chef Delicatessen, The Haven.

TRANSPORTATION AND HOUSING:Mr. Ed Anderson, Mr. Bruce Belotz, and Mr. Brian Hauck.

DR. BENJAMIN P. DRAPER, Conference Chairman Professor JANET LEE MILLER, Conference Co-Chairrtitirr

It will be noted this year Dr. Draper had an extended illness. The work was planned and executed by Professor Miller. Ms. Miller is on the faculty and herself a winner Of, the,coveted Albert Johnson Award in 1969.

181 - r 9 e.)